5. 小双品义注巴利 5. Cūḷayamakavaggo
341 段
《萨雷亚咖经》的注释巴利
1. Sāleyyakasuttavaṇṇanā
439 “如是我闻”这一句,就是《萨雷亚咖经》。其中“在憍萨罗人当中”:所谓“憍萨罗”,本来是指当地的王子们。他们居住的某一地区,也依照习惯用语而被称为“憍萨罗”,意思就是“在憍萨罗那个地区”。不过,古代的老师这样说:从前,国王看到王子玛哈巴那达观看各种戏剧时连一点笑容都没有,就宣布:“谁能让我儿子笑,我就用一切装饰把他打扮起来。”于是人们连犁都扔下不管,大批民众聚集起来,花了七年多时间表演各种娱乐,还是没能让他笑。后来帝释天神派来一位天界舞者,那人表演了天界的戏剧,才让他笑了。于是人们各自朝自己住的地方回去。他们在路上遇见朋友、同伴等人时,互相问候说:“喂,您还好吧?喂,您还好吧?”因此,就依据这“还好,还好”的说法,那个地方被称为“憍萨罗”。巴利
439.Evaṃme sutanti sāleyyakasuttaṃ. Tattha kosalesūti kosalā nāma jānapadino rājakumārā. Tesaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado ruḷhīsaddena kosalāti vuccati, tasmiṃ kosalesu janapade. Porāṇā panāhu – yasmā pubbe mahāpanādaṃ rājakumāraṃ nānānāṭakāni disvā sitamattampi akarontaṃ sutvā rājā āha – ‘‘yo mama puttaṃ hasāpeti, sabbālaṅkārena naṃ alaṅkaromī’’ti. Tato naṅgalānipi chaḍḍetvā mahājanakāye sannipatite manussā sātirekāni sattavassāni nānākīḷikāyo dassetvā naṃ hasāpetuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. Tato sakko devanaṭaṃ pesesi. So dibbanāṭakaṃ dassetvā hasāpesi. Atha te manussā attano attano vasanokāsābhimukhā pakkamiṃsu. Te paṭipathe mittasuhajjādayo disvā paṭisanthāraṃ karontā, ‘‘kacci, bho, kusalaṃ, kacci, bho, kusala’’nti āhaṃsu. Tasmā taṃ ‘‘kusalaṃ kusala’’nti vacanaṃ upādāya so padeso kosalāti vuccatīti.
“游行”是指不慌不忙地游历。“与大比丘僧团一起”是指与人数不定的大比丘僧团同行——或者一百人,或者一千人,或者十万人。“婆罗门村”:婆罗门聚集的村落叫婆罗门村,婆罗门受用的村落也叫婆罗门村。这里指的是聚集的村落。“他到达那里”就是他进入了那里,意思是“抵达了”。不过,这里并没有指定是哪座精舍;因此应当知道,在那村落附近有一片适合诸佛停留的丛林,导师进入了那片丛林。“他们听闻了”是指他们听到了、获知,即顺着传入耳门的话语声而得知。“kho”是用于强调义或句末助词的不变词。其中,依强调义,是指他们确实听闻了,没有任何听闻的障碍,应当如此理解此义;依句末助词,则仅为音节匀称修饰。巴利
Cārikaṃ caramānoti aturitacārikaṃ caramāno. Mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhinti sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā satasahassaṃ vāti evaṃ aparicchinnena mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ. Brāhmaṇagāmoti brāhmaṇānaṃ samosaraṇagāmopi brāhmaṇagāmoti vuccati brāhmaṇānaṃ bhogagāmopi. Idha samosaraṇagāmo adhippeto. Tadavasarīti taṃ avasari, sampattoti attho. Vihāro panettha aniyāmito; tasmā tassa avidūre buddhānaṃ anucchaviko eko vanasaṇḍo bhavissati, satthā taṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ gatoti veditabbo. Assosunti suṇiṃsu upalabhiṃsu. Sotadvārasampattavacananigghosānusārena jāniṃsu. Khoti avadhāraṇatthe padapūraṇamatte vā nipāto. Tattha avadhāraṇatthena assosuṃyeva , na nesaṃ koci savanantarāyo ahosīti ayamattho veditabbo. Padapūraṇena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāmattameva.
现在,为了说明他们听到的内容,经文接着说“贤者们,确实有一位沙门,是乔达摩……”等等。在这里,应当知道,因为已经止息了一切恶,所以称为“沙门”。“确实”是表示传闻的语气词。“贤者”只是他们彼此打招呼的称呼。“乔达摩”是从世尊的种姓来说的。因此,“贤者们,确实有一位沙门,是乔达摩”这句话,应当这样理解:“贤者们,听说有一位沙门,属于乔达摩种姓。”
“释迦子”这一句,则是表明世尊出身于高贵的家族。“从释迦族出家”这一句,是表明他依信心而出家。也就是说,他没有被任何衰败所压倒,在那个家族还没有衰败的时候,就凭着信心舍弃了家族而出家。后面的内容,意思也是一样的。“而那位”是表示“如此这般情形”的宾格用法,意思是“对于那位乔达摩尊者”。“善”是指具足善好的功德,也就是“最胜”的意思。“称誉之声”就是称誉本身,或者指赞叹的声音。“广传”是指传遍了包括天界在内的整个世界,广泛流传。怎样呢?“他确实是这样一位世尊……(中略)……佛陀、世尊。”巴利
Idāni yamatthaṃ assosuṃ, taṃ pakāsetuṃ samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamotiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha samitapāpattā samaṇoti veditabbo. Khalūti anussavanatthe nipāto. Bhoti tesaṃ aññamaññaṃ ālapanamattaṃ. Gotamoti bhagavato gottavasena paridīpanaṃ. Tasmā samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamoti ettha samaṇo kira, bho, gotamagottoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Sakyaputtoti idaṃ pana bhagavato uccākulaparidīpanaṃ. Sakyakulā pabbajitoti saddhāpabbajitabhāvadīpanaṃ. Kenaci pārijuññena anabhibhūto aparikkhīṇaṃyeva taṃ kulaṃ pahāya saddhāpabbajitoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tato paraṃ vuttatthameva. Taṃ kho panāti itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacanaṃ, tassa kho pana bhoto gotamassāti attho. Kalyāṇoti kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgato, seṭṭhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kittisaddoti kittiyeva, thutighoso vā. Abbhuggatoti sadevakaṃ lokaṃ ajjhottharitvā uggato. Kinti? ‘‘Itipi so bhagavā…pe… buddho bhagavā’’ti.
这里句与句之间的关联是这样的:那位世尊,由这些理由而称为阿拉汉,由这些理由而称为正自觉者……(中略)……由这些理由而称为世尊。这就是说,以这个原因,也以那个原因。其中,先以“已远离故、已摧破烦恼敌与轮回辐故、堪受资具等供养故、于作恶无隐秘故”这些理由,立下纲要:“应知那位世尊正是依这些理趣而称为阿拉汉。”然后,所有这些词句,在《清净道论》的“佛随念”解说中都已详细阐明,因此应当从那里取来它们的详细解释。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ padasambandho – so bhagavā itipi arahaṃ, itipi sammāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavāti. Iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ārakattā, arīnaṃ arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvāti imehi tāva kāraṇehi so bhagavā arahanti veditabbotiādinā nayena mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā sabbāneva etāni padāni visuddhimagge buddhānussatiniddese vitthāritānīti tato tesaṃ vitthāro gahetabbo.
这确实很好这句话,说的是美好、能带来利益、能带来安乐。所谓“像乔达摩尊者那样的人即是阿拉汉”,是指具有如此形相者:即使经过无数百千俱胝劫也难得一见,周身环绕着一寻的光明,以八十种随形好庄严,以三十二种殊胜的大人相遍布全身,身体令人欢喜,怎么看都看不厌,说法的声音极其甜美。因为他们如实证得了功德,所以在世间得到了“阿拉汉”这个称号。“得见”是说,哪怕只是睁开清净柔和的眼睛看一眼,这本身就已经很好了。如果能听到他们以具足八支的梵音说法,哪怕只听到一个字,那就更好了——他们是怀着这样的心愿。巴利
Sādhu kho panāti sundaraṃ kho pana; atthāvahaṃ sukhāvahanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathārūpānaṃ arahatanti yathārūpo so bhavaṃ gotamo, evarūpānaṃ anekehipi kappakoṭisatasahassehi dullabhadassanānaṃ byāmappabhāparikkhittehi asītianubyañjanaratanapaṭimaṇḍitehi dvattiṃsmahāpurisalakkhaṇavarehi samākiṇṇamanoramasarīrānaṃ atappakadassanānaṃ atimadhuradhammanigghosānaṃ, yathābhūtaguṇādhigamena loke arahantoti laddhasaddānaṃ arahataṃ. Dassanaṃ hotīti pasādasommāni akkhīni ummīletvā dassanamattampi sādhu hoti. Sace pana aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatena brahmassarena dhammaṃ desentassa ekaṃ padampi sotuṃ labhissāma, sādhutaraṃyeva bhavissatīti evaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ katvā.
他们前往世尊那里,意思是:他们放下了一切事务,满心欢喜地来了。他们说了这番话:提问有两种——在家人的问法和出家人的问法。其中,以“尊者,什么是善,什么是不善?”这种方式来问,是在家人的问法;以“尊者,这五取蕴”这种方式来问,是出家人的问法。而这些人问的是适合自己身份的在家人问题,说出了“乔达摩尊者,到底是什么原因,什么条件……”这样的话。世尊对他们以他们无法领会的方式,就先简略地解答,说了“居士们,正是因为非法行、不正行……”等等。那么,世尊为什么要用他们无法领会的方式来解答呢?因为这些人自认为聪明;如果一开始就列出纲目让他们明白,然后再详细展开义理,他们就会觉得这法教浅显易懂,从而轻视它,还会说“我们来讲也能这样讲”。所以世尊对他们以他们无法领会的方式,就先简略地回答了问题。后来他们无法领会,请求详细解说,世尊为了详细开示,便说“居士们……”等等。其中,“那么”这个词是表示原因的语气词,意思是:因为你们请求我,所以……巴利
Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti sabbakiccāni pahāya tuṭṭhamānasā āgamaṃsu. Etadavocunti duvidhā hi pucchā agārikapucchā anagārikapucchā ca. Tattha ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, kusalaṃ, kiṃ akusala’’nti iminā nayena agārikapucchā āgatā. ‘‘Ime kho, bhante, pañcupādānakkhandhā’’ti iminā nayena anagārikapucchā. Ime pana attano anurūpaṃ agārikapucchaṃ pucchantā etaṃ, ‘‘ko nu kho, bho gotama, hetu ko paccayo’’tiādivacanaṃ avocuṃ. Tesaṃ bhagavā yathā na sakkonti sallakkhetuṃ, evaṃ saṃkhitteneva tāva pañhaṃ vissajjento, adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetu kho gahapatayotiādimāha. Kasmā pana bhagavā yathā na sallakkhenti, evaṃ vissajjesīti? Paṇḍitamānikā hi te; āditova mātikaṃ aṭṭhapetvā yathā sallakkhenti, evaṃ atthe vitthārite, desanaṃ uttānikāti maññantā avajānanti, mayampi kathentā evameva katheyyāmāti vattāro bhavanti. Tena nesaṃ bhagavā yathā na sakkonti sallakkhetuṃ, evaṃ saṃkhitteneva tāva pañhaṃ vissajjesi. Tato sallakkhetuṃ asakkontehi vitthāradesanaṃ yācito vitthārena desetuṃ, tena hi gahapatayotiādimāha. Tattha tena hīti kāraṇatthe nipāto. Yasmā maṃ tumhe yācatha, tasmāti attho.
440 “三种”是指用三个部分来划分。“以身”是指通过身门来做。“非法行邪行”是指被称为非法行的邪行。这里具体的词义是:行于非法就是非法行,意思是造作非法的事;不正地行,或者造作不正的业,就是邪行。它既是非法行,又是邪行,所以合称为“非法行邪行”。按照这个方法,一切黑法(不善法)和白法(善法)中的相关词义都应这样理解。“残酷的”指凶暴。“暴虐的”指胆大妄为、行凶蛮干。“手沾鲜血”指夺取他人性命的人,他们的手被血染污。即使实际上没有沾到血,这样的人仍然被称为“手沾鲜血者”。“住于杀戮与迫害之中”指心思沉溺于杀害他人和打击他人,以及沉溺于对他人致命的伤害。“无怜悯”指变得毫无同情心。巴利
440.Tividhanti tīhi koṭṭhāsehi. Kāyenāti kāyadvārena. Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāti adhammacariyasaṅkhātā visamacariyā. Ayaṃ panettha padattho, adhammassa cariyā adhammacariyā, adhammakaraṇanti attho. Visamā cariyā, visamassa vā kammassa cariyāti visamacariyā. Adhammacariyā ca sā visamacariyā cāti adhammacariyāvisamacariyā. Etenupāyena sabbesu kaṇhasukkapadesu attho veditabbo. Luddoti kakkhaḷo. Dāruṇoti sāhasiko. Lohitapāṇīti paraṃ jīvitā voropentassa pāṇī lohitena lippanti. Sacepi na lippanti, tathāvidho lohitapāṇītveva vuccati. Hatappahate niviṭṭhoti hate ca parassa pahāradāne , pahate ca paramāraṇe niviṭṭho. Adayāpannoti nikkaruṇataṃ āpanno.
“凡是他人所有的”,就是指属于他人的东西。“他人财物资具”,就是指属于那个他人的资生器具,也就是能让物主心生欢喜的用品。“或在村内的”,指放在村庄里面的。“或在阿兰若中的”,指放在阿兰若中树顶、山顶等处的。“未给与的”,指那些东西没有被别人通过身体或言语给与。“称为偷盗的”:这里“贼”就是小偷。贼的状态就是“偷盗”,这是指怀有夺取之心。“称为”和“名为”在意义上是一回事,指的是一个部分、一种类别,就像在“想为因,确有戏论种类”等经文中的用法一样。它既是偷盗,又是被称为如此的,所以叫“称为偷盗的”,意思就是被称为偷盗之心的一个心的类别。这里的词是依作格意义而用的主格形式,因此应当理解为“以称为偷盗的”。巴利
Yaṃ taṃ parassāti yaṃ taṃ parassa santakaṃ. Paravittūpakaraṇanti tasseva parassa vittūpakaraṇaṃ tuṭṭhijananaṃ parikkhārabhaṇḍakaṃ. Gāmagataṃ vāti antogāme vā ṭhapitaṃ. Araññagataṃ vāti araññe rukkhaggapabbatamatthakādīsu vā ṭhapitaṃ. Adinnanti tehi parehi kāyena vā vācāya vā adinnaṃ. Theyyasaṅkhātanti ettha thenoti coro. Thenassa bhāvo theyyaṃ, avaharaṇacittassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Saṅkhā saṅkhātanti atthato ekaṃ, koṭṭhāsassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, ‘‘saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā’’tiādīsu viya. Theyyañca taṃ saṅkhātañcāti theyyasaṅkhātaṃ, theyyacittasaṅkhāto eko cittakoṭṭhāsoti attho . Karaṇatthe cetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ, tasmā theyyasaṅkhātenāti atthato daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在“母护”这一类说法中,如果父亲失踪或去世,母亲靠提供食物、衣服等来照料她,心里想着“等她长大,我要把她嫁到好人家”,这样由母亲守护的女子,就叫“母护”。用同样的方式,也该理解“父护”等说法。而门当户对的家族之间,甚至会在胎儿还在母腹中时就立下约定:“如果我生的是儿子,你生的是女儿,那她不能嫁到别处,只能做我儿子的妻子。”像这样,即使在母胎中就已经被确定归属的女子,就叫“有主”。如果针对某个村庄、某户人家或某条街道定下罚则:“谁若与名叫某某的女子发生关系,就要罚他这么多钱”,这样的女子就叫“有罚”。乃至“仅以花环围绕者”:这是指最低限度的情况,即有人只是凭着“这个女子将成为我的妻子”的念头,把花环扔到她身上,仅凭花环围绕这一点,她就算是被确定了。若对这类女子做出《正见经》中所说的邪淫行为,就是犯了邪淫。巴利
Māturakkhitātiādīsu yaṃ pitari naṭṭhe vā mate vā ghāsacchādanādīhi paṭijaggamānā, vayapattaṃ kulaghare dassāmīti mātā rakkhati, ayaṃ māturakkhitā nāma. Etenupāyena piturakkhitādayopi veditabbā. Sabhāgakulāni pana kucchigatesupi gabbhesu katikaṃ karonti – ‘‘sace mayhaṃ putto hoti, tuyhaṃ dhītā, aññattha gantuṃ na labhissati, mayhaṃ puttasseva hotū’’ti. Evaṃ gabbhepi pariggahitā sassāmikā nāma. ‘‘Yo itthannāmaṃ itthiṃ gacchati, tassa ettako daṇḍo’’ti evaṃ gāmaṃ vā gehaṃ vā vīthiṃ vā uddissa ṭhapitadaṇḍā, pana saparidaṇḍā nāma. Antamaso mālāguṇaparikkhittāpīti yā sabbantimena paricchedena, ‘‘esā me bhariyā bhavissatī’’ti saññāya tassā upari kenaci mālāguṇaṃ khipantena mālāguṇamattenāpi parikkhittā hoti. Tathārūpāsu cārittaṃ āpajjitā hotīti evarūpāsu itthīsu sammādiṭṭhisutte vuttamicchācāralakkhaṇavasena vītikkamaṃ kattā hoti.
“在集会中”(Sabhāgato),指站在集会里。“在大众中”(Parisāgato),指站在大众当中。“在亲族中间”(Ñātimajjhagato),指站在有继承权的亲属中间。“在团体中间”(Pūgamajjhagato),指站在行会众人中间。“在王族中间”(Rājakulamajjhagato),指站在王族作出重大裁决的场合中。“被带去”(Abhinīto),指为了审问而被带去。“被作为证人询问”(Sakkhipuṭṭho),指被当作证人来问。“来,男子!”(Ehambho purisā),这是一句招呼语。“为了自己或为了别人”(Attahetu vā parahetu vā),指为了自己或为了他人,为了手脚等身体方面的原因,或者为了财物。“为了些许利益或微物”(Āmisakiñcikkhahetu vā),这里“利益”(āmisa)指的是得到好处。“微物”(kiñcikkha)指任何一点点小东西。哪怕小到只是一团鹧鸪肉、一团鹌鹑肉、一团酥油、一团鲜黄油之类微不足道的贿赂,这也算。“有意识地说了妄语”(Sampajānamusā bhāsitā hoti),指明明知道却还是说了假话。巴利
Sabhāgatoti sabhāyaṃ ṭhito. Parisāgatoti parisāyaṃ ṭhito. Ñātimajjhagatoti dāyādānaṃ majjhe ṭhito. Pūgamajjhagatoti senīnaṃ majjhe ṭhito. Rājakulamajjhagatoti rājakulassa majjhe mahāvinicchaye ṭhito . Abhinītoti pucchanatthāya nīto. Sakkhipuṭṭhoti sakkhiṃ katvā pucchito. Ehambho purisāti ālapanametaṃ. Attahetu vā parahetu vāti attano vā parassa vā hatthapādādihetu vā dhanahetu vā. Āmisakiñcikkhahetu vāti ettha āmisanti lābho adhippeto. Kiñcikkhanti yaṃ vā taṃ vā appamattakaṃ. Antamaso tittiravaṭṭakasappipiṇḍanavanītapiṇḍādimattakassapi lañjassa hetūti attho. Sampajānamusā bhāsitā hotīti jānantoyeva musāvādaṃ kattā hoti.
“为了离间这些人”,是指对这里所说的那些人,在他们跟前听到的话,为了离间他们。“为了离间那些人”,是指对那里所说的那些人,在他们跟前听到的话,为了离间他们。所谓“或者离间和睦的人”,就是这样去离间原本和睦的两个朋友。“或者对已经分裂的人再加以助成”,意思是:对已经分裂的人说“你做得太好了,你只要抛弃他,过不了几天就能给他造成大祸”,像这样,在已经分裂的人之间再充当撮合、支持、提供理由的人,这就是这句话的意思。喜好朋党、把结党当作乐趣所在,所以叫“好党者”。热衷朋党,就是沉溺、欢喜于结党。“见到或听到朋党就高兴”,是指一看到或一听到有党派纷争就感到欢喜。“说制造朋党的话”,是指说出那种能让本来和睦的众生也分裂成派系的言语。巴利
Imesaṃbhedāyāti yesaṃ itoti vuttānaṃ santike sutaṃ hoti, tesaṃ bhedāya. Amūsaṃ bhedāyāti yesaṃ amutrāti vuttānaṃ santike sutaṃ hoti, tesaṃ bhedāya. Iti samaggānaṃ vā bhedakāti evaṃ samaggānaṃ vā dvinnaṃ sahāyakānaṃ bhedaṃ kattā. Bhinnānaṃ vā anuppadātāti suṭṭhu kataṃ tayā, taṃ pajahantena katipāheneva te mahantaṃ anatthaṃ kareyyāti evaṃ bhinnānaṃ puna asaṃsandanāya anuppadātā upatthambhetā kāraṇaṃ dassetāti attho. Vaggo ārāmo abhiratiṭṭhānamassāti vaggārāmo. Vaggaratoti vaggesu rato. Vagge disvā vā sutvā vā nandatīti vagganandī. Vaggakaraṇiṃ vācanti yā vācā samaggepi satte vagge karoti bhindati, taṃ kalahakāraṇaṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā hoti.
像长瘤一样的话,是指就像有病的树上会长出瘤节,同样,由于内心有嗔病,通过骂人、轻蔑等言语,就产生了像瘤节一样的话。粗涩,就是腐烂。就像一棵腐烂的树粗糙不堪、不断掉落碎屑,这种话也是这样粗涩,听起来像在摩擦耳朵一样。因此说粗涩。恼他,就是对别人刻薄,让人不高兴,引发嗔怒。刺他,就像弯曲带刺的枝条,刺进要害之后,让人想走也走不了,被牢牢钩住。近嗔,就是靠近嗔怒。不趣于定,就是不能导向安止定或近行定。以上这些,全都是带有嗔过失之语的同义词。巴利
Aṇḍakāti yathā sadose rukkhe aṇḍakāni uṭṭhahanti, evaṃ sadosatāya khuṃsanāvambhanādivacanehi aṇḍakā jātā. Kakkasāti pūtikā. Yathā nāma pūtikarukkho kakkaso hoti paggharitacuṇṇo, evaṃ kakkasā hoti, sotaṃ ghaṃsamānā viya pavisati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kakkasā’’ti. Parakaṭukāti paresaṃ kaṭukā amanāpā dosajananī. Parābhisajjanīti kuṭilakaṇṭakasākhā viya mammesu vijjhitvā paresaṃ abhisajjanī gantukāmānampi gantuṃ adatvā lagganakārī. Kodhasāmantāti kodhassa āsannā. Asamādhisaṃvattanikāti appanāsamādhissa vā upacārasamādhissa vā asaṃvattanikā. Iti sabbāneva tāni sadosavācāya vevacanāni.
说“非时说”,就是在不适当的时候说话。说“非实说”,就是说不存在的事。说“非义说”,就是说没有道理、没有意义的话。说“非法说”,就是说违背真实本性的话。说“非律说”,就是说与律仪防护不相应的话。“无藏之语”,是指说出的话根本不值得收藏在心的宝匣里。“非时”,是指在应当说话的时机之前或之后,在不恰当的时候说话。“无经据”,是指缺少经教的依据。“无边际”,是指没有界限,把经文或本生故事搁在一边,也不引用从其中得出的譬喻或事例,只是讲一些外道的闲谈。这样一搁,就真的彻底搁下了,让人不禁要问:“他到底是在讲经文,还是在讲本生故事?我们根本看不到他说话的尽头和边际。”就像孟加拉榕的枝条,气根垂到哪里,就在哪里扎根生长,越长越旺。同样,这种说法也会蔓延半由旬、一由旬地延伸下去,越讲越远,而根本的那棵树却渐渐枯死,只剩下流传下来的本生故事还留着。这样的人就叫“榕树说法者”:他把经文或本生故事一搁下,就只顾东拉西扯地讲下去。相反,如果有人虽然讲得很多,却能引用“这是为了这个目的而说的”来说明、让人理解,那么他这样讲才是可以的。“不相应义”,就是指不依止于意义。巴利
Akālavādīti akālena vattā. Abhūtavādīti yaṃ natthi, tassa vattā. Anatthavādīti akāraṇanissitaṃ vattā. Adhammavādīti asabhāvaṃ vattā . Avinayavādīti asaṃvaravinayapaṭisaṃyuttassa vattā. Anidhānavati vācanti hadayamañjūsāyaṃ nidhetuṃ ayuttaṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā hoti. Akālenāti vattabbakālassa pubbe vā pacchā vā ayuttakāle vattā hoti. Anapadesanti suttāpadesavirahitaṃ. Apariyantavatinti aparicchedaṃ, suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā nikkhipitvā tassa upalabbhaṃ vā upamaṃ vā vatthuṃ vā āharitvā bāhirakathaṃyeva katheti. Nikkhittaṃ nikkhittameva hoti. ‘‘Suttaṃ nu kho katheti jātakaṃ nu kho, nassa antaṃ vā koṭiṃ vā passāmā’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Yathā vaṭarukkhasākhānaṃ gatagataṭṭhāne pārohā otaranti, otiṇṇotiṇṇaṭṭhāne sampajjitvā puna vaḍḍhantiyeva . Evaṃ aḍḍhayojanampi yojanampi gacchantiyeva, gacchante gacchante pana mūlarukkho vinassati, paveṇijātakāva tiṭṭhanti. Evamayampi nigrodhadhammakathiko nāma hoti; nikkhittaṃ nikkhittamattameva katvā passeneva pariharanto gacchati. Yo pana bahumpi bhaṇanto etadatthamidaṃ vuttanti āharitvā jānāpetuṃ sakkoti, tassa kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Anatthasaṃhitanti na atthanissitaṃ.
有贪欲,就是指以贪欲之心去看。啊,但愿——这个“啊,但愿”是表达渴望、希求的感叹词。在这里,仅仅以贪欲的眼光看一眼,还不算构成业道。但当他想“啊,但愿这成为我的所有物,让我能在这里随意支配它”,把它归为自己所有时,就构成了业道。这里所指的就是这种情况。巴利
Abhijjhātā hotīti abhijjhāya oloketā hoti. Aho vatāti patthanatthe nipāto. Abhijjhāya olokitamattakena cettha kammapathabhedo na hoti. Yadā pana, ‘‘aho vatidaṃ mama santakaṃ assa, ahamettha vasaṃ vatteyya’’nti attano pariṇāmeti, tadā kammapathabhedo hoti, ayamidha adhippeto.
心已败坏,就是指心已腐坏、心已烂掉。意恶思,就是指因为嗔怒而心怀恶毒的意图。愿他们被杀,就是愿他们被杀死。愿他们被戮,就是愿他们遭受杀害。愿他们不存在,就是愿他们连一点点都不存在。在这里,仅仅只是生气,还不算违犯业道。只有以“愿他们被杀”这类想法去思惟时,才算违犯,所以才这样说。巴利
Byāpannacittoti vipannacitto pūtibhūtacitto. Paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappoti dosena duṭṭhacittasaṅkappo. Haññantūti ghātiyantū. Vajjhantūti vadhaṃ pāpuṇantu. Mā vā ahesunti kiñcipi mā ahesuṃ. Idhāpi kopamattakena kammapathabhedo na hoti. Haññantūtiādicintaneneva hoti, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ.
邪见者,就是不善的见解者。颠倒见者,就是颠倒的见解者。他说“没有布施”,是就布施没有果报这一点说的。“所供”指的是大祭祀,“所献”指的是馈赠的礼敬,这两者他也都是就它们没有果报而加以否定。“善行与恶行”,就是善行与恶行,意思是善与不善。他说“果报、异熟”——凡是被称为果报或异熟的,他说这些都不存在。他说“没有此世”,意思是对于住在他世的人来说,此世不存在。他说“没有他世”,意思是对于住在此世的人来说,他世也不存在,一切有情就在各自所在之处断灭。他说“没有母亲,没有父亲”,是就对他们行正行或邪行都没有果报这一点说的。他说“没有化生有情”,意思是死后投生的有情并不存在。所谓“那些以神通亲自证知并宣说者”,指的是那些以殊胜的智慧亲自对此世和他世现前证知并宣说出来的人;他说这些人也不存在,这是在表明一切知佛不存在。到这里,就讲完了基于十种事由的邪见。巴利
Micchādiṭṭhikoti akusaladassano. Viparītadassanoti vipallatthadassano. Natthi dinnanti dinnassa phalābhāvaṃ sandhāya vadati. Yiṭṭhaṃ vuccati mahāyāgo. Hutanti paheṇakasakkāro adhippeto, tampi ubhayaṃ phalābhāvameva sandhāya paṭikkhipati. Sukatadukkaṭānanti sukatadukkaṭānaṃ, kusalākusalānanti attho. Phalaṃ vipākoti yaṃ phalanti vā vipākoti vā vuccati, taṃ natthīti vadati. Natthi ayaṃ lokoti paraloke ṭhitassa ayaṃ loko natthi. Natthi paro lokoti idha loke ṭhitassapi paraloko natthi, sabbe tattha tattheva ucchijjantīti dasseti. Natthi mātā natthi pitāti tesu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattīnaṃ phalābhāvavasena vadati. Natthi sattā opapātikāti cavitvā upapajjanakasattā nāma natthīti vadati. Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentīti ye imañca lokaṃ parañca lokaṃ abhivisiṭṭhāya paññāya sayaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā pavedenti, te natthīti sabbaññubuddhānaṃ abhāvaṃ dīpeti, ettāvatā dasavatthukā micchādiṭṭhi kathitā hoti.
441 “离杀生”等七种业道,在《小象迹喻经》里已经详细讲过了。“无贪欲”等,意思本身就很浅显易懂。巴利
441.Pāṇātipātaṃpahāyātiādayo satta kammapathā cūḷahatthipade vitthāritā. Anabhijjhādayo uttānatthāyeva.
442 “得生为同侣”,意思是达到与那些天共处的状态。“梵身天”,就是初禅地的诸天神。“光天”并不是单独存在的一类天,而是少光天、无量光天、光音天的总称。至于“少光天”等,则是不把它们合在一起,而是按它们各自的类别分别列举。“少净天”等也是同样的道理。就这样,世尊开示了漏尽,并以阿拉汉的顶点结束了这次说法。巴利
442.Sahabyataṃ upapajjeyyanti sahabhāvaṃ upagaccheyyaṃ. Brahmakāyikānaṃ devānanti paṭhamajjhānabhūmidevānaṃ. Ābhānaṃ devānanti ābhā nāma visuṃ natthi, parittābhaappamāṇābhaābhassarānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Parittābhānantiādi pana ekato aggahetvā tesaṃyeva bhedato gahaṇaṃ. Parittasubhānantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Iti bhagavā āsavakkhayaṃ dassetvā arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi.
在这里停下来之后,还要把天界合起来算。先说三禅地,共有九个梵天界;五净居天加上四无色界,一共是九个,两边合起来就是十八个;再加上广果天,就是十九个;再把无想天算进去,就是二十个梵天界。这样一来,加上六欲界天,总共就是二十六个天界。对于所有这些天界的投生,世尊都是通过十善业道来开示的。巴利
Idha ṭhatvā pana devalokā samānetabbā. Tissannaṃ tāva jhānabhūmīnaṃ vasena nava brahmalokā, pañca suddhāvāsā catūhi ārūpehi saddhiṃ navāti aṭṭhārasa, vehapphalehi saddhiṃ ekūnavīsati, te asaññaṃ pakkhipitvā vīsati brahmalokā honti, evaṃ chahi kāmāvacarehi saddhiṃ chabbīsati devalokā nāma. Tesaṃ sabbesampi bhagavatā dasakusalakammapathehi nibbatti dassitā.
在这里,先说在六欲界中,投生只是三种善行的果报。至于更高的天界,这些业道则是依近依而说的。因为十善业道就是戒,持戒的人修遍作才能成功。立足于戒,修遍作,证得初禅,就投生在初禅地;修证第二禅等,就投生在第二禅地等。以色界禅为近依,增长观智,安住于不来果后,投生在五净居天。以色界禅为近依,证得无色界定,就投生在四无色界。以色界和无色界禅为近依,增长观智,就证得阿拉汉果。至于无想有情天,是外道苦行者和游方者所执持的,所以这里没有提到。其余各处,文义都很明显。巴利
Tattha chasu tāva kāmāvacaresu tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ vipākeneva nibbatti hoti. Uparidevalokānaṃ pana ime kammapathā upanissayavasena kathitā . Dasa kusalakammapathā hi sīlaṃ, sīlavato ca kasiṇaparikammaṃ ijjhatīti. Sīle patiṭṭhāya kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ nibbattati; dutiyādīni bhāvetvā dutiyajjhānabhūmiādīsu nibbattati; rūpāvacarajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhito pañcasu suddhāvāsesu nibbattati; rūpāvacarajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā arūpāvacarasamāpattiṃ nibbattetvā catūsu arūpesu nibbattati; rūpārūpajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Asaññabhavo pana bāhirakānaṃ tāpasaparibbājakānaṃ āciṇṇoti idha na niddiṭṭho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
2. 《毗兰若经》的注释巴利
2. Verañjakasuttavaṇṇanā
444 “如是我闻”这一段,就是《毗兰若经》。其中,“毗兰若人”指的是住在毗兰若的人。“为了某件应当做的事”是指某件没有确定下来的事务。其余全部内容,都应按照前一部经里所说的方式来理解。只不过在这里,是以“行非法者、行不正道者”这样基于个人的角度来作开示;而前一部经则是基于法的角度来作开示,这就是差别。其余部分完全相同。巴利
444.Evaṃme sutanti verañjakasuttaṃ. Tattha verañjakāti verañjavāsino. Kenacideva karaṇīyenāti kenacideva aniyamitakiccena. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ purimasutte vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Kevalañhi idha adhammacārī visamacārīti evaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā katā. Purimasutte dhammādhiṭṭhānāti ayaṃ viseso. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
3. 《大方广经》的注释巴利
3. Mahāvedallasuttavaṇṇanā
449 “如是我闻”这句,说的是《大方广经》。其中“具寿”是表示恭敬、尊重的称呼。“玛哈果提咖”是那位长老的名字。“从独处出定”指从果定中出来。“劣慧者、劣慧”:这里并不是说慧有恶劣的意思,而是没有慧、缺乏慧的意思。“依何量而”是问因由的界限,意思是依什么情形才这样说。问有五种:未见阐明问、已见合致问、断疑问、同意问、欲说问。它们的差别如下——巴利
449.Evaṃme sutanti mahāvedallasuttaṃ. Tattha āyasmāti sagāravasappatissavacanametaṃ. Mahākoṭṭhikoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. Paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhito. Duppañño duppaññoti ettha paññāya duṭṭhaṃ nāma natthi, appañño nippaññoti attho. Kittāvatā nu khoti kāraṇaparicchedapucchā, kittakena nu kho evaṃ vuccatīti attho. Pucchā ca nāmesā adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā, diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā, vimaticchedanāpucchā, anumatipucchā, kathetukamyatāpucchāti pañcavidhā hoti. Tāsamidaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ –
什么是“未见阐明问”?当某个事物的特征本来就不被知道、不被看见、不被衡量、不被审察、不清楚、不明显时,为了知道它、看见它、衡量它、审察它、弄清楚它、使它显现出来而提出问题,这就是“未见阐明问”。巴利
Katamā adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā? Pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ aññātaṃ hoti adiṭṭhaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ, tassa ñāṇāya dassanāya tulanāya tīraṇāya vibhūtāya vibhāvanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati. Ayaṃ adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā.
什么是验证所见之提问?对于本来已了知、已见、已衡量、已审查、已分明、已明辨的特性,为与其余智者共相印证而提出问题——这即是验证所见之提问。巴利
Katamā diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā? Pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ ñātaṃ hoti diṭṭhaṃ tulitaṃ tīritaṃ vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ, aññehi paṇḍitehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati. Ayaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā.
什么是断疑之问?有人生性就落入疑惑的堆里,陷入犹豫的堆里,变得摇摆不定:“是这样吗?不是这样吗?到底是什么?究竟是怎么回事?”他为了断除疑惑而提出问题,这就是断疑之问。巴利
Katamā vimaticchedanāpucchā? Pakatiyā saṃsayapakkhando hoti vimatipakkhando, dveḷhakajāto, ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, na nu kho, kiṃ nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho’’ti, so vimaticchedanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati. Ayaṃ vimaticchedanāpucchā (mahāni. 150; cūḷani. puṇṇakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 12).
比丘们,你们怎么想?色是常的还是无常的?无常的,尊者。(《大品》21)像这样,在说法时通过这类提问取得听众认可,就叫同意问。巴利
‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vāti? Aniccaṃ, bhante’’ti (mahāva. 21) evarūpā anumatiṃ gahetvā dhammadesanākāle pucchā anumatipucchā nāma.
像这样,自己向比丘僧团提问,又想自己来回答的提问,比如“比丘们,有四念处,是哪四种呢?”(《相应部》5.390),这种提问就叫“欲说问”。在这些提问当中,这里指的是“已见合致问”。巴利
‘‘Cattārome , bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānā, katame cattāro’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.390) evarūpā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sayameva pucchitvā sayameva vissajjetukāmassa pucchā kathetukamyatāpucchā nāma. Tāsu idha diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā adhippetā.
这位长老在自己的白天住处坐下来,自己提出问题,又自己作出判断,把这部经从开头一直贯通到结尾。确实,有的人只会提出问题,却不会判断;有的人会判断,却不会提出问题;有的人两样都不会;有的人两样都会。在这几种人当中,这位长老两样都会。为什么呢?因为他具有大智慧。正是依靠大智慧,在这个教法里,舍利弗长老、玛哈咖佳亚那长老、布纳长老、童子·咖沙巴长老、阿难长老,以及这位尊者等许多长老,才证得了殊胜的地位。因为一个比丘不可能凭着随便哪一种微小的智慧,就达到声闻巴拉密智的顶点;但具有大智慧的人却可以。舍利弗长老正是凭大智慧证得了那个地位。在智慧方面,没有人能跟这位长老相比。正因为这样,世尊把他立为第一,说:诸比丘,在我的声闻比丘弟子中,最具大智慧的人,就是舍利弗。巴利
Thero hi attano divāṭṭhāne nisīditvā sayameva pañhaṃ samuṭṭhapetvā sayaṃ vinicchinanto idaṃ suttaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya matthakaṃ pāpesi. Ekacco hi pañhaṃ samuṭṭhāpetuṃyeva sakkoti na nicchetuṃ; ekacco nicchetuṃ sakkoti na samuṭṭhāpetuṃ; ekacco ubhayampi na sakkoti; ekacco ubhayampi sakkoti. Tesu thero ubhayampi sakkotiyeva. Kasmā? Mahāpaññatāya. Mahāpaññaṃ nissāya hi imasmiṃ sāsane sāriputtatthero, mahākaccānatthero, puṇṇatthero, kumārakassapatthero, ānandatthero, ayameva āyasmāti sambahulā therā visesaṭṭhānaṃ adhigatā. Na hi sakkā yāya vā tāya vā appamattikāya paññāya samannāgatena bhikkhunā sāvakapāramīñāṇassa matthakaṃ pāpuṇituṃ, mahāpaññena pana sakkāti mahāpaññatāya sāriputtatthero taṃ ṭhānaṃ adhigato. Paññāya hi therena sadiso natthi. Teneva naṃ bhagavā etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ mahāpaññānaṃ yadidaṃ sāriputto’’ti (a. ni. 1.189).
同样地,一个比丘只具备一丁点智慧,是不可能把世尊简要所说的法,与一切知智对照、会通之后,再详细地分析其中的义理;只有具足大智慧的人才能做到。玛哈咖佳亚那长老正是凭大智慧,在这方面有了能力,所以世尊把他立为第一,说:比丘们,在我的声闻比丘弟子中,能把简要所说的义理详细分析的,第一就是玛哈咖佳亚那。巴利
Tathā na sakkā yāya vā tāya vā appamattikāya paññāya samannāgatena bhikkhunā bhagavatā saṃkhittena bhāsitassa sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ saṃsanditvā samānetvā vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajetuṃ, mahāpaññena pana sakkāti mahāpaññatāya mahākaccānatthero tattha paṭibalo jāto, teneva naṃ bhagavā etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ saṃkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajantānaṃ yadidaṃ mahākaccāno’’ti (a. ni. 1.197).
同样地,一个只具备一丁点智慧的比丘,在说法时不可能援引十种论题、分析七种清净来宣讲法义;只有具大智慧的人才能做到。满慈长老凭着他的大智慧,在四众弟子围绕之中,登上庄严的法座,手持彩扇,像满月一样优雅从容地说法。正因为这个缘故,世尊把他列为第一,说:比丘们,在我的比丘声闻弟子中,说法第一的就是满慈子。巴利
Tathā na sakkā yāya vā tāya vā appamattikāya paññāya samannāgatena bhikkhunā dhammakathaṃ kathentena dasa kathāvatthūni āharitvā satta visuddhiyo vibhajantena dhammakathaṃ kathetuṃ, mahāpaññena pana sakkāti mahāpaññatāya puṇṇatthero catuparisamajjhe alaṅkatadhammāsane cittabījaniṃ gahetvā nisinno līḷāyanto puṇṇacando viya dhammaṃ kathesi. Teneva naṃ bhagavā etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhammakathikānaṃ yadidaṃ puṇṇo mantāṇiputto’’ti (a. ni. 1.196).
同样地,一个只具备一丁点智慧的比丘在说法时,不管从这边还是那边摸索着走,就像盲人抓着棍子的末端,又像走上了单板独木桥一样。而有大智慧的人则会放下一首四句偈,引出譬喻和理由,掌握三藏佛语,上下贯通地来讲说。童子·咖沙巴长老凭大智慧,放下一首四句偈后,引出譬喻和理由,把它们融会贯通——就像让天然湖泊开满五色花朵,又像在须弥山顶点亮千芯油灯——将三藏佛语上下贯通地讲说出来。正因如此,世尊把他立为第一,说:比丘们,在我的声闻比丘弟子中,善于巧妙说法者,童子·咖沙巴最为第一。巴利
Tathā yāya vā tāya vā appamattikāya paññāya samannāgato bhikkhu dhammaṃ kathento ito vā etto vā anukkamitvā yaṭṭhikoṭiṃ gahetvā andho viya, ekapadikaṃ daṇḍakasetuṃ āruḷho viya ca gacchati. Mahāpañño pana catuppadikaṃ gāthaṃ nikkhipitvā upamā ca kāraṇāni ca āharitvā tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ gahetvā heṭṭhupariyaṃ karonto kathesi. Mahāpaññatāya pana kumārakassapatthero catuppadikaṃ gāthaṃ nikkhipitvā upamā ca kāraṇāni ca āharitvā tehi saddhiṃ yojento jātassare pañcavaṇṇāni kusumāni phullāpento viya sinerumatthake vaṭṭisahassaṃ telapadīpaṃ jālento viya tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ heṭṭhupariyaṃ karonto kathesi. Teneva naṃ bhagavā etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cittakathikānaṃ yadidaṃ kumārakassapo’’ti (a. ni. 1.217).
同样地,一个只具备一点点智慧的比丘,就算花四个月,也掌握不了一首四句偈。可是有大智慧的人,只要站在一句上,就能掌握上百句、上千句。阿难长老因为智慧广大,只凭一次忆持,听一遍就不再问,就能一口气掌握六万法句、一万五千偈颂,轻松得就像从藤蔓上摘花一样。他所掌握的内容,就像刻在石头上的字,又像装进金瓶里的狮子油,一旦记住就原样保持不变。正因为这样,世尊把他列为第一,说:比丘们,在我的声闻比丘弟子中,具足正行第一的,就是阿难;具足正念第一、具足坚忍第一、多闻第一、做侍者第一的,也是阿难。巴利
Tathā yāya vā tāya vā appamattikāya paññāya samannāgato bhikkhu catūhi māsehi catuppadikampi gāthaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti. Mahāpañño pana ekapade ṭhatvā padasatampi padasahassampi gaṇhāti. Ānandatthero pana mahāpaññatāya ekapaduddhāre ṭhatvā sakiṃyeva sutvā puna apucchanto saṭṭhi padasahassāni pannarasa gāthāsahassāni valliyā pupphāni ākaḍḍhitvā gaṇhanto viya ekappahāreneva gaṇhāti. Gahitagahitaṃ pāsāṇe khatalekhā viya, suvaṇṇaghaṭe pakkhittasīhavasā viya ca gahitākāreneva tiṭṭhati. Teneva naṃ bhagavā etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ gatimantānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando , satimantānaṃ, dhitimantānaṃ, bahussutānaṃ, upaṭṭhākānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando’’ti (a. ni. 1.219-223).
确实,一个只具备一丁点智慧的比丘,是不可能达到四无碍解分别的顶峰的。但具大智慧的人就能做到。玛哈果提咖长老正是凭着他大智慧的缘故,依靠证悟、反复询问、听闻和前世积累的修行,达到了四无碍解分别——其内涵无量、理趣殊胜。正因如此,世尊把他列为第一,说:诸比丘,在我的声闻比丘弟子中,证得无碍解的人里,玛哈果提咖最为第一。巴利
Na hi sakkā yāya vā tāya vā appamattikāya paññāya samannāgatena bhikkhunā catupaṭisambhidāpabhedassa matthakaṃ pāpuṇituṃ. Mahāpaññena pana sakkāti mahāpaññatāya mahākoṭṭhitatthero adhigamaparipucchāsavanapubbayogānaṃ vasena anantanayussadaṃ paṭisambhidāpabhedaṃ patto. Teneva naṃ bhagavā etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paṭisambhidāpattānaṃ yadidaṃ mahākoṭṭhito’’ti (a. ni. 1.218).
这位长老凭着大智慧,既能提出问题,也能决断问题,两样都做得到。他白天在住处坐下,自己把一切问题提出来,又自己一一决断,把这部经从开头到结尾贯通到底,然后想:这部法的开示真是清净善美啊。我要去和我的长兄法将舍利弗一起核对。这样一来,这部经由我们两人同心同愿确立下来,就会变得极其坚固,像石伞一样;对想渡过四瀑流的人来说,它就像渡口备好的船;对想上路远行的人来说,它就像套着千匹良马的宝车,能带来大利益。于是他为了和对方核对见解,提出了问题。因此才说:这里指的是为了核对见解而提问。巴利
Iti thero mahāpaññatāya pañhaṃ samuṭṭhāpetumpi nicchetumpīti ubhayampi sakkoti. So divāṭṭhāne nisīditvā sayameva sabbapañhe samuṭṭhapetvā sayaṃ vinicchinanto idaṃ suttaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya matthakaṃ pāpetvā, ‘‘sobhanā vata ayaṃ dhammadesanā, jeṭṭhabhātikena naṃ dhammasenāpatinā saddhiṃ saṃsandissāmi, tato ayaṃ dvinnampi amhākaṃ ekamatiyā ekajjhāsayena ca ṭhapitā atigarukā bhavissati pāsāṇacchattasadisā, caturoghanittharaṇatthikānaṃ titthe ṭhapitanāvā viya, maggagamanatthikānaṃ sahassayuttaājaññaratho viya bahupakārā bhavissatī’’ti diṭṭhasaṃsandanatthaṃ pañhaṃ pucchi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tāsu idha diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā adhippetā’’ti.
“不了知”在这里的意思是:因为不了知,所以被称为“劣慧者”。这个道理适用于一切处。“于‘这是苦’不了知”,就是不能依照真实的自身特相了知苦圣谛——“这是苦,苦只有这么多,超过这个就没有了”。“于‘这是苦的集起’不了知”,就是不能依照真实的自身特相了知“苦从这集起”——那使流转之苦生起的渴爱就是集圣谛。“于‘这是苦的灭尽’不了知”,就是不能依照真实的自身特相了知“这苦和这苦的集起,到达某种状态后就灭尽”——两者不再生起的涅槃就是灭圣谛。“于‘这是通向苦灭尽的道路’不了知”,就是不能依照真实的自身特相了知“这条道路通向苦的灭尽”——那条道就是道圣谛。紧接着的段落也应当按同样的方式理解其义。简略地说,应当知道这里说的是以四圣谛为修行所缘的人。巴利
Nappajānātīti ettha yasmā nappajānāti, tasmā duppaññoti vuccatīti ayamattho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Idaṃ dukkhanti nappajānātīti idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, ito uddhaṃ natthīti dukkhasaccaṃ yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇato na pajānāti. Ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti ito dukkhaṃ samudetīti pavattidukkhapabhāvikā taṇhā samudayasaccanti yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇato na pajānāti. Ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti idaṃ dukkhaṃ ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo ca idaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhatīti ubhinnaṃ appavatti nibbānaṃ nirodhasaccanti yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇato na pajānāti. Ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti ayaṃ paṭipadā dukkhanirodhaṃ gacchatīti maggasaccaṃ yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇato na pajānātīti. Anantaravārepi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Saṅkhepato panettha catusaccakammaṭṭhāniko puggalo kathitoti veditabbo.
这个人是在老师身边,通过听闻来学习四圣谛。他把除了渴爱之外的三界一切法确定为苦圣谛,把渴爱确定为集圣谛,把这两者不再生起的涅槃确定为灭圣谛,把遍知苦圣谛、舍断集圣谛、达到灭谛的道路确定为道圣谛。这样学得之后,他就执取。其中,前二谛属于轮回流转,后二谛属于还灭。众生执取的是流转,不是还灭,所以这个人执取的时候,是执取苦圣谛。巴利
Ayañhi ācariyasantike cattāri saccāni savanato uggaṇhāti. Ṭhapetvā taṇhaṃ tebhūmakā dhammā dukkhasaccaṃ, taṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nibbānaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, dukkhasaccaṃ parijānanto samudayasaccaṃ pajahanto nirodhapāpano maggo maggasaccanti evaṃ uggahetvā abhinivisati. Tattha purimāni dve saccāni vaṭṭaṃ, pacchimāni vivaṭṭaṃ, vaṭṭe abhiniveso hoti, no vivaṭṭe, tasmā ayaṃ abhinivisamāno dukkhasacce abhinivisati.
他先确定:苦谛就是色等五蕴。然后进入界业处的修习,确定四大种以及四大种所造色就是色。接着,以这些色为所缘的受、想、行、识就是名。这样,就像把一对多罗树劈开一样,他确定:只有名和色这两种法。而这个名色不是无因的,而是有因、有缘的。他确定:它的缘是无明等法,以及缘所生法。然后,他把“一切法生起后归于灭尽,所以是无常”这个无常相加上去;接着以生灭逼迫的方式说是苦,以不能自主的方式说是无我。这样把三相加上去之后,依照观修的次第反复观照,就到达出世间道。巴利
Dukkhasaccaṃ nāma rūpādayo pañcakkhandhāti vavatthapetvā dhātukammaṭṭhānavasena otaritvā, ‘‘cattāri mahābhūtāni catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya rūpaṃ rūpa’’nti vavatthapeti. Tadārammaṇā vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāṇaṃ nāmanti evaṃ yamakatālakkhandhaṃ bhindanto viya ‘‘dveva ime dhammā nāmarūpa’’nti vavatthapeti. Taṃ panetaṃ na ahetukaṃ sahetukaṃ sappaccayaṃ, ko cassa paccayo avijjādayo dhammāti evaṃ paccaye ceva paccayuppannadhamme ca vavatthapetvā ‘‘sabbepi dhammā hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā’’ti aniccalakkhaṇaṃ āropeti, tato udayavayappaṭipīḷanākārena dukkhā, avasavattanākārena anattāti tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā sammasanto lokuttaramaggaṃ pāpuṇāti.
在道的刹那,他以一种通达同时通达四圣谛,以一种现观同时现观四圣谛。他以遍知通达而通达苦,以断除通达而通达集,以作证通达而通达灭,以修习通达而通达道。他以遍知现观而现观苦,以断除现观而现观集,以作证现观而现观灭,以修习现观而现观道。他在作用上通达前三个谛,在以灭为所缘上通达灭谛。而在他那个刹那,并没有“我遍知苦,我断除集,我作证灭,我修习道”这样的转向、投入、作意与省察。然而,就在他这样把握的时候,道在完成对前三个谛的遍知等作用的同时,以灭为所缘而通达灭谛。巴利
Maggakkhaṇe cattāri saccāni ekapaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, ekābhisamayena abhisameti. Dukkhaṃ pariññāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati. Samudayaṃ pahānapaṭivedhena, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāpaṭivedhena, maggaṃ bhāvanāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati. Dukkhaṃ pariññābhisamayena abhisameti, samudayaṃ pahānābhisamayena, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayena, maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisameti. So tīṇi saccāni kiccato paṭivijjhati, nirodhaṃ ārammaṇato. Tasmiñcassa khaṇe ahaṃ dukkhaṃ parijānāmi, samudayaṃ pajahāmi, nirodhaṃ sacchikaromi, maggaṃ bhāvemīti ābhogasamannāhāramanasikārapaccavekkhaṇā natthi. Etassa pana pariggaṇhantasseva maggo tīsu saccesu pariññādikiccaṃ sādhentova nirodhaṃ ārammaṇato paṭivijjhatīti.
因此,在“故被称为有慧者”这一句里,从最低标准来说,入流者被指出为有慧者;从最高标准来说,漏已尽者被指出为有慧者。可是,如果有人把三藏佛语从巴利文、义理、前后关联、前后次第都学下来,能上下贯通地运用,却连按无常、苦、无我作一点观照都没有,这个人该叫有慧者,还是叫劣慧者?他其实是识行之人,不能叫有慧者。那么,如果有人把三相套上去,按观照的次第反复审察,心里想“今天,就在今天,要证阿拉汉果”,这样的人该叫有慧者,还是叫劣慧者?若被归类,他属于有慧者这一边。不过在经里,说的正是证悟本身。巴利
Tasmā paññavāti vuccatīti ettha heṭṭhimakoṭiyā sotāpanno, uparimakoṭiyā khīṇāsavo paññavāti niddiṭṭho. Yo pana tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ pāḷito ca atthato ca anusandhito ca pubbāparato ca uggahetvā heṭṭhupariyaṃ karonto vicarati, aniccadukkhānattavasena pariggahamattampi natthi, ayaṃ paññavā nāma, duppañño nāmāti? Viññāṇacarito nāmesa, paññavāti na vattabbo. Atha yo tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā sammasanto ajja ajjeva arahattanti carati, ayaṃ paññavā nāma, duppañño nāmāti? Bhajāpiyamāno paññavāpakkhaṃ bhajati. Sutte pana paṭivedhova kathito.
在这里问“识,识”是在问什么?他是在问:那位以某种识遍察诸行之后而被称为有慧的人,我现在问的就是他修行进程中生起的观照识,也就是造业的心。了知“乐”,就是了知乐受。上面两句也是同样的道理。长老依据“当感受乐受时,他了知‘我感受乐受’”等经文的方式,以受为所缘,开示了无色业处。其含义应按照《念处》中所说的方式来理解。巴利
Viññāṇaṃ viññāṇanti idha kiṃ pucchati? Yena viññāṇena saṅkhāre sammasitvā esa paññavā nāma jāto, tassa āgamanavipassanā viññāṇaṃ kammakārakacittaṃ pucchāmīti pucchati. Sukhantipi vijānātīti sukhavedanampi vijānāti. Uparipadadvayepi eseva nayo. Iminā thero ‘‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmīti pajānātī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.113; dī. ni. 2.380) nayena āgatavedanāvasena arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathesi. Tassattho satipaṭṭhāne vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
他问:是相杂吗?——这里“相杂”是按同一生起等特征、以和合的意思来说的;还是不相杂呢?他这样问。这里不应认为长老是把道慧和观识这两个世间、出世间法混在一起,仿佛不知道领域差别、不知道时机那样来提问。而应理解为:他是在问道慧与道识之间、观慧与观识之间各自是否相杂。长老为他解答这个意思时,说了“这些法相杂……”等话。其中“不可能将这些法”——意思是:无论是在世间道的刹那,还是在出世间道的刹那,对于这两个同时生起的法,一一剥离、一一剥离,也就是分别开来、拆解开来,无论从所缘、依处、生起还是灭去,都无法显示出它们的差别。然而,这些法各有各的作用范围:遇到世间法时,心是主导、是前导;遇到出世间法时,慧是主导。巴利
Saṃsaṭṭhāti ekuppādādilakkhaṇena saṃyogaṭṭhena saṃsaṭṭhā, udāhu visaṃsaṭṭhāti pucchati. Ettha ca thero maggapaññañca vipassanāviññāṇañcāti ime dve lokiyalokuttaradhamme missetvā bhūmantaraṃ bhinditvā samayaṃ ajānanto viya pucchatīti na veditabbo. Maggapaññāya pana maggaviññāṇena, vipassanāpaññāya ca vipassanāviññāṇeneva saddhiṃ saṃsaṭṭhabhāvaṃ pucchatīti veditabbo. Theropissa tamevatthaṃ vissajjento ime dhammā saṃsaṭṭhātiādimāha. Tattha na ca labbhā imesaṃ dhammānanti imesaṃ lokiyamaggakkhaṇepi lokuttaramaggakkhaṇepi ekato uppannānaṃ dvinnaṃ dhammānaṃ. Vinibbhujitvā vinibbhujitvāti visuṃ visuṃ katvā vinivaṭṭetvā, ārammaṇato vā vatthuto vā uppādato vā nirodhato vā nānākaraṇaṃ dassetuṃ na sakkāti attho. Tesaṃ tesaṃ pana dhammānaṃ visayo nāma atthi. Lokiyadhammaṃ patvā hi cittaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, lokuttaraṃ patvā paññā.
正自觉者即使询问世间法时,也不会这样问:“比丘,你证得了哪种慧?是初道慧,还是第二、第三、第四道慧?”他不会问:“比丘,你是什么触?你是什么受?你是什么想?你是什么思?”而是依心而问:“比丘,你以什么为心?”在说明善与不善时,也是依心来说明,如说“诸法以意为前导,以意为最胜,由意所成”,又说“哪些法是善?当欲界善心生起之时”。然而,询问出世间法时,他不会问“比丘,你是什么触?你是什么受?你是什么想?你是什么思?”而是依慧而问:“比丘,你证得了哪种慧?是初道慧,还是第二、第三、第四道慧?”巴利
Sammāsambuddhopi hi lokiyadhammaṃ pucchanto, ‘‘bhikkhu, tvaṃ katamaṃ paññaṃ adhigato, kiṃ paṭhamamaggapaññaṃ, udāhu dutiya tatiya catuttha maggapañña’’nti na evaṃ pucchati. Kiṃ phasso tvaṃ, bhikkhu, kiṃ vedano, kiṃ sañño, kiṃ cetanoti na ca pucchati, cittavasena pana, ‘‘kiñcitto tvaṃ, bhikkhū’’ti (pārā. 135) pucchati. Kusalākusalaṃ paññapentopi ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, manoseṭṭhā manomayā’’ti (dha. pa. 1, 2) ca, ‘‘katame dhammā kusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’ti (dha. sa. 1) ca evaṃ cittavaseneva paññāpeti. Lokuttaraṃ pucchanto pana kiṃ phasso tvaṃ bhikkhu, kiṃ vedano, kiṃ sañño, kiṃ cetanoti na pucchati. Katamā te, bhikkhu, paññā adhigatā, kiṃ paṭhamamaggapaññā, udāhu dutiyatatiyacatutthamaggapaññāti evaṃ paññāvaseneva pucchati.
在《根相应》里也是这样说的:“比丘们,有这五种根。哪五种呢?信根、精进根、念根、定根、慧根。比丘们,信根应该在哪里来看呢?应该在四入流支里来看信根。比丘们,精进根应该在哪里来看呢?应该在四正勤里来看精进根。比丘们,念根应该在哪里来看呢?应该在四念处里来看念根。比丘们,定根应该在哪里来看呢?应该在四禅里来看定根。比丘们,慧根应该在哪里来看呢?应该在四圣谛里来看慧根。”(《相应部》5.478)这样一来,世间法和出世间法就都在它们各自的范围内被讲清楚了。巴利
Indriyasaṃyuttepi ‘‘pañcimāni, bhikkhave, indriyāni. Katamāni pañca? Saddhindriyaṃ vīriyindriyaṃ satindriyaṃ samādhindriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ. Kattha ca, bhikkhave, saddhindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ? Catūsu sotāpattiyaṅgesu ettha saddhindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kattha ca, bhikkhave, vīriyindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ? Catūsu sammappadhānesu ettha vīriyindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kattha ca, bhikkhave, satindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ? Catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu ettha satindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kattha ca, bhikkhave, samādhindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ? Catūsu jhānesu ettha samādhindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kattha ca, bhikkhave, paññindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ? Catūsu ariyasaccesu ettha paññindriyaṃ daṭṭhabba’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.478). Evaṃ savisayasmiṃyeva lokiyalokuttarā dhammā kathitā.
就像四位富商之子,加上国王一共五位朋友,他们想:“我们去逛星宿节吧”,于是一起走上了大街。当他们走进第一位富商之子家里时,其余四个人都默默坐着,只有那家的主人张罗着:“给这些人拿些嚼食和软食来,拿些香、花鬘和装饰品来。”走进第二位、第三位、第四位富商之子家里时,其余四个人也是默默坐着,同样只有那家的主人张罗着:“给这些人拿些嚼食和软食来,拿些香、花鬘和装饰品来。”最后走进国王家里时,国王虽然在哪儿都是主宰,但这时候也只在自己家里张罗着:“给这些人拿些嚼食和软食来,拿些香、花鬘和装饰品来。”
同样地,当以信根为首的五根,像那五位朋友一起走上大街那样,在同一个所缘上生起时:就像走进第一家时,其余四人默默坐着,只有主人来张罗一样——当到达入流支时,具有胜解特相的信根就成为首要的、走在前面的,其余诸根则跟随它。就像走进第二家时,其余四人默默坐着,只有主人来张罗一样——当到达正勤时,具有策励特相的精进根就成为首要的、走在前面的,其余诸根则跟随它。就像走进第三家时,其余四人默默坐着,只有主人来张罗一样——当到达念处时,具有现起特相的念根就成为首要的、走在前面的,其余诸根则跟随它。就像走进第四家时,其余四人默默坐着,只有主人来张罗一样——当到达禅定与解脱时,具有不散乱特相的定根就成为首要的、走在前面的,其余诸根则跟随它。最后走进国王家里时,就像其余四人默默坐着、只有国王来张罗一样——当到达圣谛时,具有了知特相的慧根就成为首要的、走在前面的,其余诸根则跟随它。巴利
Yathā hi cattāro seṭṭhiputtā rājāti rājapañcamesu sahāyesu nakkhattaṃ kīḷissāmāti vīthiṃ otiṇṇesu ekassa seṭṭhiputtassa gehaṃ gatakāle itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova, ‘‘imesaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ detha, gandhamālālaṅkārādīni dethā’’ti gehe vicāreti. Dutiyassa tatiyassa catutthassa gehaṃ gatakāle itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova, ‘‘imesaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ detha, gandhamālālaṅkārādīni dethā’’ti gehe vicāreti. Atha sabbapacchā rañño gehaṃ gatakāle kiñcāpi rājā sabbattha issarova, imasmiṃ pana kāle attano geheyeva, ‘‘imesaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ detha, gandhamālālaṅkārādīni dethā’’ti vicāreti. Evamevaṃ kho saddhāpañcamakesu indriyesu tesu sahāyesu ekato vīthiṃ otarantesu viya ekārammaṇe uppajjamānesupi yathā paṭhamassa gehe itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova vicāreti, evaṃ sotāpattiyaṅgāni patvā adhimokkhalakkhaṇaṃ saddhindriyameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni honti. Yathā dutiyassa gehe itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova vicāreti, evaṃ sammappadhānāni patvā paggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ vīriyindriyameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni honti. Yathā tatiyassa gehe itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova vicāreti, evaṃ satipaṭṭhānāni patvā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ satindriyameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni honti. Yathā catutthassa gehe itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova vicāreti, evaṃ jhānavimokkhe patvā avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ samādhindriyameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni honti. Sabbapacchā rañño gehaṃ gatakāle pana yathā itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, rājāva gehe vicāreti, evameva ariyasaccāni patvā pajānanalakkhaṇaṃ paññindriyameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni honti.
就这样,已经证得无碍解、被安立在最上首的玛哈果提达长老,在问世间法时,是以心为首、以心为先导来发问;在问出世间法时,是以慧为首、以慧为先导来发问。法将舍利弗长老也同样如此回答。巴利
Iti paṭisambhidāpattānaṃ agge ṭhapito mahākoṭṭhitatthero lokiyadhammaṃ pucchanto cittaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ cittaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā pucchi; lokuttaradhammaṃ pucchanto paññaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ paññaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā pucchi. Dhammasenāpatisāriputtattheropi tatheva vissajjesīti.
友啊,所谓“了知”,是指道慧以“这是苦”等四圣谛的方式来了知。所谓“它识知”,是指道识也同样那样识知它。所谓“识知”,是指观识以“诸行无常”等方式识知。所谓“它了知”,是指观慧也同样那样了知它。因此,这些法——就是因为这个原因,这些法。所谓“相杂”,是因为同生、同灭、同依处、同所缘,所以相杂。巴利
Yaṃ hāvuso, pajānātīti yaṃ catusaccadhammamidaṃ dukkhantiādinā nayena maggapaññā pajānāti. Taṃ vijānātīti maggaviññāṇampi tatheva taṃ vijānāti. Yaṃ vijānātīti yaṃ saṅkhāragataṃ aniccantiādinā nayena vipassanāviññāṇaṃ vijānāti. Taṃ pajānātīti vipassanāpaññāpi tatheva taṃ pajānāti. Tasmā ime dhammāti tena kāraṇena ime dhammā. Saṃsaṭṭhāti ekuppādaekanirodhaekavatthukaekārammaṇatāya saṃsaṭṭhā.
“慧应当修习”这句话,是就道慧而说的。与它相应的识,也应当和它一起修习。“识应当遍知”这句话,是就观识而说的。与它相应的慧,也应当和它一起遍知。巴利
Paññā bhāvetabbāti idaṃ maggapaññaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Taṃsampayuttaṃ pana viññāṇaṃ tāya saddhiṃ bhāvetabbameva hoti. Viññāṇaṃ pariññeyyanti idaṃ vipassanāviññāṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Taṃsampayuttā pana paññā tena saddhiṃ parijānitabbāva hoti.
450 问“受、受”,这是为了什么?是为了要问受的特相。即便如此,也应当知道这里指的是三地遍观行的受。“感受乐”,就是感受、体验乐的所缘。后面两句的道理也是这样。依照《玛哈离经》这个说法:“玛哈离,如果这个色完全是苦,随苦而行,浸在苦里,不浸在乐里,众生就不会对色生起贪染。玛哈离,正因为色是乐,随乐而行,浸在乐里,不浸在苦里,所以众生才会对色生起贪染;有贪染就有结缚,有结缚就有杂染。玛哈离,受……想……行……玛哈离,如果这个识完全是苦……中略……杂染。”这里就是依据这部经,把所缘说为乐、苦、不苦不乐。另外还应这样理解:以前面的乐受为所缘,后面的乐受才去感受;以前面的苦受为所缘,后面的苦受才去感受;以前面的不苦不乐受为所缘,后面的不苦不乐受才去感受。因为实际上只有受本身在感受,并没有另一个叫做感受者的东西存在。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
450.Vedanā vedanāti idaṃ kasmā pucchati? Vedanālakkhaṇaṃ pucchissāmīti pucchati. Evaṃ santepi tebhūmikasammasanacāravedanāva adhippetāti sallakkhetabbā. Sukhampi vedetīti sukhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ vedeti anubhavati. Parato padadvayepi eseva nayo. ‘‘Rūpañca hidaṃ, mahāli, ekantadukkhaṃ abhavissa, dukkhānupatitaṃ dukkhāvakkantaṃ anavakkantaṃ sukhena, nayidaṃ sattā rūpasmiṃ sārajjeyyuṃ. Yasmā ca kho, mahāli, rūpaṃ sukhaṃ sukhānupatitaṃ sukhāvakkantaṃ anavakkantaṃ dukkhena, tasmā sattā rūpasmiṃ sārajjanti, sārāgā saṃyujjanti, saṃyogā saṃkilissanti. Vedanā ca hidaṃ… saññā… saṅkhārā… viññāṇañca hidaṃ, mahāli, ekantadukkhaṃ abhavissa…pe… saṃkilissantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.70) iminā hi mahālisuttapariyāyena idha ārammaṇaṃ sukhaṃ dukkhaṃ adukkhamasukhanti kathitaṃ. Apica purimaṃ sukhaṃ vedanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā aparā sukhā vedanā vedeti; purimaṃ dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā aparā dukkhā vedanā vedeti; purimaṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā aparā adukkhamasukhā vedanā vedetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Vedanāyeva hi vedeti, na añño koci veditā nāma atthīti vuttametaṃ.
这里问“想、想”,到底是在问什么?是在问一切想的特相。那什么是“一切处想”呢?一切想的特相和一切处想的特相其实是同一回事。即便如此,也应该知道,这里指的仍然是三地遍观行的想。“认知青”,就是取青色的花或青色的布作为遍作,然后引发近行定或安止定,从而加以认知。在这个意义上,遍作想、近行想、安止想都适用。对于青色生起“青色”的想,也同样适用。对黄色等其他颜色,道理也是这样。巴利
Saññāsaññāti idha kiṃ pucchati? Sabbasaññāya lakkhaṇaṃ. Kiṃ sabbatthakasaññāyāti? Sabbasaññāya lakkhaṇantipi sabbatthakasaññāya lakkhaṇantipi ekamevetaṃ, evaṃ santepi tebhūmikasammasanacārasaññāva adhippetāti sallakkhetabbā. Nīlakampi sañjānātīti nīlapupphe vā vatthe vā parikammaṃ katvā upacāraṃ vā appanaṃ vā pāpento sañjānāti. Imasmiñhi atthe parikammasaññāpi upacārasaññāpi appanāsaññāpi vaṭṭati. Nīle nīlanti uppajjanakasaññāpi vaṭṭatiyeva. Pītakādīsupi eseva nayo.
“友,受”这里,取了受、想、识这三项,那为什么不把慧也取进来呢?因为它不能统摄一切。因为一旦取了慧,就只能得到与慧相应的受等法,得不到与慧不相应的那些。而如果不取慧,只取这三项,那么无论与慧相应的还是与慧不相应的,甚至最末两种五识法,都能得到。就好比三个人说“线、线”,第四个人说“穿宝珠的线”。前三个人能得到的线很多——不管是棉线、捻线,随便什么线,甚至蜘蛛丝也算线;而那个专门找穿宝珠之线的人,能找到的线却很少。应当知道这个比喻就是这个道理。也有人说:因为慧在前面已经和识一起被关联过了,这里放开不取,所以此处不再取它。“友,彼感受”是说:受感受什么所缘,想也认知那同一个所缘。“彼认知”是说:想认知什么所缘,识也识知那同一个所缘。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Yā cāvuso, vedanāti ettha vedanā, saññā, viññāṇanti imāni tīṇi gahetvā paññā kasmā na gahitāti? Asabbasaṅgāhikattā. Paññāya hi gahitāya paññāya sampayuttāva vedanādayo labbhanti, no vippayuttā. Taṃ pana aggahetvā imesu gahitesu paññāya sampayuttā ca vippayuttā ca antamaso dve pañcaviññāṇadhammāpi labbhanti. Yathā hi tayo purisā suttaṃ suttanti vadeyyuṃ, catuttho ratanāvutasuttanti. Tesu purimā tayo takkagatampi paṭṭivaṭṭakādigatampi yaṃkiñci bahuṃ suttaṃ labhanti antamaso makkaṭakasuttampi. Ratanāvutasuttaṃ pariyesanto mandaṃ labhati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Heṭṭhato vā paññā viññāṇena saddhiṃ sampayogaṃ labhāpitā vissaṭṭhattāva idha na gahitāti vadanti. Yaṃ hāvuso, vedetīti yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ vedanā vedeti, saññāpi tadeva sañjānāti. Yaṃ sañjānātīti yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ saññā sañjānāti, viññāṇampi tadeva vijānātīti attho.
现在要理解“想认知、识认知、慧了知”这几个说法之间的区别。这里的区别只在于前缀不同,而“知”这个词本身并没有差别。不过,即使在“知”这个意义上,它们各自的作用也应当了解。想只是以蓝色等外观来认知所缘,做不到通达无常、苦、无我的特相。识既能以蓝色等外观认知所缘,也能通达无常等特相,但再怎么努力,也无法让圣道显现。慧既能以蓝色等外观认知所缘,也能通达无常等特相,而且通过努力,还能让圣道显现。巴利
Idāni sañjānāti vijānāti pajānātīti ettha viseso veditabbo. Tattha upasaggamattameva viseso. Jānātīti padaṃ pana aviseso. Tassāpi jānanatthe viseso veditabbo. Saññā hi nīlādivasena ārammaṇaṃ sañjānanamattameva, aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti. Viññāṇaṃ nīlādivasena ārammaṇañceva sañjānāti, aniccādilakkhaṇapaṭivedhañca pāpeti, ussakkitvā pana maggapātubhāvaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti. Paññā nīlādivasena ārammaṇampi sañjānāti, aniccādivasena lakkhaṇapaṭivedhampi pāpeti, ussakkitvā maggapātubhāvaṃ pāpetumpi sakkoti.
就像在金匠的台板上放着一堆钱币,有三个站在一旁看着:一个还不懂事的小孩、一个乡下人、一个大金匠。那个还不懂事的小孩,只知道这些钱币有各种花纹、颜色和方形圆形的样子,不知道这是人们拿来使用、享受、被当成珍宝的东西。那个乡下人既知道花纹颜色这些,也知道这是人们使用、享受、被当成珍宝的东西,但他分不清“这枚是假的,这枚是真的,这枚是半真半假的,这枚是打磨过的”。大金匠则花纹颜色这些也知道,是珍宝也知道,真假好坏这些差别也知道。而且他辨认的时候,看一眼外形就知道,听敲击的声音也知道,闻气味也知道,尝味道也知道,用手掂一掂轻重也知道;甚至还能知道这枚钱币是在哪个村子做的、哪个镇上做的、哪座城市做的,在哪座山的阴影下做的、哪条河的岸边做的,是哪位师父做的。同样地,想就像那个不懂事的小孩看钱币,只是以青黄等颜色去认知对象而已。识就像那个乡下人看钱币,既以颜色等认知对象,也能进一步通达无常等特相。慧就像大金匠看钱币,既以颜色等认知对象,也能通达无常等特相,还能更进一步让圣道显现出来。它们之间的这些差别,是很难看透的。巴利
Yathā hi heraññikaphalake kahāpaṇarāsimhi kate ajātabuddhi dārako gāmikapuriso mahāheraññikoti tīsu janesu oloketvā ṭhitesu ajātabuddhi dārako kahāpaṇānaṃ cittavicittacaturassamaṇḍalabhāvameva jānāti, idaṃ manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ ratanasammatanti na jānāti. Gāmikapuriso cittādibhāvañceva jānāti, manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaratanasammatabhāvañca. ‘‘Ayaṃ kūṭo ayaṃ cheko ayaṃ karato ayaṃ saṇho’’ti pana na jānāti. Mahāheraññiko cittādibhāvampi ratanasammatabhāvampi kūṭādibhāvampi jānāti, jānanto ca pana naṃ rūpaṃ disvāpi jānāti, ākoṭitassa saddaṃ sutvāpi, gandhaṃ ghāyitvāpi, rasaṃ sāyitvāpi, hatthena garukalahukabhāvaṃ upadhāretvāpi asukagāme katotipi jānāti, asukanigame asukanagare asukapabbatacchāyāya asukanadītīre katotipi, asukācariyena katotipi jānāti. Evamevaṃ saññā ajātabuddhidārakassa kahāpaṇadassanaṃ viya nīlādivasena ārammaṇamattameva sañjānāti. Viññāṇaṃ gāmikapurisassa kahāpaṇadassanaṃ viya nīlādivasena ārammaṇampi sañjānāti, aniccādivasena lakkhaṇapaṭivedhampi pāpeti. Paññā mahāheraññikassa kahāpaṇadassanaṃ viya nīlādivasena ārammaṇampi sañjānāti, aniccādivasena lakkhaṇapaṭivedhampi pāpeti, ussakkitvā maggapātubhāvampi pāpeti. So pana nesaṃ viseso duppaṭivijjho.
因此,那先尊者说:“大王,世尊做了一件极难的事。” “尊者那先,世尊做了什么极难的事呢?” “大王,世尊所做的极难之事,就是对于这些在同一所缘上生起的无色之心与心所法,加以区分说明:‘这是触,这是受,这是想,这是思,这是心。’ 好比把芝麻油、芥子油、摩虎迦树油、蓖麻油、兽脂油这五种油倒进同一个罐子里,整日用两根杵反复搅拌,然后要从中一一分辨取出:‘这是芝麻油,这是芥子油’,要这样一样一样地分出来,是极难的,而世尊所做的比这更难。然而,世尊因为彻底通达一切知智,是法主、法王,所以能对这些在同一所缘上生起的无色之法加以区分说明。这个道理,也可以从五大河流入大海之处来理解:以一一取水说‘这是恒河的水,这是耶牟那河的水’亦可了知此义。”巴利
Tenāha āyasmā nāgaseno – ‘‘dukkaraṃ, mahārāja, bhagavatā katanti. Kiṃ, bhante, nāgasena bhagavatā dukkaraṃ katanti? Dukkaraṃ, mahārāja, bhagavatā kataṃ, imesaṃ arūpīnaṃ cittacetasikānaṃ dhammānaṃ ekārammaṇe pavattamānānaṃ vavatthānaṃ akkhātaṃ, ayaṃ phasso, ayaṃ vedanā, ayaṃ saññā, ayaṃ cetanā, idaṃ citta’’nti (mi. pa. 2.7.16). Yathā hi tilatelaṃ, sāsapatelaṃ, madhukatelaṃ, eraṇḍakatelaṃ, vasātelanti imāni pañca telāni ekacāṭiyaṃ pakkhipitvā divasaṃ yamakamanthehi manthetvā tato idaṃ tilatelaṃ, idaṃ sāsapatelanti ekekassa pāṭiyekkaṃ uddharaṇaṃ nāma dukkaraṃ, idaṃ tato dukkarataraṃ. Bhagavā pana sabbaññutaññāṇassa suppaṭividdhattā dhammissaro dhammarājā imesaṃ arūpīnaṃ dhammānaṃ ekārammaṇe pavattamānānaṃ vavatthānaṃ akkhāsi. Pañcannaṃ mahānadīnaṃ samuddaṃ paviṭṭhaṭṭhāne, ‘‘idaṃ gaṅgāya udakaṃ, idaṃ yamunāyā’’ti evaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ udakauddharaṇenāpi ayamattho veditabbo.
451 “已出离的”:就是已经出离、已经舍弃的意思。这里,如果取“已出离”这个意思,那么“由五根”是表示来源的格;如果取“已舍弃”这个意思,就应该理解为表示工具的格。这段话的意思是:从五根出离之后,在意门中生起的;或者因为五根不再成为它的依处,所以说是被舍弃的。“清净的”:就是没有随烦恼的。“以意识”:就是以属于色界第四禅的心。“应知什么”:就是应当了知什么。因为在《大义释》等中,“应知”指的就是应当被了知的法。“空无边处应知”:为什么以色界第四禅的心能够了知无色界的等至呢?因为安住在色界第四禅的人能够生起无色界的等至,安住在这个禅里就能成就它,所以说“空无边处应知”等等。那么,为什么不提“非想非非想处”呢?因为没有各别的偏着。在那里,只能以总聚、以理法来观照。即使是像法将舍利弗那样的比丘,也不会生起各别的偏着。所以舍利弗长老也只是以总聚、以理法观照之后,才解释说:“诸法确实是先前没有而后生起,生起之后又灭去。”然而,世尊因为一切知智已在手中,即使对非想非非想处等至,也能把超过五十种法各各一一举出,并说:“凡有想的等至,其范围就与证得更高的智相等。”巴利
451.Nissaṭṭhenāti nissaṭena pariccattena vā. Tattha nissaṭenāti atthe sati pañcahi indriyehīti nissakkavacanaṃ. Pariccattenāti atthe sati karaṇavacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – pañcahi indriyehi nissaritvā manodvāre pavattena pañcahi vā indriyehi tassa vatthubhāvaṃ anupagamanatāya pariccattenāti. Parisuddhenāti nirupakkilesena. Manoviññāṇenāti rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānacittena. Kiṃ neyyanti kiṃ jānitabbaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃkiñci neyyaṃ nāma atthi dhamma’’ntiādīsu (mahāni. 69) hi jānitabbaṃ neyyanti vuttaṃ. Ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ neyyanti kathaṃ rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānacittena arūpāvacarasamāpatti neyyāti? Rūpāvacaracatutthajjhāne ṭhitena arūpāvacarasamāpattiṃ nibbattetuṃ sakkā hoti. Ettha ṭhitassa hi sā ijjhati. Tasmā ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ neyya’’ntiādimāha. Atha nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ kasmā na vuttanti? Pāṭiyekkaṃ abhinivesābhāvato. Tattha hi kalāpato nayato sammasanaṃ labbhati, dhammasenāpatisadisassāpi hi bhikkhuno pāṭiyekkaṃ abhiniveso na jāyati. Tasmā theropi, ‘‘evaṃ kirame dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.94) kalāpato nayato sammasitvā vissajjesīti. Bhagavā pana sabbaññutaññāṇassa hatthagatattā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyampi paropaññāsa dhamme pāṭiyekkaṃ aṃguddhāreneva uddharitvā, ‘‘yāvatā saññāsamāpattiyo, tāvatā aññāpaṭivedho’’ti āha.
用慧眼来了知,意思是:以能引导见、已成为眼的慧来了知。这里面有两种慧:定慧和观慧。以定慧,从作用和不错乱两方面来了知;以观慧,则是通过通达特征、从所缘方面来了知,这叫作“知”。为了什么目的呢?就是说,这有什么意义?在“为证智目的”等说法中,对于应当证知的法能够证知,所以叫“证智目的”;对于应当遍知的法能够遍知,所以叫“遍知目的”;对于应当断除的法能够断除,所以叫“断除目的”。而这两种慧,如果是世间的,也都有证智目的、遍知目的和断除目的,不过断除是靠压伏;如果是出世间的,也都有证智目的、遍知目的和断除目的,不过断除是靠彻底断根。其中,世间慧从作用和不错乱两方面来了知,出世间慧则只从不错乱方面来了知。巴利
Paññācakkhunā pajānātīti dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhena cakkhubhūtāya paññāya pajānāti. Tattha dve paññā samādhipaññā vipassanāpaññā ca. Samādhipaññāya kiccato asammohato ca pajānāti. Vipassanāpaññāya lakkhaṇapaṭivedhena ārammaṇato jānanaṃ kathitaṃ. Kimatthiyāti ko etissā attho. Abhiññatthātiādīsu abhiññeyye dhamme abhijānātīti abhiññatthā. Pariññeyye dhamme parijānātīti pariññatthā. Pahātabbe dhamme pajahatīti pahānatthā. Sā panesā lokiyāpi abhiññatthā ca pariññatthā ca vikkhambhanato pahānatthā. Lokuttarāpi abhiññatthā ca pariññatthā ca samucchedato pahānatthā. Tattha lokiyā kiccato asammohato ca pajānāti, lokuttarā asammohato.
452 “为了正见的生起”:就是为了观正见和道正见的生起。“以及从他人而来的善语”:就是听闻适合自己的法。“以及如理作意”:就是自己恰当地作意。在这里,即使是声闻弟子当中像法将(舍利弗)那样的人物,也还是必须获得这两种缘。因为舍利弗长老虽然圆满了超过十万劫又一个大阿僧祇劫的巴拉密,仅靠自身的法性,连极微小的烦恼都没能断除。直到从阿萨吉长老那里听到“诸法从因生”这首偈颂之后,他才通达。然而,对于独觉佛和一切知佛来说,并没有“从他人而来的善语”这一项,他们只依靠如理作意,就生起独觉菩提和一切知智。巴利
452.Sammādiṭṭhiyā uppādāyāti vipassanāsammādiṭṭhiyā ca maggasammādiṭṭhiyā ca. Parato ca ghosoti sappāyadhammassavanaṃ. Yoniso ca manasikāroti attano upāyamanasikāro. Tattha sāvakesu api dhammasenāpatino dve paccayā laddhuṃ vaṭṭantiyeva. Thero hi kappasatasahassādhikaṃ ekaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ pāramiyo pūretvāpi attano dhammatāya aṇumattampi kilesaṃ pajahituṃ nāsakkhi. ‘‘Ye dhammā hetuppabhavā’’ti (mahāva. 60) assajittherato imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvāvassa paṭivedho jāto. Paccekabuddhānaṃ pana sabbaññubuddhānañca paratoghosakammaṃ natthi, yonisomanasikārasmiṃyeva ṭhatvā paccekabodhiñca sabbaññutaññāṇañca nibbattenti.
“被资助”是指得到了帮助。“正见”是指阿拉汉道的正见。“心解脱果”:在果位刹那生起的心解脱是它的果,所以叫心解脱果。那个被称为心解脱的果就是它的利益,所以叫心解脱果的利益。第二句也是同样的解释方式。在这里应当知道:第四果的慧叫慧解脱,其余的法叫心解脱。在“被戒资助”等当中,“戒”指四遍清净戒。“听闻”指听闻适宜的法。“讨论”指断除业处修行中障碍的谈话。“止”指导向观的八等至。“观”指七种随观。因为,一个人圆满四遍清净戒、听闻适宜的法、断除业处修行中的障碍、在导向观的八等至上用功、修习七种随观时,阿拉汉道就会生起并给予果。巴利
Anuggahitāti laddhūpakārā. Sammādiṭṭhīti arahattamaggasammādiṭṭhi. Phalakkhaṇe nibbattā cetovimutti phalaṃ assāti cetovimuttiphalā. Tadeva cetovimuttisaṅkhātaṃ phalaṃ ānisaṃso assāti cetovimuttiphalānisaṃsā. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Ettha ca catutthaphalapaññā paññāvimutti nāma, avasesā dhammā cetovimuttīti veditabbā. Sīlānuggahitātiādīsu sīlanti catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Sutanti sappāyadhammassavanaṃ. Sākacchāti kammaṭṭhāne khalanapakkhalanacchedanakathā. Samathoti vipassanāpādikā aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Vipassanāti sattavidhā anupassanā. Catupārisuddhisīlañhi pūrentassa, sappāyadhammassavanaṃ suṇantassa, kammaṭṭhāne khalanapakkhalanaṃ chindantassa, vipassanāpādikāsu aṭṭhasamāpattīsu kammaṃ karontassa, sattavidhaṃ anupassanaṃ bhāventassa arahattamaggo uppajjitvā phalaṃ deti.
就像有人想吃甜熟的芒果,就在芒果树苗的四周筑起坚固的水池,拿水罐按时浇水;为了让水不流失,把田埂修得牢固;旁边如果有藤蔓、枯枝、蚁窝或蜘蛛网,就把它清掉;又拿锄头按时挖松根部。这个人这样不放逸地做这五件事,那棵芒果树就会长大并结果。应当知道,这个譬喻也是这样。围绕树木筑水池,应当看作戒;按时浇水,应当看作听闻正法;把田埂修得牢固,应当看作止;清掉旁边的藤蔓等,应当看作在业处上断除绊倒、失足和割裂;按时拿锄头挖根,应当看作修习七种随观。那棵得到这五件事助益的芒果树,到了能给出甜果的时候;同样,应当知道,这位比丘的正见如果得到这五种法的助益,到了能给出阿拉汉果的时候。巴利
Yathā hi madhuraṃ ambapakkaṃ paribhuñjitukāmo ambapotakassa samantā udakakoṭṭhakaṃ thiraṃ katvā bandhati. Ghaṭaṃ gahetvā kālena kālaṃ udakaṃ āsiñcati. Udakassa anikkhamanatthaṃ mariyādaṃ thiraṃ karoti. Yā hoti samīpe valli vā sukkhadaṇḍako vā kipillikapuṭo vā makkaṭakajālaṃ vā, taṃ apaneti. Khaṇittiṃ gahetvā kālena kālaṃ mūlāni parikhaṇati. Evamassa appamattassa imāni pañca kāraṇāni karoto so ambo vaḍḍhitvā phalaṃ deti. Evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Rukkhassa samantato koṭṭhakabandhanaṃ viya hi sīlaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, kālena kālaṃ udakasiñcanaṃ viya dhammassavanaṃ, mariyādāya thirabhāvakaraṇaṃ viya samatho, samīpe valliādīnaṃ haraṇaṃ viya kammaṭṭhāne khalanapakkhalanacchedanaṃ, kālena kālaṃ khaṇittiṃ gahetvā mūlakhaṇanaṃ viya sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ bhāvanā. Tehi pañcahi kāraṇehi anuggahitassa ambarukkhassa madhuraphaladānakālo viya imassa bhikkhuno imehi pañcahi dhammehi anuggahitāya sammādiṭṭhiyā arahattaphaladānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
453 贤友,有多少种“有”呢?这里问的是什么?他直接抓住了根本的连结,心想:“那些没有智慧的人,无法从哪些有中出离,我就来问那些。”其中,“欲有”是指:趋向欲有的业,以及由业所生的、已执取的诸蕴——把这两者合在一起,就叫做欲有。色有和无色有也是同样的道理。“未来”是指在未来。“后有的再生”是指后有的再次产生。在这里,他想问的是轮回流转。“于各处欢喜”是指对色的欢喜、对声的欢喜等等,就是在那些地方各自的欢喜;这里是用具格的形式来表达主格的含义。意思是:正是因为于那些地方各自欢喜,后有的再生才会发生。到这里,他展示了去、来、去来,轮回在运转,把轮回讲到了顶点。现在,为了问还灭,他说:“贤友,那么要怎样才能……”在回答中,“无明离欲”是指由于无明的灭尽与息灭。“明生起”是指由于阿拉汉道之明的生起。难道是无明先灭了、明才生起吗?这两者都不能这样说。就像点灯时黑暗便消失一样,由于明的生起,无明也就被灭了。“渴爱灭”是指由于渴爱的灭尽与息灭。“后有的再生便不发生”是指:这样一来,未来后有的再生就不会发生,去、来、去来都被切断,轮回不再运转——他把还灭也讲到了顶点。巴利
453.Katipanāvuso, bhavāti idha kiṃ pucchati? Mūlameva gato anusandhi, duppañño yehi bhavehi na uṭṭhāti, te pucchissāmīti pucchati. Tattha kāmabhavoti kāmabhavūpagaṃ kammaṃ kammābhinibbattā upādinnakkhandhāpīti ubhayamekato katvā kāmabhavoti āha. Rūpārūpabhavesupi eseva nayo. Āyatinti anāgate. Punabbhavassa abhinibbattīti punabbhavābhinibbatti. Idha vaṭṭaṃ pucchissāmīti pucchati. Tatrātatrābhinandanāti rūpābhinandanā saddābhinandanāti evaṃ tahiṃ tahiṃ abhinandanā, karaṇavacane cetaṃ paccattaṃ. Tatratatrābhinandanāya punabbhavābhinibbatti hotīti attho. Ettāvatā hi gamanaṃ hoti, āgamanaṃ hoti, gamanāgamanaṃ hoti, vaṭṭaṃ vattatīti vaṭṭaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassesi. Idāni vivaṭṭaṃ pucchanto ‘‘kathaṃ panāvuso’’tiādimāha. Tassa vissajjane avijjāvirāgāti avijjāya khayanirodhena. Vijjuppādāti arahattamaggavijjāya uppādena. Kiṃ avijjā pubbe niruddhā, atha vijjā pubbe uppannāti? Ubhayametaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Padīpujjalanena andhakāravigamo viya vijjuppādena avijjā niruddhāva hoti. Taṇhānirodhāti taṇhāya khayanirodhena. Punabbhavābhinibbatti na hotīti evaṃ āyatiṃ punabbhavassa abhinibbatti na hoti, gamanaṃ āgamanaṃ gamanāgamanaṃ upacchijjati, vaṭṭaṃ na vattatīti vivaṭṭaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassesi.
454 “贤友,那么怎样呢?”——这里问的是什么?俱分解脱的比丘会时不时进入灭尽定。他想问的是:“我要问作为他入灭尽定基础的初禅。”这里问“初禅”又是问什么?入灭尽定的比丘必须了解禅支的确定和部分的划分,也就是要知道这禅那是五支、四支、三支还是二支。他想问的就是这个禅支的确定和部分的划分。在“寻”等当中,寻以将心投向对象为特征,伺以反复审察为特征,喜以遍满为特征,乐以愉悦为特征,心一境性以不散乱为特征——这五种法在这里生起。“已离多少支”——这里又是问什么?入灭尽定的比丘必须知道哪些支有帮助、哪些支没有帮助,他想问的就是这些。至于这里的回答,其实已经很明显了。这样,前面已经取了作为灭尽定基础的初禅,接下来他要问以它为无间缘的非想非非想处等至。中间那六种等至,应当理解为:要么因为理路已经显示而省略了,要么就是搁置不说了。巴利
454.Katamaṃ panāvusoti idha kiṃ pucchati? Ubhatobhāgavimutto bhikkhu kālena kālaṃ nirodhaṃ samāpajjati. Tassa nirodhapādakaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ pucchissāmīti pucchati. Paṭhamaṃ jhānanti idha kiṃ pucchati? Nirodhaṃ samāpajjanakena bhikkhunā aṅgavavatthānaṃ koṭṭhāsaparicchedo nāma jānitabbo, idaṃ jhānaṃ pañcaṅgikaṃ caturaṅgikaṃ tivaṅgikaṃ duvaṅgikanti aṅgavavatthānaṃ koṭṭhāsaparicchedaṃ pucchissāmīti pucchati. Vitakkotiādīsu pana abhiniropanalakkhaṇo vitakko, anumajjanalakkhaṇo vicāro, pharaṇalakkhaṇā pīti, sātalakkhaṇaṃ sukhaṃ, avikkhepalakkhaṇā cittekaggatāti ime pañca dhammā vattanti. Kataṅgavippahīnanti idha pana kiṃ pucchati? Nirodhaṃ samāpajjanakena bhikkhunā upakārānupakārāni aṅgāni jānitabbāni, tāni pucchissāmīti pucchati, vissajjanaṃ panettha pākaṭameva. Iti heṭṭhā nirodhapādakaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ gahitaṃ, upari tassa anantarapaccayaṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ pucchissati. Antarā pana cha samāpattiyo saṃkhittā, nayaṃ vā dassetvā vissaṭṭhāti veditabbā.
455 现在,为了询问作为识之依处的五种净色,他问说“贤友,这五种……”等等。其中,“行境界”是指作为行处的对象。“彼此的”是指:眼不能经验耳的境界,耳也不能经验眼的境界,像这样,每一根各自的行处和对象,彼此不能互相经验。假如把青、黄等各种色所缘汇集起来,拿到耳根面前,对它说:“喂,你先把它分辨清楚、说明白,这到底是什么所缘。”其实不用开口,眼识凭自己的法性就会这样说:“喂,你这个愚痴的瞎子!就算你跑上一百年、一千年,离开我,你到哪里找得到能认识这个所缘的东西?把它拿到我眼净色这里来,我就能知道这个所缘是青是黄。因为这根本不是别的根的领域,这就是我的领域。”其他门也是同样的道理。这样,它们就是不彼此经验彼此的行处和对象。“以什么为依靠”:它们以什么为依靠?它们依靠什么?他这样问。“意是依靠”:速行意是它们的依靠。“而且意经验它们的”行处和对象:意门速行心或五门速行心,通过染着等方式经验它们的行处和对象。因为眼识只是单纯地看色而已,其中没有染着、没有厌恶、没有迷惑。然而在这扇门里,速行心会染着、会厌恶、会迷惑。耳识等等也是同样的道理。巴利
455. Idāni viññāṇanissaye pañca pasāde pucchanto pañcimāni, āvusotiādimāha. Tattha gocaravisayanti gocarabhūtaṃ visayaṃ. Aññamaññassāti cakkhu sotassa sotaṃ vā cakkhussāti evaṃ ekekassa gocaravisayaṃ na paccanubhoti. Sace hi nīlādibhedaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ samodhānetvā sotindriyassa upaneyya, ‘‘iṅgha tāva naṃ vavatthapehi vibhāvehi, kiṃ nāmetaṃ ārammaṇa’’nti. Cakkhuviññāṇañhi vināpi mukhena attano dhammatāya evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘are andhabāla , vassasatampi vassasahassampi paridhāvamāno aññatra mayā kuhiṃ etassa jānanakaṃ labhissasi, āhara naṃ cakkhupasāde upanehi, ahametaṃ ārammaṇaṃ jānissāmi, yadi vā nīlaṃ yadi vā pītakaṃ, na hi eso aññassa visayo, mayheveso visayo’’ti. Sesadvāresupi eseva nayo. Evametāni aññamaññassa gocaraṃ visayaṃ na paccanubhonti nāma. Kiṃ paṭisaraṇanti etesaṃ kiṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ, kiṃ etāni paṭisarantīti pucchati. Mano paṭisaraṇanti javanamano paṭisaraṇaṃ. Mano ca nesanti manodvārikajavanamano vā pañcadvārikajavanamano vā etesaṃ gocaravisayaṃ rajjanādivasena anubhoti. Cakkhuviññāṇañhi rūpadassanamattameva, ettha rajjanaṃ vā dussanaṃ vā muyhanaṃ vā natthi. Etasmiṃ pana dvāre javanaṃ rajjati vā dussati vā muyhati vā. Sotaviññāṇādīsupi eseva nayo.
这里有一个譬喻:据说,有五个软弱无力的食客侍奉国王,历尽艰辛,才在一个五户小村里得到一点点收入。他们在那里分到的,不过是鱼的一份、肉的一份,或者一个铜钱、半个铜钱、四分之一铜钱、八个铜钱、十六个铜钱、三十二个铜钱、六十四个铜钱,乃至罚款之类,仅此而已。而拥有百处田产、五百处田产、千处田产的丰厚税收,只有国王才拿得到。在这个譬喻里,五户小村应当看作五种净色;五个软弱无力的食客应当看作五种识;国王应当看作速行心。食客们只得到一点点收入,正如眼识等只是单纯地看色等,其中并没有染着等。而像国王获取丰厚税收那样,在这些门中,应当理解速行心的染着等。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ upamā – pañca kira dubbalabhojakā rājānaṃ sevitvā kicchena kasirena ekasmiṃ pañcakulike gāme parittakaṃ āyaṃ labhiṃsu. Tesaṃ tattha macchabhāgo maṃsabhāgo yuttikahāpaṇo vā, bandhakahāpaṇo vā, māpahārakahāpaṇo vā, aṭṭhakahāpaṇo vā, soḷasakahāpaṇo vā, bāttiṃsakahāpaṇo vā, catusaṭṭhikahāpaṇo vā, daṇḍoti ettakamattameva pāpuṇāti. Satavatthukaṃ pañcasatavatthukaṃ sahassavatthukaṃ mahābaliṃ rājāva gaṇhāti. Tattha pañcakulikagāmo viya pañca pasādā daṭṭhabbā; pañca dubbalabhojakā viya pañca viññāṇāni; rājā viya javanaṃ; dubbalabhojakānaṃ parittakaṃ āyapāpuṇanaṃ viya cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ rūpadassanādimattaṃ. Rajjanādīni pana etesu natthi. Rañño mahābaliggahaṇaṃ viya tesu dvāresu javanassa rajjanādīni veditabbāni.
456 “贤友们,这里有五种”——这里问的是什么?问的是在灭尽定当中内在的五种净色。因为在唯作心还在运作的时候,无色法对诸净色是强有力的缘。但对于已经止息了那种运作、进入灭尽定的人,我要问的是:在内在止息的状态中,这五种净色依靠什么而安住?于是他就这样问。“依靠寿”——就是依靠命根而安住。“依靠暖”——就是命根依靠业生之火而安住。但因为业生之火没有命根也不能安住,所以说“暖依靠寿而安住”。“燃烧”——就是燃着者。“依火焰”——就是依火苗。“光明显现”——就是所谓的光被觉知。“依光〔现〕焰”——就是依那光而觉知到火苗。巴利
456.Pañcimāni, āvusoti idha kiṃ pucchati? Antonirodhasmiṃ pañca pasāde. Kiriyamayapavattasmiñhi vattamāne arūpadhammā pasādānaṃ balavapaccayā honti. Yo pana taṃ pavattaṃ nirodhetvā nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpanno, tassa antonirodhe pañca pasādā kiṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhantīti idaṃ pucchissāmīti pucchati. Āyuṃ paṭiccāti jīvitindriyaṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhanti . Usmaṃ paṭiccāti jīvitindriyaṃ kammajatejaṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhati. Yasmā pana kammajatejopi jīvitindriyena vinā na tiṭṭhati, tasmā ‘‘usmā āyuṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhatī’’ti āha. Jhāyatoti jalato. Acciṃ paṭiccāti jālasikhaṃ paṭicca. Ābhā paññāyatīti āloko nāma paññāyati. Ābhaṃ paṭicca accīti taṃ ālokaṃ paṭicca jālasikhā paññāyati.
同样地,贤友,在这里“寿依暖而住”这句话中,业生之火就像火焰的顶端,命根就像光明。因为火焰顶端生起时,正是依托光明才生起的;它正是借着那由自身所生的光明,才显现出或细或粗、或长或短。在那里,就像火焰燃烧所产生的光明使那火焰燃烧本身变得明显一样,由暖所产生、由业生大种所生的命根,也在护养着暖。因为命根能护持业生之火的进行十年……乃至一百年。这样,诸大种以依止缘等方式成为诸所造色的缘,所以说寿依暖而住;命根护持大种,故应知暖依寿而住。巴利
Evameva kho, āvuso, āyu usmaṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhatīti ettha jālasikhā viya kammajatejo. Āloko viya jīvitindriyaṃ. Jālasikhā hi uppajjamānā ālokaṃ gahetvāva uppajjati. Sā tena attanā janitaālokeneva sayampi aṇu thūlā dīghā rassāti pākaṭā hoti. Tattha jālapavattiyā janitaālokena tassāyeva jālapavattiyā pākaṭabhāvo viya usmaṃ paṭicca nibbattena kammajamahābhūtasambhavena jīvitindriyena usmāya anupālanaṃ. Jīvitindriyañhi dasapi vassāni…pe… vassasatampi kammajatejapavattaṃ pāleti. Iti mahābhūtāni upādārūpānaṃ nissayapaccayādivasena paccayāni hontīti āyu usmaṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhati. Jīvitindriyaṃ mahābhūtāni pāletīti usmā āyuṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhatīti veditabbā.
457 “寿行”就是指寿命本身。“所感受的法”就是指受法本身。“出起显现”是指从等至中出起而显现。如果一位比丘对无色界的流转感到厌倦,止息了想和受,进入灭尽定,那么按照他所预定的时间,以色命根为缘,无色法就会生起。这样一来,色与无色的流转就继续运作。就像什么呢?比如有一个男子对火焰燃烧感到厌倦,用水泼浇使火不再燃烧,再用灰覆盖炭火,然后默然坐下。后来他又需要火时,就拨开灰烬,翻动炭火,添加燃料,用口吹风或用扇子扇风。于是火焰又重新燃烧起来。同样地,火焰燃烧就像无色法;男子对火焰燃烧感到厌倦,用水泼浇使火停息,用灰覆盖炭火,默然坐下,就像比丘对无色界的流转感到厌倦,止息想和受,进入灭尽定;被灰覆盖的炭火,就像色命根;男子后来需要火时拨开灰烬等动作,就像比丘度过预定的时间;火堆重新燃烧,就像无色法再次生起时,色与无色的流转随之继续运作。应当这样理解。巴利
457.Āyusaṅkhārāti āyumeva. Vedaniyā dhammāti vedanā dhammāva. Vuṭṭhānaṃ paññāyatīti samāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ paññāyati. Yo hi bhikkhu arūpapavatte ukkaṇṭhitvā saññañca vedanañca nirodhetvā nirodhaṃ samāpanno, tassa yathāparicchinnakālavasena rūpajīvitindriyapaccayā arūpadhammā uppajjanti. Evaṃ pana rūpārūpapavattaṃ pavattati. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā eko puriso jālāpavatte ukkhaṇṭhito udakena paharitvā jālaṃ appavattaṃ katvā chārikāya aṅgāre pidhāya tuṇhī nisīdati. Yadā panassa puna jālāya attho hoti, chārikaṃ apanetvā aṅgāre parivattetvā upādānaṃ datvā mukhavātaṃ vā tālavaṇṭavātaṃ vā dadāti. Atha jālāpavattaṃ puna pavattati. Evameva jālāpavattaṃ viya arūpadhammā. Purisassa jālāpavatte ukkaṇṭhitvā udakappahārena jālaṃ appavattaṃ katvā chārikāya aṅgāre pidhāya tuṇhībhūtassa nisajjā viya bhikkhuno arūpapavatte ukkaṇṭhitvā saññañca vedanañca nirodhetvā nirodhasamāpajjanaṃ. Chārikāya pihitaaṅgārā viya rūpajīvitindriyaṃ. Purisassa puna jālāya atthe sati chārikāpanayanādīni viya bhikkhuno yathāparicchinnakālāpagamanaṃ. Aggijālāya pavatti viya puna arūpadhammesu uppannesu rūpārūpapavatti veditabbā.
所谓“寿、暖与识”,就是指色命根、业所生的火界以及心。当这三种法舍弃这个色身的时候,这个身体就像没有心识的木头一样,被丢弃在地上躺着——这就是这段话的意思。而且曾经这样说过:巴利
Āyu usmā ca viññāṇanti rūpajīvitindriyaṃ, kammajatejodhātu, cittanti ime tayo dhammā yadā imaṃ rūpakāyaṃ jahanti, athāyaṃ acetanaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ viya pathaviyaṃ chaḍḍito setīti attho. Vuttañcetaṃ –
“ 寿、暖与识,当它们舍弃这个身体时;
那时它被丢弃躺着,成了别人的食物,已经没有心识。”巴利
‘‘Āyu usmā ca viññāṇaṃ, yadā kāyaṃ jahantimaṃ; Apaviddho tadā seti, parabhattaṃ acetana’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 3.95);
“身行”是指入息和出息。“语行”是指寻与伺。“心行”是指想与受。“寿”是指色命根。“已被破坏”是指被损害、已毁坏的意思。在这里,有些人说:因为经中说“入灭尽定者的诸心行已灭”,所以心并没有灭,因此他们认为这种定还是有心存在的。对这些人应当这样说:如果按“他的语行也已灭”这句话来推论,那么语就没有灭,这样一来,入灭尽定的人就应该还能说法、还能诵经。又如果按“死者、命终者的心行也已灭”这句话来推论,那么心就应该没有灭,这样一来,火化已故的父母或阿拉汉的人,不就造下了无间业吗?所以,不要执著于文字表面,应当站在诸位论师的立场上来考察其中的含义。因为义才是依止处,而不是文字。巴利
Kāyasaṅkhārāti assāsapassāsā. Vacīsaṅkhārāti vitakkavicārā. Cittasaṅkhārāti saññāvedanā. Āyūti rūpajīvitindriyaṃ. Paribhinnānīti upahatāni, vinaṭṭhānīti attho. Tattha keci ‘‘nirodhasamāpannassa cittasaṅkhārāva niruddhā’’ti vacanato cittaṃ aniruddhaṃ hoti, tasmā sacittakā ayaṃ samāpattīti vadanti. Te vattabbā – ‘‘vacīsaṅkhārāpissa niruddhā’’ti vacanato vācā aniruddhā hoti, tasmā nirodhaṃ samāpannena dhammampi kathentena sajjhāyampi karontena nisīditabbaṃ siyā. ‘‘Yo cāyaṃ mato kālaṅkato, tassāpi cittasaṅkhārā niruddhā’’ti vacanato cittaṃ aniruddhaṃ bhaveyya, tasmā kālaṅkate mātāpitaro vā arahante vā jhāpayantena anantariyakammaṃ kataṃ bhaveyya. Iti byañjane abhinivesaṃ akatvā ācariyānaṃ naye ṭhatvā attho upaparikkhitabbo. Attho hi paṭisaraṇaṃ, na byañjanaṃ.
诸根清净:当唯作心运作现前时,如果外在的所缘触碰诸根,诸根就会疲惫、受损,像被污染了一样,就像放在十字路口的镜子被风等扬起的尘土弄脏。可是,如果把镜子装进袋子,再放进箱子等里面,镜子在里面依然明亮;同样,入灭尽定的比丘,在内在的灭尽中,五种净色极其明净。因此说诸根清净。巴利
Indriyāni vippasannānīti kiriyamayapavattasmiñhi vattamāne bahiddhā ārammaṇesu pasāde ghaṭṭentesu indriyāni kilamantāni upahatāni makkhitāni viya honti, vātādīhi uṭṭhitena rajena catumahāpathe ṭhapitaādāso viya. Yathā pana thavikāyaṃ pakkhipitvā mañjūsādīsu ṭhapito ādāso antoyeva virocati, evaṃ nirodhaṃ samāpannassa bhikkhuno antonirodhe pañca pasādā ativirocanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘indriyāni vippasannānī’’ti.
458 “贤友,有多少缘?”这里问的是什么?这是在问灭尽定的无间缘,也就是非想非非想处。在回答中,通过“乐的舍断”等,说明了四种远离的缘。“无相”这里问的是什么?这是在问从灭尽定出定后的果定。因为从其他定出定,是由有分心发生的;而从灭尽定出定,则是通过观智的等流而进入的果定,所以他问的就是这个。“一切相”指色等一切所缘。“对无相界作意”指对远离一切相的涅槃界的作意——说的是与果定同时生起的作意。这样,前面已经说了作为灭尽定基础的第一禅,接着说了灭尽定的无间缘——非想非非想处,现在则说了从灭尽定出定的果定。巴利
458.Katipanāvuso, paccayāti idha kiṃ pucchati? Nirodhassa anantarapaccayaṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ pucchissāmīti pucchati. Vissajjane panassa sukhassa ca pahānāti cattāro apagamanapaccayā kathitā. Animittāyāti idha kiṃ pucchati? Nirodhato vuṭṭhānakaphalasamāpattiṃ pucchissāmīti pucchati. Avasesasamāpattivuṭṭhānañhi bhavaṅgena hoti, nirodhā vuṭṭhānaṃ pana vipassanānissandāya phalasamāpattiyāti tameva pucchati. Sabbanimittānanti rūpādīnaṃ sabbārammaṇānaṃ. Animittāya ca dhātuyā manasikāroti sabbanimittāpagatāya nibbānadhātuyā manasikāro. Phalasamāpattisahajātaṃ manasikāraṃ sandhāyāha. Iti heṭṭhā nirodhapādakaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ gahitaṃ, nirodhassa anantarapaccayaṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ gahitaṃ, idha nirodhato vuṭṭhānakaphalasamāpatti gahitāti.
在这里,应当讲一讲灭尽定的相关论述。这个论述在《无碍解道》(1.83)里是这样说的:“因为具足两种力,又因为三种行的止息,以十六种智行、九种定行而有的自在通达慧,即是灭尽定的智。”而在《清净道论》里,则对这个问题作了全面详细的辨析。巴利
Imasmiṃ ṭhāne nirodhakathā kathetabbā hoti. Sā, ‘‘dvīhi balehi samannāgatattā tayo ca saṅkhārānaṃ paṭippassaddhiyā soḷasahi ñāṇacariyāhi navahi samādhicariyāhi vasībhāvatāpaññā nirodhasamāpattiyā ñāṇa’’nti evaṃ paṭisambhidāmagge (paṭi. ma. 1.83) āgatā. Visuddhimagge panassā sabbākārena vinicchayakathā kathitā.
现在为了问作用等至,他说了“贤友,有多少缘”等话。因为从灭尽定出起后的果等至并没有所谓的住立,只转起一两个心刹那,就沉入有分。这位比丘止息了七天的无色流转之后坐着,在灭尽定出起的果等至中不会停留很久。但在作用等至中,时间的长短才是衡量标准,所以它才叫住立。因此他说“无相心解脱的住立”,意思是:为了让它长久住立,有多少缘?在回答中,对于它,说了“先前之行”,指的就是时间的长短。关于“出起”,这里问的是有分的出起。在回答中,对于它,说了“对一切相的不作意”,指的是以色等相为所缘、与有分俱生的作意。巴利
Idāni valañjanasamāpattiṃ pucchanto kati panāvuso, paccayātiādimāha. Nirodhato hi vuṭṭhānakaphalasamāpattiyā ṭhiti nāma na hoti, ekaṃ dve cittavārameva pavattitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otarati. Ayañhi bhikkhu satta divase arūpapavattaṃ nirodhetvā nisinno nirodhavuṭṭhānakaphalasamāpattiyaṃ na ciraṃ tiṭṭhati. Valañjanasamāpattiyaṃ pana addhānaparicchedova pamāṇaṃ. Tasmā sā ṭhiti nāma hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘animittāya cetovimuttiyā ṭhitiyā’’ti. Tassā ciraṭṭhitatthaṃ kati paccayāti attho. Vissajjane panassā pubbe ca abhisaṅkhāroti addhānaparicchedo vutto. Vuṭṭhānāyāti idha bhavaṅgavuṭṭhānaṃ pucchati. Vissajjanepissā sabbanimittānañcamanasikāroti rūpādinimittavasena bhavaṅgasahajātamanasikāro vutto.
459 贤友,这里问的是什么呢?这里其实并没有提出什么新的东西。他只是把下面已经讲过的法归到一起,然后发问。那么,那些法是在哪里讲过的呢?在“他认知青的,也认知黄的、红的、白的”这一处,讲的是无量心解脱。在“无所有处,应当理解为‘什么都没有’”这一处,讲的是无所有。在“以慧眼彻见”这一处,讲的是空。在“贤友,有多少缘令无相心解脱住立和出起?”这一处,讲的是无相。就这样,他把下面已经讲过的法归到一起,在这里发问。不过,注书在否定那些说法之后,指出这些法在各自的处所已经分别解说过,接着又说:另外还有四个同名的法,还有一个法有四个名称。为了把这件事讲明白,他才在这里发问——这是注书作出的判定。在回答中,“贤友,这被称为无量心解脱”:这是因为它以遍满为无量,所以叫无量。因为它要么遍满无量的有情,要么即使对一个有情也毫无遗漏地遍满。巴利
459.Yā cāyaṃ, āvusoti idha kiṃ pucchati? Idha aññaṃ abhinavaṃ nāma natthi. Heṭṭhā kathitadhammeyeva ekato samodhānetvā pucchāmīti pucchati. Kattha pana te kathitā? ‘‘Nīlampi sañjānāti pītakampi, lohitakampi, odātakampi sañjānātī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.450) etasmiñhi ṭhāne appamāṇā cetovimutti kathitā. ‘‘Natthi kiñcīti ākiñcaññāyatananti neyya’’nti (ma. ni. 1.451) ettha ākiñcaññaṃ. ‘‘Paññācakkhunā pajānātī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.451) ettha suññatā. ‘‘Kati panāvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā ṭhitiyā vuṭṭhānāyā’’ti ettha animittā. Evaṃ heṭṭhā kathitāva imasmiṃ ṭhāne ekato samodhānetvā pucchati. Taṃ pana paṭikkhipitvā etā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne niddiṭṭhāvāti vatvā aññe cattāro dhammā ekanāmakā atthi. Eko dhammo catunāmako atthi, etaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā kathāpetuṃ idha pucchatīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ sanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ. Tassā vissajjane ayaṃ vuccatāvuso, appamāṇā cetovimuttīti ayaṃ pharaṇaappamāṇatāya appamāṇā nāma. Ayañhi appamāṇe vā satte pharati, ekasmimpi vā satte asesetvā pharati.
朋友,这就叫作无所有,因为没有任何所缘的累赘,所以是无所有。或者说,以“我”来说它是空的,这里说的“我”是指由自我体、养育者、补特伽罗等概念所施设的那个我。或者说,以“我所”来说它是空的,这里说的“我所”是指由衣钵等资具所施设的那个我所。无相,是因为贪等相状完全不存在,所以是无相,这是针对阿拉汉果等至而说的。它们意义不同,言辞也不同,是说这些法的言辞不同,意义也不同。其中,言辞上的不同很明显。而意义上的差别则是:无量心解脱在界地方面属于广大,是色界的;在所缘方面,它以有情的施设为所缘。无所有心解脱在界地方面属于广大,是无色界的;在所缘方面,则不可言说。空心解脱在界地方面属于欲界;在所缘方面,它以行法为所缘,因为这里的空,指的就是观。无相心解脱在界地方面是出世间的;在所缘方面,它以涅槃为所缘。巴利
Ayaṃ vuccatāvuso, ākiñcaññāti ārammaṇakiñcanassa abhāvato ākiñcaññā. Attena vāti atta bhāvaposapuggalādisaṅkhātena attena suññaṃ. Attaniyena vāti cīvarādiparikkhārasaṅkhātena attaniyena suññaṃ. Animittāti rāganimittādīnaṃ abhāveneva animittā, arahattaphalasamāpattiṃ sandhāyāha. Nānatthā ceva nānābyañjanā cāti byañjanampi nesaṃ nānā atthopi. Tattha byañjanassa nānatā pākaṭāva. Attho pana, appamāṇā cetovimutti bhūmantarato mahaggatā eva hoti rūpāvacarā; ārammaṇato satta paññattiārammaṇā. Ākiñcaññā bhummantarato mahaggatā arūpāvacarā; ārammaṇato na vattabbārammaṇā. Suññatā bhummantarato kāmāvacarā; ārammaṇato saṅkhārārammaṇā. Vipassanā hi ettha suññatāti adhippetā. Animittā bhummantarato lokuttarā; ārammaṇato nibbanārammaṇā.
贤友,在“贪是量的制造者”等说法中:譬如在山脚下有一种腐叶积水,颜色乌黑;看过去时,让人觉得好像有百寻那么深。可是拿棍子或绳子去量,却连盖住脚背的深度都没有。同样地,只要贪等烦恼还没有生起,就无法认清一个人,他看起来就像入流者、一来者、不来者一样。然而,一旦他心中的贪等生起,那时就会被认出是贪染的、嗔怒的、愚痴的。因此,这些烦恼生起时,就像在显示“这个人有这么大分量”一样,所以称为“量的制造者”。
“贤友,有多少种无量心解脱?”——这是问有多少种无量心解脱。那么有多少种呢?四梵住、四道、四果,共十二种。其中,梵住因为遍满而无量;其余的道与果,则因为那些作为量之制造者的烦恼不存在而无量。涅槃也是无量的,但它不是心解脱,所以没有算在里面。“不动摇的”:这是指阿拉汉果的心解脱;因为它在这一切心解脱中最上、最高,因此被称为最高。
“贤友,贪是累赘”:贪生起后,会压迫、碾磨、束缚这个人,所以称为“累赘”。据说,人们用牛碾打谷场时,会对一些牛喊“卡比拉”,对一些牛喊“卡勒卡”。应当这样理解:碾磨之义就是累赘之义。嗔与痴也是如此。
“无所有心解脱”,是指九种法:无所有处,以及道与果。其中,无所有处因为没有所缘的累赘,所以是无所有;道与果则因为那些碾磨、束缚人的烦恼不存在,所以是无所有。涅槃也是无所有,但它不是心解脱,所以没有算在里面。巴利
Rāgokho, āvuso, pamāṇakaraṇotiādīsu yathā pabbatapāde pūtipaṇṇarasaudakaṃ nāma hoti kāḷavaṇṇaṃ; olokentānaṃ byāmasatagambhīraṃ viya khāyati. Yaṭṭhiṃ vā rajjuṃ vā gahetvā minantassa piṭṭhipādottharaṇamattampi na hoti. Evamevaṃ yāva rāgādayo nuppajjanti, tāva puggalaṃ sañjānituṃ na sakkā honti, sotāpanno viya, sakadāgāmī viya, anāgāmī viya ca khāyati. Yadā panassa rāgādayo uppajjanti, tadā ratto duṭṭho mūḷhoti paññāyati. Iti ete ‘‘ettako aya’’nti puggalassa pamāṇaṃ dassento viya uppajjantīti pamāṇakaraṇā nāma vuttā. Yāvatā kho, āvuso, appamāṇā cetovimuttiyoti yattakā appamāṇā cetovimuttiyo. Kittakā pana tā? Cattāro brahmavihārā, cattāro maggā, cattāri ca phalānīti dvādasa. Tattha brahmavihārā pharaṇaappamāṇatāya appamāṇā. Sesā pamāṇakaraṇānaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena appamāṇā. Nibbānampi appamāṇameva, cetovimutti pana na hoti, tasmā na gahitaṃ. Akuppāti arahattaphalacetovimutti; sā hi tāsaṃ sabbajeṭṭhikā, tasmā aggamakkhāyatīti vuttā. Rāgo kho, āvuso, kiñcanoti rāgo uppajjitvā puggalaṃ kiñcati maddati palibundhati. Tasmā kiñcanoti vutto. Manussā kira goṇehi khalaṃ maddāpento kiñcehi kapila, kiñcehi kāḷakāti vadanti. Evaṃ maddanattho kiñcanatthoti veditabbo. Dosamohesupi eseva nayo. Ākiñcaññā cetovimuttiyo nāma nava dhammā ākiñcaññāyatanañca maggaphalāni ca. Tattha ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ kiñcanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ assa natthīti ākiñcaññaṃ. Maggaphalāni kiñcanānaṃ maddanānaṃ palibundhanakilesānaṃ natthitāya ākiñcaññāni. Nibbānampi ākiñcaññaṃ, cetovimutti pana na hoti, tasmā na gahitaṃ.
贤友,在“贪是相的制造者”等说法里,就好比两户人家各有一头长得差不多的小牛。只要还没给它们做上记号,就没法认出“这头是那家的小牛,那头是另一家的”。可一旦用矛尖之类的东西给它们做了记号,那时就能认出来了。同样地,只要一个人的贪还没有生起,就没法判断他是圣者还是凡夫。可是,贪一旦在他心里生起,就会像制造出一个能让人认出来的标记一样,让人认出“这个人是贪心的人”,所以贪被称为“相的制造者”。嗔和痴也是同样的道理。巴利
Rāgo kho, āvuso, nimittakaraṇotiādīsu yathā nāma dvinnaṃ kulānaṃ sadisā dve vacchakā honti. Yāva tesaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ na kataṃ hoti, tāva ‘‘ayaṃ asukakulassa vacchako, ayaṃ asukakulassā’’ti na sakkā honti jānituṃ. Yadā pana tesaṃ sattisūlādīsu aññataraṃ lakkhaṇaṃ kataṃ hoti, tadā sakkā honti jānituṃ. Evameva yāva puggalassa rāgo nuppajjati, tāva na sakkā hoti jānituṃ ariyo vā puthujjano vāti. Rāgo panassa uppajjamānova sarāgo nāma ayaṃ puggaloti sañjānananimittaṃ karonto viya uppajjati, tasmā ‘‘nimittakaraṇo’’ti vutto. Dosamohesupi eseva nayo.
被称为“无相心解脱”的法有十三种:观、四种无色定、四种道和四种果。其中,观能去除常相、乐相、我相,所以叫“无相”。四种无色定因为没有色相,所以叫“无相”。道和果因为没有了那些制造相的烦恼,所以是无相的。涅槃也是无相的,但它不是心解脱,所以没有算在里面。那么,为什么“空心解脱”没有被单独列出来呢?因为从“于贪而空”等说法来看,它已经遍及一切处,所以不另外单列。所谓“同一意义”,是就所缘来说的,它们是同一意义。因为无量、无所有、空、无相,这一切都是涅槃的名称。从这个角度说,它们是同义的。但在另外的情况下,有的叫无量,有的叫无所有,有的叫空,有的叫无相——从这个角度说,就是“言辞有别”。长老就是这样顺着说法的脉络,结束了这段开示。巴利
Animittā cetovimutti nāma terasa dhammā – vipassanā, cattāro āruppā, cattāro maggā, cattāri ca phalānīti. Tattha vipassanā niccanimittaṃ sukhanimittaṃ attanimittaṃ ugghāṭetīti animittā nāma. Cattāro āruppā rūpanimittassa abhāvena animittā nāma. Maggaphalāni nimittakaraṇānaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena animittāni. Nibbānampi animittameva, taṃ pana cetovimutti na hoti, tasmā na gahitaṃ. Atha kasmā suññatā cetovimutti na gahitāti? Sā, ‘‘suññā rāgenā’’tiādivacanato sabbattha anupaviṭṭhāva, tasmā visuṃ na gahitā . Ekatthāti ārammaṇavasena ekatthā. Appamāṇaṃ ākiñcaññaṃ suññataṃ animittanti hi sabbānetāni nibbānasseva nāmāni. Iti iminā pariyāyena ekatthā. Aññasmiṃ pana ṭhāne appamāṇā honti, aññasmiṃ ākiñcaññā aññasmiṃ suññatā aññasmiṃ animittāti iminā pariyāyena nānābyañjanā. Iti thero yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
4. 《小方广经》的注释。巴利
4. Cūḷavedallasuttavaṇṇanā
460 “如是我闻”这句,说的就是《小方广经》。其中,“毗舍佉近事男”是指一位名叫毗舍佉的近事男。“往诣法乐”是说,他前往一位名叫法乐的比丘尼那里。那么,这位毗舍佉是谁?法乐又是谁?他为什么去见她?毗舍佉是法乐出家前在家人时的丈夫。当年世尊证得正等正觉,转动殊胜的法轮,调伏了耶舍等善男子之后,来到优楼频螺,在那里度化了一千名结发苦行者。随后,世尊与这些原本是结发苦行者、已断尽烦恼的比丘们一起前往王舍城。频婆娑罗大王为了见世尊,带着十二万眷属前来。世尊为他说法。当时,随国王一同前来的十二万人中,有一万人证得了近事男的身份,其余十一万人连同频婆娑罗王一起,安立在入流果上。这位近事男就是他们当中的一位,他在第一次见佛时就和众人一起安立在入流果上。后来有一天,他听了法,证得一来果;再往后又有一天听了法,安立在不来果上。他证得不来果之后回到家中,不再像往日那样东张西望、面带笑容地走回来,而是诸根寂静、内心安宁地归来。巴利
460.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷavedallasuttaṃ. Tattha visākho upāsakoti visākhoti evaṃnāmako upāsako. Yena dhammadinnāti yena dhammadinnā nāma bhikkhunī tenupasaṅkami. Ko panāyaṃ visākho? Kā dhammadinnā? Kasmā upasaṅkamīti? Visākho nāma dhammadinnāya gihikāle gharasāmiko. So yadā bhagavā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhitvā pavattavaradhammacakko yasādayo kulaputte vinetvā uruvelaṃ patvā tattha jaṭilasahassaṃ vinetvā purāṇajaṭilehi khīṇāsavabhikkhūhi saddhiṃ rājagahaṃ gantvā buddhadassanatthaṃ dvādasanahutāya parisāya saddhiṃ āgatassa bimbisāramahārājassa dhammaṃ desesi. Tadā raññā saddhiṃ āgatesu dvādasanahutesu ekaṃ nahutaṃ upāsakattaṃ paṭivedesi, ekādasa nahutāni sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahiṃsu saddhiṃ raññā bimbisārena. Ayaṃ upāsako tesaṃ aññataro, tehi saddhiṃ paṭhamadassaneva sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya, puna ekadivasaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā sakadāgāmiphalaṃ patvā, tato aparabhāgepi ekadivasaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhito. So anāgāmī hutvā gehaṃ āgacchanto yathā aññesu divasesu ito cito ca olokento sitaṃ kurumāno āgacchati, evaṃ anāgantvā santindriyo santamānaso hutvā agamāsi.
法乐推开狮子窗,朝街上望去,看见了他回来的样子,心想:“这是怎么回事?”于是迎上前去,站在台阶顶端,伸出手想扶他。居士却把手缩了回去。她想:“到吃早饭的时候就会知道了。”以前居士总是和她一起吃饭,可那天他没跟她打招呼,就像一位修行的比丘那样独自吃了。她又想:“到傍晚就会知道了。”那天居士没有进华丽的寝室,而是让人收拾了另一间房,铺好如法的床铺躺下。法乐心想:“难道他在外面有了别的心愿?还是被什么人挑拨离间了?还是我自己哪里做错了?”她心里非常难过,又想:“再住一两天就能弄清楚了。”于是她前去侍候他,顶礼之后站在一旁。巴利
Dhammadinnā sīhapañjaraṃ ugghāṭetvā vīthiṃ olokayamānā tassa āgamanākāraṃ disvā, ‘‘kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti cintetvā tassa paccuggamanaṃ kurumānā sopānasīse ṭhatvā olambanatthaṃ hatthaṃ pasāresi. Upāsako attano hatthaṃ samiñjesi. Sā ‘‘pātarāsabhojanakāle jānissāmī’’ti cintesi. Upāsako pubbe tāya saddhiṃ ekato bhuñjati. Taṃ divasaṃ pana taṃ anapaloketvā yogāvacarabhikkhu viya ekakova bhuñji. Sā, ‘‘sāyanhakāle jānissāmī’’ti cintesi. Upāsako taṃdivasaṃ sirigabbhaṃ na pāvisi, aññaṃ gabbhaṃ paṭijaggāpetvā kappiyamañcakaṃ paññapāpetvā nipajji. Upāsikā, ‘‘kiṃ nu khvassa bahiddhā patthanā atthi, udāhu kenacideva paribhedakena bhinno, udāhu mayheva koci doso atthī’’ti balavadomanassā hutvā, ‘‘ekaṃ dve divase vasitakāle sakkā ñātu’’nti tassa upaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā vanditvā aṭṭhāsi.
居士问:“法乐,你为什么在不合适的时候来了?”她说:“是的,夫君,我来了。你已经不像从前那样了。你是不是在外面有了别的心愿?”居士说:“法乐,没有。”她又问:“有别人在中间挑拨吗?”居士说:“也没有。”她说:“既然这样,那一定是我哪里做错了。”居士说:“你也没有错。”她说:“那你为什么连像平常那样跟我打个招呼、说几句话都不肯呢?”居士心想:“这出世间法既尊贵又深重,不该随便宣说。可我要是再不开口,她一定会心碎,当场死在这里。”为了安慰她,他就说:“法乐,我听了世尊说法之后,证得了出世间法。证得这个法的人,不适合再过以前那种世俗生活了。如果你愿意,你有四亿财产,我也有四亿,加起来一共八亿财富。你可以做主,把我当成母亲或姐妹一样,留下来一起住。我就靠你布施的一点饭食维持生活。你要是不愿意这样做,就带着这些财物回娘家去。再不然,如果你在外面并没有别的心愿,我就把你当作姐妹或女儿一样来照顾。”巴利
Upāsako, ‘‘kiṃ dhammadinne akāle āgatāsī’’ti pucchi. Āma ayyaputta, āgatāmhi, na tvaṃ yathā purāṇo, kiṃ nu te bahiddhā patthanā atthīti? Natthi dhammadinneti. Añño koci paribhedako atthīti? Ayampi natthīti. Evaṃ sante mayheva koci doso bhavissatīti. Tuyhampi doso natthīti. Atha kasmā mayā saddhiṃ yathā pakatiyā ālāpasallāpamattampi na karothāti? So cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ lokuttaradhammo nāma garu bhāriyo na pakāsetatabbo, sace kho panāhaṃ na kathessāmi, ayaṃ hadayaṃ phāletvā ettheva kālaṃ kareyyā’’ti tassānuggahatthāya kathesi – ‘‘dhammadinne ahaṃ satthu dhammadesanaṃ sutvā lokuttaradhammaṃ nāma adhigato, taṃ adhigatassa evarūpā lokiyakiriyā na vaṭṭati. Yadi tvaṃ icchasi, tava cattālīsa koṭiyo mama cattālīsa koṭiyoti asītikoṭidhanaṃ atthi, ettha issarā hutvā mama mātiṭṭhāne vā bhaginiṭṭhāne vā ṭhatvā vasa. Tayā dinnena bhattapiṇḍamattakena ahaṃ yāpessāmi. Athevaṃ na karosi, ime bhoge gahetvā kulagehaṃ gaccha, athāpi te bahiddhā patthanā natthi, ahaṃ taṃ bhaginiṭṭhāne vā dhituṭṭhāne vā ṭhapetvā posessāmī’’ti.
她心里想:“一个普通男人根本不会说出这样的话。他一定是已经证悟了出世间最殊胜的法。可是,这个法只有男人才能证悟,还是女人也能证悟呢?”于是她对毗舍佉说:“这个法只有男人才能得到吗?女人也能得到吗?”毗舍佉说:“法乐,你在说什么呢?凡是走上修行之道的人,都是这个法的继承者。谁有相应的亲依止缘,谁就能证得这个法。”她说:“既然这样,那就请你允许我出家吧。”居士说:“好,贤妻,我本来就想引导你也走上这条道路,只是因为不知道你的心意,才没有对你说。”说完,他立刻前往频婆娑罗王那里,顶礼之后站在一旁。巴利
Sā cintesi – ‘‘pakatipuriso evaṃ vattā nāma natthi. Addhā etena lokuttaravaradhammo paṭividdho. So pana dhammo kiṃ puriseheva paṭibujjhitabbo, udāhu mātugāmopi paṭivijjhituṃ sakkotī’’ti visākhaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘kiṃ nu kho eso dhammo puriseheva labhitabbo, mātugāmenapi sakkā laddhu’’nti? Kiṃ vadesi dhammadinne, ye paṭipannakā, te etassa dāyādā, yassa yassa upanissayo atthi, so so etaṃ paṭilabhatīti. Evaṃ sante mayhaṃ pabbajjaṃ anujānāthāti. Sādhu bhadde, ahampi taṃ etasmiṃyeva magge yojetukāmo, manaṃ pana te ajānamāno na kathemīti tāvadeva bimbisārassa rañño santikaṃ gantvā vanditvā aṭṭhāsi.
国王问:“居士,你为什么不在合适的时候来?”他回答说:“大王,法乐要出家。”那她需要得到什么呢?别的什么都不需要,大王,只需要得到一顶金轿,再让人把城市准备一下。国王给了金轿,并让人准备了城市。毗舍佉让人用香水给法乐沐浴,给她戴上所有饰品,让她坐上金轿,让亲友们围绕着她,用香花等供养着,就像在办城市庆典一样,来到比丘尼寺院,说道:“各位大姊,请让法乐出家吧。”比丘尼们说:“居士,得能忍受一两个过失才行。”他说:“大姊们,她没有任何过失,是凭信心出家的。”这时一位聪慧的长老尼为她讲解了头发、体毛、指甲、牙齿、皮肤五种业处,剃掉头发,让她出家了。毗舍佉说:“大姊,愿你安住,这法是善说的。”顶礼后便离开了。巴利
Rājā , ‘‘kiṃ, gahapati, akāle āgatosī’’ti pucchi. Dhammadinnā, ‘‘mahārāja, pabbajissāmī’’ti vadatīti. Kiṃ panassa laddhuṃ vaṭṭatīti? Aññaṃ kiñci natthi, sovaṇṇasivikaṃ deva, laddhuṃ vaṭṭati nagarañca paṭijaggāpetunti. Rājā sovaṇṇasivikaṃ datvā nagaraṃ paṭijaggāpesi. Visākho dhammadinnaṃ gandhodakena nahāpetvā sabbālaṅkārehi alaṅkārāpetvā sovaṇṇasivikāya nisīdāpetvā ñātigaṇena parivārāpetvā gandhapupphādīhi pūjayamāno nagaravāsanaṃ karonto viya bhikkhuniupassayaṃ gantvā, ‘‘dhammadinnaṃ pabbājethāyye’’ti āha. Bhikkhuniyo ‘‘ekaṃ vā dve vā dose sahituṃ vaṭṭati gahapatī’’ti āhaṃsu. Natthayye koci doso, saddhāya pabbajatīti. Athekā byattā therī tacapañcakakammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhitvā kese ohāretvā pabbājesi. Visākho, ‘‘abhiramayye, svākkhāto dhammo’’ti vanditvā pakkāmi.
从她出家那天开始,利养和恭敬就不断出现。她正是被这些缠住,才找不到机会修习沙门法。于是她带上亲教师和教授师两位长老尼,去了外地,请她们在三十八种所缘里,讲一个她心里喜欢的业处,然后就开始修习沙门法。因为她宿世所发的愿已经圆满成就,所以并没有辛苦太久。巴利
Tassā pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya lābhasakkāro uppajji. Teneva palibuddhā samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ okāsaṃ na labhati. Athācariya-upajjhāyatheriyo gahetvā janapadaṃ gantvā aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu cittarucitaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathāpetvā samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ āraddhā, abhinīhārasampannattā pana nāticiraṃ kilamittha.
从这时起,在十万劫之前,有一位名叫莲华上的导师出现在世间。那时,她出生在一户人家做女奴,卖掉自己的头发,把所得供养给那位导师的上首弟子善生长老,然后发了愿。由于那个愿和胜愿的成就,她没辛苦太久,仅仅几天就证得了阿拉汉果。她想:“我出家是为了在教法中达成目标,如今已经达成。我住在乡下有什么用呢?我的亲属们也能修福,比丘尼僧团也不会缺资具。我要去王舍城。”于是她带着比丘尼僧团,直接去了王舍城。毗舍佉听说“法乐回来了”,心想:“她出家不久就去了外地,去了没多久又回来了,到底怎么回事?我去看看就知道了。”于是第二次前往比丘尼寺。因此经中说:“那时,毗舍佉居士前往法乐比丘尼那里。”巴利
Ito paṭṭhāya hi satasahassakappamatthake padumuttaro nāma satthā loke udapādi. Tadā esā ekasmiṃ kule dāsī hutvā attano kese vikkiṇitvā sujātattherassa nāma aggasāvakassa dānaṃ datvā patthanamakāsi. Sā tāya patthanābhinīhārasampattiyā nāticiraṃ kilamittha, katipāheneva arahattaṃ patvā cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ yenatthena sāsane pabbajitā, so matthakaṃ patto, kiṃ me janapadavāsena, mayhaṃ ñātakāpi puññāni karissanti, bhikkhunisaṅghopi paccayehi na kilamissati, rājagahaṃ gacchāmī’’ti bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ gahetvā rājagahameva agamāsi. Visākho, ‘‘dhammadinnā kira āgatā’’ti sutvā, ‘‘pabbajitvā nacirasseva janapadaṃ gatā, gantvāpi nacirasseva paccāgatā, kiṃ nu kho bhavissati, gantvā jānissāmī’’ti dutiyagamanena bhikkhuniupassayaṃ agamāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho visākho upāsako yena dhammadinnā bhikkhunī tenupasaṅkamī’’ti.
“如此说”是指他说了“此有身”等这番话。他为什么这样说呢?据说他心里这样想:“直接问‘尊姐,您欢喜还是不欢喜?’,这可不是智者该做的事。我应当以五取蕴为切入点来提问,通过她的回答,就能知道她是欢喜还是不欢喜。”所以他这样说了。法乐一听,并没有说“贤友毗舍佉,我刚出家不久,哪里知道自身或他身?”也没有说“你去问别的长老尼吧”,而是像接住抛来的东西、解开单边绳结、在密林中辨出象道、用剑锋打开宝匣一样,站在无碍解的境界中回答问题,开口说:“贤友毗舍佉,有这五取蕴……”等等。其中,“五”是数量的限定。“取蕴”指作为取之缘的蕴,应当依照这些方法在这里详细解说取蕴的含义。不过这些内容在《清净道论》中已经详细解说了,所以按那里详细解说的方式来理解即可。至于有身之集等应当说的内容,在前面各处也已经讲过了。巴利
Etadavocāti etaṃ sakkāyotiādivacanaṃ avoca. Kasmā avocāti? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘abhiramasi nābhiramasi, ayye’’ti evaṃ pucchanaṃ nāma na paṇḍitakiccaṃ, pañcupādānakkhandhe upanetvā pañhaṃ pucchissāmi, pañhabyākaraṇena tassā abhiratiṃ vā anabhiratiṃ vā jānissāmīti, tasmā avoca. Taṃ sutvāva dhammadinnā ahaṃ, āvuso visākha, acirapabbajitā sakāyaṃ vā parakāyaṃ vā kuto jānissāmīti vā, aññattheriyo upasaṅkamitvā pucchāti vā avatvā upanikkhittaṃ sampaṭicchamānā viya, ekapāsakagaṇṭhiṃ mocentī viya gahanaṭṭhāne hatthimaggaṃ nīharamānā viya khaggamukhena samuggaṃ vivaramānā viya ca paṭisambhidāvisaye ṭhatvā pañhaṃ vissajjamānā, pañca kho ime, āvuso visākha, upādānakkhandhātiādimāha. Tattha pañcāti gaṇanaparicchedo. Upādānakkhandhāti upādānānaṃ paccayabhūtā khandhāti evamādinā nayenettha upādānakkhandhakathā vitthāretvā kathetabbā. Sā panesā visuddhimagge vitthāritā evāti tattha vittāritanayeneva veditabbā. Sakkāyasamudayādīsupi yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā tattha tattha vuttameva.
毗舍佉听完这番对四谛的解说,便知道这位长老尼是安住于教法、心生欢喜的人。因为,若有人在佛陀的教法里感到厌倦、不欢喜,那么面对这样被反复追问的问题,他根本答不上来,就像用镊子一根一根拔白发,又像从须弥山脚下把沙子挖出来一样。然而这四谛在世间就像日月一样,在佛陀的教法里也是明明白白的。无论是世尊还是大长老们,到了大众当中,开示的都是圣谛;比丘僧团也从善男子出家那天起,就教他这个问题:“四者是什么?就是四圣谛。”而这位法乐,安住在善巧方便中,有智慧、有辩才,能把握要领,凭所听闻的也能说法。所以毗舍佉心想:“光凭刚才这些问答,还不能断定她是否已经通达圣谛;要通过分别圣谛的问答,才能知道。”于是他把前面已经问过的两个谛搁到一边,藏起来,打算提出一个纽结般的难题,便问道:“尊姐,正是那个……”等等。巴利
Idaṃ pana catusaccabyākaraṇaṃ sutvā visākho theriyā abhiratabhāvaṃ aññāsi. Yo hi buddhasāsane ukkaṇṭhito hoti anabhirato, so evaṃ pucchitapucchitapañhaṃ saṇḍāsena ekekaṃ palitaṃ gaṇhanto viya, sinerupādato vālukaṃ uddharanto viya vissajjetuṃ na sakkoti. Yasmā pana imāni cattāri saccāni loke candimasūriyā viya buddhasāsane pākaṭāni, parisamajjhe gato hi bhagavāpi mahātherāpi saccāneva pakāsenti; bhikkhusaṅghopi pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya kulaputte cattāri nāma kiṃ, cattāri ariyasaccānīti pañhaṃ uggaṇhāpeti. Ayañca dhammadinnā upāyakosalle ṭhitā paṇḍitā byattā nayaṃ gahetvā sutenapi kathetuṃ samatthā, tasmā ‘‘na sakkā etissā ettāvatā saccānaṃ paṭividdhabhāvo ñātuṃ, saccavinibbhogapañhabyākaraṇena sakkā ñātu’’nti cintetvā heṭṭhā kathitāni dve saccāni paṭinivattetvā guḷhaṃ katvā gaṇṭhipañhaṃ pucchissāmīti pucchanto taññeva nu kho, ayyetiādimāha.
毗舍佉听了她的回答后,便确信“她已经证得安立”。〔疏家解释说:〕在回答中,“那个并不就是取”,是因为取只是行蕴的一部分,所以那五取蕴并不就是取,但取也不能离开五取蕴而单独存在。如果那五取蕴就是取,那么色等自身的体性也应该变成取;如果取在五取蕴之外,那它就会像其他宗派所说的与心不相应的随眠,或者像施设,或者像涅槃那样,成为脱离蕴的存在,甚至需要施设一个第六蕴。所以她才会这样回答。毗舍佉听完她的解答,便确信“她已经证得安立”。因为,若不是漏尽者,不具备那种无滞无碍、犹如点亮千盏灯一般的智慧,绝不可能解答这样隐密深藏、贯穿三相、甚深难解的难题。他确信之后,心想:“这位法乐,在教法中已得安立,证得无碍解,得无所畏,安住于有顶,是大漏尽者。她有能力回答我的问题。现在我要问她一个犹如竹心般的关键问题。”这样想着,他便问道:“那么,尊姐,如何……”等等。巴利
Tassa vissajjane na kho, āvuso visākha, taññeva upādānanti upādānassa saṅkhārakkhandhekadesabhāvato na taṃyeva upādānaṃ te pañcupādānakkhandhā, nāpi aññatra pañcahi upādānakkhandhehi upādānaṃ. Yadi hi taññeva siyā, rūpādisabhāvampi upādānaṃ siyā. Yadi aññatra siyā, parasamaye cittavippayutto anusayo viya paṇṇatti viya nibbānaṃ viya ca khandhavinimuttaṃ vā siyā, chaṭṭho vā khandho paññapetabbo bhaveyya, tasmā evaṃ byākāsi. Tassā byākaraṇaṃ sutvā ‘‘adhigatapatiṭṭhā aya’’nti visākho niṭṭhamagamāsi. Na hi sakkā akhīṇāsavena asambaddhena avitthāyantena padīpasahassaṃ jālentena viya evarūpo guḷho paṭicchanno tilakkhaṇāhato gambhīro pañho vissajjetuṃ. Niṭṭhaṃ gantvā pana, ‘‘ayaṃ dhammadinnā sāsane laddhapatiṭṭhā adhigatapaṭisambhidā vesārajjappattā bhavamatthake ṭhitā mahākhīṇāsavā, samatthā mayhaṃ pucchitapañhaṃ kathetuṃ, idāni pana naṃ ovattikasāraṃ pañhaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti cintetvā taṃ pucchanto, kathaṃ panāyyetiādimāha.
461 461. 在回答那个问题时,“无闻凡夫”等语,在《根本法门经》中已经详细解释过了。“他观色为我”,意思是:有人把色看作我。也就是:“这个色就是我,我就是这个色”,他把色和我看成没有区别。就像一盏油灯燃烧时,火焰就是光,光就是火焰,他把火焰和光看成没有区别。同样地,这里有人把色看作我……看成没有区别。(《无碍解道》1.131)他就是以“色是我”这种邪见来看。或者,他先执取一个没有色的我,然后像把树看成有影子一样,把那个我看成具有色。或者,他执取没有色的我之后,像花香在花里面一样,把色看成在我里面。或者,他执取没有色的我之后,像宝珠在匣子里一样,把我看成在色里面。对于“观受是我”等等,也是同样的道理。巴利
461. Tassa vissajjane assutavātiādi mūlapariyāye vitthāritameva. Rūpaṃ attato samanupassatīti, ‘‘idhekacco rūpaṃ attato samanupassati. Yaṃ rūpaṃ so ahaṃ, yo ahaṃ taṃ rūpanti rūpañca attañca advayaṃ samanupassati. Seyyathāpi nāma telappadīpassa jhāyato yā acci so vaṇṇo, yo vaṇṇo sā accīti acciñca vaṇṇañca advayaṃ samanupassati. Evameva idhekacco rūpaṃ attato samanupassati…pe… advayaṃ samanupassatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.131) evaṃ rūpaṃ attāti diṭṭhipassanāya passati. Rūpavantaṃ vā attānanti arūpaṃ attāti gahetvā chāyāvantaṃ rukkhaṃ viya taṃ attānaṃ rūpavantaṃ samanupassati. Attani vā rūpanti arūpameva attāti gahetvā pupphasmiṃ gandhaṃ viya attani rūpaṃ samanupassati. Rūpasmiṃ vā attānanti arūpameva attāti gahetvā karaṇḍāya maṇiṃ viya attānaṃ rūpasmiṃ samanupassati. Vedanaṃ attatotiādīsupi eseva nayo.
在这里,“观色是我”,是说把纯粹的色执为我。而“我有色”“色在我中”“我在色中”,以及对受、想、行、识也同样说“观受是我”等等,这七处是在说无色为我。再者,“我有受”“受在我中”“我在受中”等等,在四个蕴(受、想、行、识)中各有三种方式,合起来十二处,是在说既含色又不含色的混合之我。其中,“观色是我”乃至“观识是我”这五处,说的是断灭见;其余各处,说的是常见。这样,这里一共有十五种有见、五种无有见。而“不观色是我”,是说他不把色看作我,而是把它观为无常、苦、无我。“不观我有色”……乃至“不观识中有我”,是说他对这五蕴不以任何方式执为我,而是从一切方面观它们为无常、苦、无我。巴利
Tattha, rūpaṃ attato samanupassatīti suddharūpameva attāti kathitaṃ. Rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ, attani vā rūpaṃ, rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ. Vedanaṃ attato… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatīti imesu sattasu ṭhānesu arūpaṃ attāti kathitaṃ. Vedanāvantaṃ vā attānaṃ, attani vā vedanaṃ, vedanāya vā attānanti evaṃ catūsu khandhesu tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vasena dvādasasu ṭhānesu rūpārūpamissako attā kathito. Tattha rūpaṃ attato samanupassati… vedanaṃ… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatīti imesu pañcasu ṭhānesu ucchedadiṭṭhi kathitā, avasesesu sassatadiṭṭhīti. Evamettha pannarasa bhavadiṭṭhiyo, pañca vibhavadiṭṭhiyo honti. Na rūpaṃ attatoti ettha rūpaṃ attāti na samanupassati. Aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti pana samanupassati. Na rūpavantaṃ attānaṃ…pe… na viññāṇasmiṃ attānanti ime pañcakkhandhe kenaci pariyāyena attato na samanupassati, sabbākārena pana aniccā dukkhā anattāti samanupassati.
长老尼这样回答前一个问题“贤友毗舍佉,有身见是这样生起的”时,说到这里,就已经把“去”“来”“去来”以及轮回的运转都讲到了顶点。也就是说,她把轮回一直展示到了尽头。接着,她回答后一个问题“贤友毗舍佉,有身见是这样不生的”时,说到这里,就已经没有“去”,没有“来”,没有“去来”,所谓轮回也不再运转。也就是说,她把无轮回也一直展示到了尽头。巴利
Ettāvatā theriyā, ‘‘evaṃ kho, āvuso visākha, sakkāyadiṭṭhi hotī’’ti evaṃ purimapañhaṃ vissajjentiyā ettakena gamanaṃ hoti, āgamanaṃ hoti, gamanāgamanaṃ hoti, vaṭṭaṃ vattatīti vaṭṭaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassitaṃ. Evaṃ kho, āvuso visākha, sakkāyadiṭṭhi na hotīti pacchimaṃ pañhaṃ vissajjentiyā ettakena gamanaṃ na hoti, āgamanaṃ na hoti, gamanāgamanaṃ na hoti, vaṭṭaṃ nāma na vattatīti vivaṭṭaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassitaṃ.
462 “可是,圣尼,‘什么是圣八支道’这个问题,本来应该先由长老尼反问[近事男],再作回答:‘近事男,你前面已经问过道了,为什么在这里又问起道呢?’但她凭着自己的善巧和智慧,看透了他的意图:‘这位近事男前面是就修行实践而问道,现在则是想就有为、无为、世间、出世间、已包含、未包含这些层面来问道。’所以她没有反问,他问什么就直接回答什么。
这里说的“有为”,是指被思量、被构想、被设计、被积集、被造作、被生成出来的,是修行者在证得时应当证得的。
至于“圣八支道被三蕴所包含”这句话:因为道是局部的,而三蕴是完整的,所以这个道由于是局部的,就像国土包含城市一样,被完整的三蕴所包含。其中,正语等三者本身就是戒,所以它们从自类上被戒蕴所包含。虽然经文里用的是处格说“于戒蕴”,但意思应该按工具格来理解。至于正精进等三者,定靠自己的本性没办法让心一境性地专注在所缘上;但当精进完成了策励的作用、念完成了不忘失的作用时,定得到它们的帮助,就能够专注了。”巴利
462.Katamo panāyye, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti ayaṃ pañho theriyā paṭipucchitvā vissajjetabbo bhaveyya – ‘‘upāsaka, tayā heṭṭhā maggo pucchito, idha kasmā maggameva pucchasī’’ti. Sā pana attano byattatāya paṇḍiccena tassa adhippāyaṃ sallakkhesi – ‘‘iminā upāsakena heṭṭhā paṭipattivasena maggo pucchito bhavissati, idha pana taṃ saṅkhatāsaṅkhatalokiyalokuttarasaṅgahitāsaṅgahitavasena pucchitukāmo bhavissatī’’ti. Tasmā appaṭipucchitvāva yaṃ yaṃ pucchi, taṃ taṃ vissajjesi. Tattha saṅkhatoti cetito kappito pakappito āyūhito kato nibbattito samāpajjantena samāpajjitabbo. Tīhi ca kho, āvuso visākha, khandhehi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅgahitoti ettha yasmā maggo sappadeso, tayo khandhā nippadesā, tasmā ayaṃ sappadesattā nagaraṃ viya rajjena nippadesehi tīhi khandhehi saṅgahito. Tattha sammāvācādayo tayo sīlameva, tasmā te sajātito sīlakkhandhena saṅgahitāti. Kiñcāpi hi pāḷiyaṃ sīlakkhandheti bhummena viya niddeso kato, attho pana karaṇavasena veditabbo. Sammāvāyāmādīsu pana tīsu samādhi attano dhammatāya ārammaṇe ekaggabhāvena appetuṃ na sakkoti. Vīriye pana paggahakiccaṃ sādhente satiyā ca apilāpanakiccaṃ sādhentiyā laddhūpakāro hutvā sakkoti.
这里有一个譬喻:好比三个人一起进花园,说“我们要去庆祝星宿节”。其中一人看到一棵开满花的瞻波迦树,伸手去摘却摘不到。这时第二个人弯下腰,把背给他站;他站在那人的背上,还是摇摇晃晃地摘不到。接着第三个人把肩膀凑过来,他站在一个人的背上,靠着另一个人的肩膀,就能随自己的心意摘花、佩戴,欢度星宿节。应当这样理解这个譬喻:就像那三个一起进花园的朋友,正精进等三法是同时生起的。那棵开满花的瞻波迦树,好比所缘。伸手却摘不到花的人,好比定——它靠自己的本性,无法以一心专注的状态投入所缘。弯腰把背让出来的朋友,好比精进。把肩膀凑过来站着的朋友,好比念。正如那人站在一个人的背上、靠着另一个人的肩膀,就能如愿摘到花;同样,当精进完成策励的作用、念完成不忘失的作用时,定得到它们的帮助,就能够以一心专注的状态投入所缘。所以在这里,定按同类归入定蕴,而精进和念则按作用归入。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ upamā – yathā hi ‘‘nakkhattaṃ kīḷissāmā’’ti uyyānaṃ paviṭṭhesu tīsu sahāyesu eko supupphitaṃ campakarukkhaṃ disvā hatthaṃ ukkhipitvāpi gahetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya. Athassa dutiyo onamitvā piṭṭhiṃ dadeyya, so tassa piṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhatvāpi kampamāno gahetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya . Athassa itaro aṃsakūṭaṃ upanāmeyya, so ekassa piṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhatvā ekassa aṃsakūṭaṃ olubbha yathāruci pupphāni ocinitvā piḷandhitvā nakkhattaṃ kīḷeyya. Evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ekato uyyānaṃ paviṭṭhā tayo sahāyakā viya hi ekato jātā sammāvāyāmādayo tayo dhammā. Supupphitacampako viya ārammaṇaṃ. Hatthaṃ ukkhipitvāpi gahetuṃ asakkonto viya attano dhammatāya ārammaṇe ekaggabhāvena appetuṃ asakkonto samādhi. Piṭṭhiṃ datvā onatasahāyo viya vāyāmo. Aṃsakūṭaṃ datvā ṭhitasahāyo viya sati. Yathā tesu ekassa piṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhatvā ekassa aṃsakūṭaṃ olubbha itaro yathāruci pupphaṃ gahetuṃ sakkoti, evamevaṃ vīriye paggahakiccaṃ sādhente, satiyā ca apilāpanakiccaṃ sādhentiyā laddhupakāro samādhi sakkoti ārammaṇe ekaggabhāvena appetuṃ. Tasmā samādhiyevettha sajātito samādhikkhandhena saṅgahito. Vāyāmasatiyo pana kiriyato saṅgahitā honti.
在正见和正思惟当中,慧靠自己的本性,没办法把所缘判定为无常、苦、无我;但是当寻反复敲击、反复推动,把所缘递过来的时候,慧就能判定了。这是怎么回事呢?就好比一个金匠把金币放在手里,虽然想从各个角度仔细查看,但光靠眼睛没办法把它翻过来,他用手指关节去拨动,把金币翻来翻去,这样才能从各个角度都看清楚。同样地,慧靠自己的本性,没办法以无常等角度来决断所缘,但靠着具有“将心推向所缘”的特相、“反复敲击”的作用的寻——就像敲击、翻转一样——把所缘取来递交给慧,慧才能做出决断。所以在这里,正见从自己的类别来说,被归入慧蕴;正思惟则从作用上来说,被归入。这样,圣八支道就被这三蕴所包含。因此经中说:“贤友毗舍佉,圣八支道由三蕴所包含。”巴利
Sammādiṭṭhisammāsaṅkappesupi paññā attano dhammatāya aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti ārammaṇaṃ nicchetuṃ na sakkoti, vitakke pana ākoṭetvā ākoṭetvā dente sakkoti. Kathaṃ? Yathā hi heraññiko kahāpaṇaṃ hatthe ṭhapetvā sabbabhāgesu oloketukāmo samānopi na cakkhudaleneva parivattetuṃ sakkoti, aṅgulipabbehi pana parivattetvā ito cito ca oloketuṃ sakkoti. Evameva na paññā attano dhammatāya aniccādivasena ārammaṇaṃ nicchetuṃ sakkoti, abhiniropanalakkhaṇena pana āhananapariyāhananarasena vitakkena ākoṭentena viya parivattentena viya ca ādāyā dinnameva vinicchetuṃ sakkoti. Tasmā idhāpi sammādiṭṭhiyeva sajātito paññākkhandhena saṅgahitā. Sammāsaṅkappo pana kiriyato saṅgahito hoti. Iti imehi tīhi khandhehi maggo saṅgahaṃ gacchati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tīhi ca kho, āvuso visākha, khandhehi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅgahito’’ti.
现在,为了追问那唯一心刹那的道定是有相、有资具的,而说了“然而,圣尼,什么是……”等话。在回答中:四念处——在道刹那,以完成四种功能的方式而生起的念——因为是定的缘,所以是相。四正勤——同样以完成四种功能的方式而生起的精进——因为是定的随从,所以是资具。“即对那些诸法”是指对那些与道相应的法。在“习行”等当中所说的习行、修习、多修习,也都是指唯一心刹那的。巴利
Idāni ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ maggasamādhiṃ sanimittaṃ saparikkhāraṃ pucchanto, katamo panāyyetiādimāha. Tassa vissajjane cattāro satipaṭṭhānā maggakkhaṇe catukiccasādhanavasena uppannā sati, sā samādhissa paccayatthena nimittaṃ. Cattāro sammappadhānā catukiccasādhanavaseneva uppannaṃ vīriyaṃ, taṃ parivāraṭṭhena parikkhāro hoti. Tesaṃyeva dhammānanti tesaṃ maggasampayuttadhammānaṃ. Āsevanātiādīsu ekacittakkhaṇikāyeva āsevanādayo vuttāti.
诡辩家却说:“所谓只在一个心刹那完成的道是不存在的,因为经里说‘应当这样修习七年’,可见道的修习可以长达七年;而烦恼在迅速被断除时,是以七种智来断除的。”这时应当对他说:“拿出经文来!”他肯定找不到别的经文,只会引用“就是对那些法的习行、修习、多修习”这一句,然后说:“以另一个心习行,以另一个心修习,以另一个心多修习。”这时应当问他:“那么这部经是了义还是不了义?”他会说:“是了义,经文怎么说,意思就是那样。”对此应当这样反驳:如果真是这样,那么一个心生起时在习行,另一个心生起时也在习行,再一个心生起时还在习行——这样一来,一整天就都只是习行而已,哪里还有修习,哪里还有多修习?或者一个心生起时在修习,另一个心生起时也在修习,再一个心生起时还在修习——这样一来,一整天就都只是修习而已,哪里还有习行,哪里还有多修习?又或者一个心生起时在多修习,另一个心生起时也在多修习,再一个心生起时还在多修习——这样一来,一整天就都只是多修习而已,哪里还有习行,哪里还有修习?巴利
Vitaṇḍavādī pana, ‘‘ekacittakkhaṇiko nāma maggo natthi, ‘evaṃ bhāveyya satta vassānī’ti hi vacanato sattapi vassāni maggabhāvanā hoti, kilesā pana lahu chijjantā sattahi ñāṇehi chijjantī’’ti vadati. So ‘‘suttaṃ āharā’’ti vattabbo. Addhā aññaṃ apassanto, ‘‘yā tesaṃyeva dhammānaṃ āsevanā bhāvanā bahulīkamma’’nti idameva suttaṃ āharitvā, ‘‘aññena cittena āsevati, aññena bhāveti, aññena bahulīkarotī’’ti vakkhati. Tato vattabbo – ‘‘kiṃ panidaṃ, suttaṃ neyyatthaṃ nītattha’’nti. Tato vakkhati – ‘‘nītatthaṃ yathā suttaṃ tatheva attho’’ti. Tassa idaṃ uttaraṃ – evaṃ sante ekaṃ cittaṃ āsevamānaṃ uppannaṃ, aparampi āsevamānaṃ, aparampi āsevamānanti evaṃ divasampi āsevanāva bhavissati, kuto bhāvanā, kuto bahulīkammaṃ? Ekaṃ vā bhāvayamānaṃ uppannaṃ aparampi bhāvayamānaṃ aparampi bhāvayamānanti evaṃ divasampi bhāvanāva bhavissati, kuto āsevanā kuto bahulīkammaṃ? Ekaṃ vā bahulīkarontaṃ uppannaṃ, aparampi bahulīkarontaṃ, aparampi bahulīkarontanti evaṃ divasampi bahulīkammameva bhavissati kuto āsevanā, kuto bhāvanāti.
或者他可能这样说:“以一个心习行,以两个心修习,以三个心多作。或者以两个心习行,以三个心修习,以一个心多作。或者以三个心习行,以一个心修习,以两个心多作。”这时应该对他说:“别以为抓住了我的经文,就可以随便乱说。解答问题的人,必须亲近师长、学通佛语、了知法义之后,才能开口。这习行就是一心刹那的,修习就是一心刹那的,多作也是一心刹那的。趋向灭尽的出世间道,绝没有什么多心刹那的,应当让他明白:它就是‘唯一心刹那’。”如果他明白了,那就好;如果还是不明白,就该打发他走:“去吧,一大早就进寺院喝粥去吧。”巴利
Atha vā evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘ekena cittena āsevati, dvīhi bhāveti, tīhi bahulīkaroti. Dvīhi vā āsevati, tīhi bhāveti, ekena bahulīkaroti . Tīhi vā āsevati, ekena bhāveti, dvīhi bahulīkarotī’’ti. So vattabbo – ‘‘mā suttaṃ me laddhanti yaṃ vā taṃ vā avaca. Pañhaṃ vissajjentena nāma ācariyassa santike vasitvā buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā attharasaṃ viditvā vattabbaṃ hoti. Ekacittakkhaṇikāva ayaṃ āsevanā, ekacittakkhaṇikā bhāvanā, ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ bahulīkammaṃ. Khayagāmilokuttaramaggo bahulacittakkhaṇiko nāma natthi, ‘ekacittakkhaṇikoyevā’ti saññāpetabbo. Sace sañjānāti, sañjānātu, no ce sañjānāti, gaccha pātova vihāraṃ pavisitvā yāguṃ pivāhī’’ti uyyojetabbo.
463 “圣尼,有几种行?”这里问的是什么?他想问的是:那些要先把行灭掉才能进入灭尽定的行,到底是哪些。长老尼知道他的意图后,虽然福行等许多行都存在,却只指出身行、语行、心行,于是说“贤友,有三种”等等。其中,因为系属于身,由身造作、作出、生起,所以叫身行。造作语言、作出语言、生起语言,所以叫语行。因为系属于心,由心造作、作出、生起,所以叫心行。“贤友,那么什么是……”这里问的是什么?因为这些行互相混杂、搅在一起、不清楚,很难说明。事实正是这样:在身门,经过执取、执持、放舍、动作而生起的八种欲界善思和十二种不善思——这二十种善与不善的思,以及出息和入息,都称为身行。在语门,经过下颚的动作而发出语言时生起的上述二十种思,以及寻和伺,都称为语行。身门、语门都没有动作,独自坐着思考时生起的善与不善二十九种思,以及想和受这两种法,都称为心行。这样一来,这些行互相混杂、搅在一起、不清楚,很难说明。他心想“我要使[长老尼]将这些行解说清楚、说明白”,所以才这样问。巴利
463.Kati panāyye saṅkhārāti idha kiṃ pucchati? Ye saṅkhāre nirodhetvā nirodhaṃ samāpajjati, te pucchissāmīti pucchati. Tenevassa adhippāyaṃ ñatvā therī, puññābhisaṅkhārādīsu anekesu saṅkhāresu vijjamānesupi, kāyasaṅkhārādayova ācikkhantī, tayome, āvusotiādimāha. Tattha kāyapaṭibaddhattā kāyena saṅkharīyati karīyati nibbattīyatīti kāyasaṅkhāro. Vācaṃ saṅkharoti karoti nibbattetīti vacīsaṅkhāro. Cittapaṭibaddhattā cittena saṅkharīyati karīyati nibbattīyatīti cittasaṅkhāro. Katamo panāyyeti idha kiṃ pucchati? Ime saṅkhārā aññamaññamissā āluḷitā avibhūtā duddīpanā. Tathā hi, kāyadvāre ādānagahaṇamuñcanacopanāni pāpetvā uppannā aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalacetanā dvādasa akusalacetanāti evaṃ kusalākusalā vīsati cetanāpi assāsapassāsāpi kāyasaṅkhārātveva vuccanti. Vacīdvāre hanusaṃcopanaṃ vacībhedaṃ pāpetvā uppannā vuttappakārāva vīsati cetanāpi vitakkavicārāpi vacīsaṅkhārotveva vuccanti. Kāyavacīdvāresu copanaṃ apattā raho nisinnassa cintayato uppannā kusalākusalā ekūnatiṃsa cetanāpi saññā ca vedanā cāti ime dve dhammāpi cittasaṅkhārotveva vuccanti. Evaṃ ime saṅkhārā aññamaññamissā āluḷitā avibhūtā duddīpanā. Te pākaṭe vibhūte katvā kathāpessāmīti pucchati.
为什么这样问呢?这里问的是“身行”等这些名称的具体含义。回答时,“依属于身”是指依靠身体,有身体才有它们,没有身体就没有。“依属于心”是指依靠心,有心才有它们,没有心就没有。巴利
Kasmā panāyyeti idha kāyasaṅkhārādināmassa padatthaṃ pucchati. Tassa vissajjane kāyappaṭibaddhāti kāyanissitā, kāye sati honti, asati na honti. Cittappaṭibaddhāti cittanissitā, citte sati honti, asati na honti.
464 现在要弄清楚:这个想受灭定,她到底能进入还是不能进入?她在其中是熟练自在还是不熟练自在?为了知道这一点,就问道:“圣尼,想受灭定是怎么进入的呢?”等等。在她的回答中,用“将要进入”和“正在进入”这两个词,说的是非想非非想处定的阶段;用“已进入”这个词,说的是在灭定之中的状态。同样,前面两个词说的是有心的阶段,后面一个词说的是无心的阶段。“事先就已这样修习了心”的意思是:在进入想受灭定之前,也就是在设定时限的那个时候,他就已经修习了这样的心——“我将在这段时间里没有心”,这就是设定时限的决意心。所谓“它将那人带入如此状态”,就是说:这样修习的心,把那个人带入了那种没有心的状态。巴利
464. Idāni kiṃ nu kho esā saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ valañjeti, na valañjeti. Ciṇṇavasī vā tattha no ciṇṇavasīti jānanatthaṃ pucchanto, kathaṃ panāyye, saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpatti hotītiādimāha. Tassa vissajjane samāpajjissanti vā samāpajjāmīti vā padadvayena nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattikālo kathito. Samāpannoti padena antonirodho. Tathā purimehi dvīhi padehi sacittakakālo kathito, pacchimena acittakakālo. Pubbeva tathā cittaṃ bhāvitaṃ hotīti nirodhasamāpattito pubbe addhānaparicchedakāleyeva, ettakaṃ kālaṃ acittako bhavissāmīti addhānaparicchedacittaṃ bhāvitaṃ hoti. Yaṃ taṃ tathattāya upanetīti yaṃ evaṃ bhāvitaṃ cittaṃ, taṃ puggalaṃ tathattāya acittakabhāvāya upaneti.
语行最先灭去:在其余诸行当中,语行最先在第二禅那中灭去。接着身行灭去:再往后,身行在第四禅那中灭去。再接着心行灭去:再往后,心行在灭尽定中灭去。用“将要出定”和“我正在出定”这两个词,说的是灭尽定内的时段。用“已出定”这个词,说的是果等至的时段。同样,前两个词说的是无心的阶段,后一个词说的是有心的阶段。“事先就已这样修习心”的意思是:在入灭尽定之前、也就是设定时限的时候,他就已经修习了这样的心——“我将有这么长一段时间没有心,之后又会恢复有心”,这就是设定时限的决意心。“它将那人带入如此状态”的意思是:这样修习的心,把那个人带入那种有心的状态。这样,前面讲的是入灭尽定,这里讲的是从灭尽定出来。巴利
Paṭhamaṃ nirujjhati vacīsaṅkhāroti sesasaṅkhārehi paṭhamaṃ dutiyajjhāneyeva nirujjhati. Tato kāyasaṅkhāroti tato paraṃ kāyasaṅkhāro catutthajjhāne nirujjhati. Tato cittasaṅkhāroti tato paraṃ cittasaṅkhāro antonirodhe nirujjhati. Vuṭṭhahissanti vā vuṭṭhahāmīti vā padadvayena antonirodhakālo kathito. Vuṭṭhitoti padena phalasamāpattikālo. Tathā purimehi dvīhi padehi acittakakālo kathito, pacchimena sacittakakālo. Pubbeva tathā cittaṃ bhāvitaṃ hotīti nirodhasamāpattito pubbe addhānaparicchedakāleyeva ettakaṃ kālaṃ acittako hutvā tato paraṃ sacittako bhavissāmīti addhānaparicchedacittaṃ bhāvitaṃ hoti. Yaṃ taṃ tathattāya upanetīti yaṃ evaṃ bhāvitaṃ cittaṃ, taṃ puggalaṃ tathattāya sacittakabhāvāya upaneti. Iti heṭṭhā nirodhasamāpajjanakālo gahito, idha nirodhato vuṭṭhānakālo.
现在要讲灭尽定,所以“品”应当是:灭尽定需要解说。而它已经在《清净道论》中,先立论母说“由于具备两种力量,以及三种行的止息,以十六种智的作用、九种定的作用而达到自在的慧,就是灭尽定的智”,然后以一切方式作了说明。因此,应当依照那里所说的方式来了知。那么,这个“灭尽”到底是什么?就是对四蕴加以观照后,使它们不再生起。那么,他们为什么要入这个定呢?因为厌倦了诸行的不断生起,众生想:“我们将七天无心而住,安住于乐;这就是现法涅槃,也就是所谓的灭尽。”就是为了这个目的而入定。巴利
Idāni nirodhakathaṃ kathetuṃ vāroti nirodhakathā kathetabbā siyā, sā panesā, ‘‘dvīhi balehi samannāgatattā tayo ca saṅkhārānaṃ paṭippassaddhiyā soḷasahi ñāṇacariyāhi navahi samādhicariyāhi vasībhāvatāpaññā nirodhasamāpattiyā ñāṇa’’nti mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbākārena visuddhimagge kathitā. Tasmā tattha kathitanayeneva gahetabbā . Ko panāyaṃ nirodho nāma? Catunnaṃ khandhānaṃ paṭisaṅkhā appavatti. Atha kimatthametaṃ samāpajjantīti. Saṅkhārānaṃ pavatte ukkaṇṭhitā sattāhaṃ acittakā hutvā sukhaṃ viharissāma, diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ nāmetaṃ, yadidaṃ nirodhoti etadatthaṃ samāpajjanti.
首先生起的是心行:从灭尽定出定的人,果等至心首先生起。这里说的“心行”,是指与那个果等至心相应的想和受,所以说“首先生起的是心行”。接下来是身行:在那之后,在有分的时候,身行生起。有人问:果等至难道不会引出入出息吗?会引出。但这个人的果等至属于第四禅那的层次,那种果等至不会引出入出息。或者说,不管这个果等至是初禅那的、第二禅那的、第三禅那的,还是第四禅那的,从寂静的等至出定的比丘,入出息都不可察觉。这种不可察觉,可以通过僧祇婆长老的故事来了解。据说僧祇婆长老从等至出定后,走在像吉苏迦花一样已经熄灭火焰的木炭上,僧衣连一点焦痕都没有,连一点热气的迹象都没有,人们说这就是等至的功德。同样,从寂静等至出定的比丘,入出息不可察觉,应当知道这是就有分的时候说的。巴利
Paṭhamaṃ uppajjati cittasaṅkhāroti nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa hi phalasamāpatticittaṃ paṭhamaṃ uppajjati. Taṃsampayuttaṃ saññañca vedanañca sandhāya, ‘‘paṭhamaṃ uppajjati cittasaṅkhāro’’ti āha. Tato kāyasaṅkhāroti tato paraṃ bhavaṅgasamaye kāyasaṅkhāro uppajjati. Kiṃ pana phalasamāpatti assāsapassāse na samuṭṭhāpetīti? Samuṭṭhāpeti. Imassa pana catutthajjhānikā phalasamāpatti, sā na samuṭṭhāpeti. Kiṃ vā etena phalasamāpatti paṭhamajjhānikā vā hotu, dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānikā vā, santāya samāpattiyā vuṭṭhitassa bhikkhuno assāsapassāsā abbohārikā honti. Tesaṃ abbohārikabhāvo sañjīvattheravatthunā veditabbo. Sañjīvattherassa hi samāpattito vuṭṭhāya kiṃsukapupphasadise vītaccitaṅgāre maddamānassa gacchato cīvare aṃsumattampi na jhāyi, usumākāramattampi nāhosi, samāpattiphalaṃ nāmetanti vadanti. Evamevaṃ santāya samāpattiyā vuṭṭhitassa bhikkhuno assāsapassāsā abbohārikā hontīti bhavaṅgasamayenevetaṃ kathitanti veditabbaṃ.
从此之后,“语行”是指:此后,在唯作转起的运作阶段,语行生起。有人问:有分难道不引生寻与伺吗?它引生。不过,由它引生的寻与伺并不能造作言语。因此,这是就唯作转起的运作阶段而说的。“空触”等说法,应当从伴随性质和所缘两方面来说明。先从伴随性质来说:所谓“空”,就是果等至;与它同时生起的触,就称为“空触”。“无相触”和“无愿触”也是同样的道理。再从所缘来说:涅槃因为远离贪等,所以称为“空”;因为没有贪等相状,所以称为“无相”;因为没有对贪嗔痴的愿求,所以称为“无愿”。以空的涅槃为所缘而生起的果等至中,那个触就称为“空触”。无相触和无愿触也是同样的道理。巴利
Tato vacīsaṅkhāroti tato paraṃ kiriyamayapavattavaḷañjanakāle vacīsaṅkhāro uppajjati. Kiṃ bhavaṅgaṃ vitakkavicāre na samuṭṭhāpetīti? Samuṭṭhāpeti. Taṃsamuṭṭhānā pana vitakkavicārā vācaṃ abhisaṅkhātuṃ na sakkontīti kiriyamayapavattavaḷañjanakālenevataṃ kathitaṃ. Suññato phassotiādayo saguṇenāpi ārammaṇenāpi kathetabbā. Saguṇena tāva suññatā nāma phalasamāpatti, tāya sahajātaṃ phassaṃ sandhāya suññato phassoti vuttaṃ. Animittāpaṇihitesupieseva nayo. Ārammaṇena pana nibbānaṃ rāgādīhi suññattā suññaṃ nāma, rāganimittādīnaṃ abhāvā animittaṃ, rāgadosamohappaṇidhīnaṃ abhāvā appaṇihitaṃ. Suññataṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppannaphalasamāpattiyaṃ phasso suññato nāma. Animittāpaṇihitesupi eseva nayo.
还有一种叫“导向说”的说法。因为“空”“无相”“无愿”这些词也可以用来称呼观。在这里,如果有一位比丘把诸行把握为无常,依无常而观见,依无常而出起,那么他的“导向出起的观”就称为“无相”。如果把诸行把握为苦,依苦而观见,依苦而出起,他的观就称为“无愿”。如果把诸行把握为无我,依无我而观见,依无我而出起,他的观就称为“空”。在这当中,与无相观相应的道称为“无相”,无相道的果称为“无相”。当与无相果等至同时生起的触正在触及时,就说“无相触正在触及”。无愿和空也是这样。不过,如果只按“导向说”来讲,就会出现“是空触,还是无相触,还是无愿触”这样的犹豫分别。所以,应当从伴随性质和所缘两方面来说明。这样才和“三种触正在触及”的说法相符。巴利
Aparā āgamaniyakathā nāma hoti, suññatā, animittā, appaṇihitāti hi vipassanāpi vuccati. Tattha yo bhikkhu saṅkhāre aniccato pariggahetvā aniccato disvā aniccato vuṭṭhāti, tassa vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā animittā nāma hoti. Yo dukkhato pariggahetvā dukkhato disvā dukkhato vuṭṭhāti, tassa appaṇihitā nāma. Yo anattato pariggahetvā anattato disvā anattato vuṭṭhāti, tassa suññatā nāma. Tattha animittavipassanāya maggo animitto nāma, animittamaggassa phalaṃ animittaṃ nāma. Animittaphalasamāpattisahajāte phasse phusante animitto phasso phusatīti vuccati. Appaṇihitasuññatesupi eseva nayo. Āgamaniyena kathite pana suññato vā phasso animitto vā phasso appaṇihito vā phassoti vikappo āpajjeyya, tasmā saguṇena ceva ārammaṇena ca kathetabbaṃ. Evañhi tayo phassā phusantīti sameti.
在“倾向远离”等说法里,涅槃就叫作“远离”。心倾向、低垂于这个远离,就是“倾向远离”。从别处来,朝着远离的方向,像弯曲一样安住,就是“趣向远离”。朝着远离的方向,像倾泻一样安住,就是“斜向远离”。巴利
Vivekaninnantiādīsu nibbānaṃ viveko nāma, tasmiṃ viveke ninnaṃ onatanti vivekaninnaṃ. Aññato āgantvā yena viveko, tena vaṅkaṃ viya hutvā ṭhitanti vivekapoṇaṃ. Yena viveko, tena patamānaṃ viya ṭhitanti vivekapabbhāraṃ.
465 465. 现在,为了问“灭掉哪些受之后才能进入灭尽定”,就问道:“圣尼,有多少种受?”在“身体方面的”等说法里,应该知道:通过前五门生起的乐叫身乐,通过意门生起的叫心乐。其中,“乐”是说明它的自性;“舒适”是揭示它那种甘美状态的同义词;“感受”是显示感受状态、通用于一切受的词。其他几个词也是这样理解。在“住时为乐、变易为苦”等说法里,意思是:乐受存在时是乐,不存在时是苦;苦受存在时是苦,不存在时就是乐;不苦不乐受有觉知的状态是乐,没有觉知的状态是苦。巴利
465. Idāni yā vedanā nirodhetvā nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, tā pucchissāmīti pucchanto kati panāyye, vedanāti āha. Kāyikaṃ vātiādīsu pañcadvārikaṃ sukhaṃ kāyikaṃ nāma, manodvārikaṃ cetasikaṃ nāmāti veditabbaṃ. Tattha sukhanti sabhāvaniddeso. Sātanti tasseva madhurabhāvadīpakaṃ vevacanaṃ. Vedayitanti vedayitabhāvadīpakaṃ, sabbavedanānaṃ sādhāraṇavacanaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhātiādīsu sukhāya vedanāya atthibhāvo sukhaṃ, natthibhāvo dukkhaṃ. Dukkhāya vedanāya atthibhāvo dukkhaṃ, natthibhāvo sukhaṃ. Adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya jānanabhāvo sukhaṃ, ajānanabhāvo dukkhanti attho.
“哪一种随眠在潜伏?”这是在问:哪一种随眠在潜伏?它以“未被断除”的意义,像睡着了一样存在着,所以提出这个关于随眠的问题。“贤友毗舍佉,并不是对一切乐受,贪随眠都在潜伏。”意思是:并不是对一切乐受,贪随眠都在潜伏;并不是对一切乐受,它都未被断除;也并不是缘于一切乐受,它都会生起。这个道理适用于所有情况。“应当断除的是什么?”这叫做“断除之问”。巴利
Kiṃ anusayo anusetīti katamo anusayo anuseti. Appahīnaṭṭhena sayito viya hotīti anusayapucchaṃ pucchati. Na kho, āvuso visākha, sabbāya sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo anusetīti na sabbāya sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo anuseti. Na sabbāya sukhāya vedanāya so appahīno, na sabbaṃ sukhaṃ vedanaṃ ārabbha uppajjatīti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Kiṃ pahātabbanti ayaṃ pahānapucchā nāma.
“他藉此舍断贪”这句话,是用一个回答解决了两个问题。在这里,比丘先压伏了贪随眠,然后进入初禅。他把被禅那压伏的贪随眠保持在那样被压伏的状态,继续修观并使之增长,最后用不来道把它彻底断除。虽然它已经被不来道断除,但因为先前被压伏过,所以在初禅那里它不再潜伏,因此说“在那里贪随眠不再潜伏”。“彼处”就是指那个处所,也就是以最高安稳为本质的依止处——阿拉汉果。这样,在对被称为无上解脱的阿拉汉果生起希求时:“由希求为缘,忧生起。”意思是,当一个人立下愿望之后,以愿望的建立为根源,忧就生起。不过,这实际上并不是直接以愿望的建立为根源而生起,而是希求之后得不到,以“得不到”为根源而生起,所以说“由希求为缘”。在这里,虽然忧确实完全是不善法,但据说这种应当去经历的忧是允许的。因为修行者会采取三个月、六个月或九个月的修行方式。其中,有人选定了某种修行方式后,努力精进,想着“我要在预定的时间内证得阿拉汉果”,如果无法在预定的时间内证得,就会生起强烈的忧,眼泪像水流一样落下,就像住在阿邻提迦的大普沙长老那样。据说这位长老在十九年里完成了往返的修行任务。他下定决心:“这一次我要证得阿拉汉果,这一次我要举行清净自恣。”就这样一边做沙门的事业,一边十九年过去了。到了自恣日,长老没有一天不是泪流满面。到了第二十年,他才证得阿拉汉果。巴利
Rāgaṃ tena pajahatīti ettha ekeneva byākaraṇena dve pucchā vissajjesi. Idha bhikkhu rāgānusayaṃ vikkhambhetvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajjati, jhānavikkhambhitaṃ rāgānusayaṃ tathā vikkhambhitameva katvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā anāgāmimaggena samugghāteti. So anāgāmimaggena pahīnopi tathā vikkhambhitattāva paṭhamajjhāne nānuseti nāma. Tenāha – ‘‘na tattha rāgānusayo anusetī’’ti. Tadāyatananti taṃ āyatanaṃ, paramassāsabhāvena patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ arahattanti attho. Iti anuttaresūti evaṃ anuttarā vimokkhāti laddhanāme arahatte. Pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpayatoti patthanaṃ paṭṭhapentassa. Uppajjati pihāpaccayā domanassanti patthanāya paṭṭhapanamūlakaṃ domanassaṃ uppajjati. Taṃ panetaṃ na patthanāya paṭṭhapanamūlakaṃ uppajjati, patthetvā alabhantassa pana alābhamūlakaṃ uppajjamānaṃ, ‘‘uppajjati pihāpaccayā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha kiñcāpi domanassaṃ nāma ekantena akusalaṃ, idaṃ pana sevitabbaṃ domanassaṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Yogino hi temāsikaṃ chamāsikaṃ vā navamāsikaṃ vā paṭipadaṃ gaṇhanti. Tesu yo taṃ taṃ paṭipadaṃ gahetvā antokālaparicchedeyeva arahattaṃ pāpuṇissāmīti ghaṭento vāyamanto na sakkoti yathāparicchinnakālena pāpuṇituṃ, tassa balavadomanassaṃ uppajjati, āḷindikavāsimahāphussadevattherassa viya assudhārā pavattanti. Thero kira ekūnavīsativassāni gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūresi. Tassa, ‘‘imasmiṃ vāre arahattaṃ gaṇhissāmi, imasmiṃ vāre visuddhipavāraṇaṃ pavāressāmī’’ti mānasaṃ bandhitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karontasseva ekūnavīsativassāni atikkantāni. Pavāraṇādivase āgate therassa assupātena muttadivaso nāma nāhosi. Vīsatime pana vasse arahattaṃ pāṇuṇi.
以嗔断嗔这句话的意思是:在这里,他就是以忧来断除嗔。因为确实不存在以嗔本身来断除嗔,也不存在以忧本身来断除忧这回事。然而,这位比丘在三个月等期限内,采取某一种修行方式后,这样反复思量:“比丘,你看,你的戒有没有缺失的地方?或者精进有没有不足?或者慧有没有不够?你的戒难道不是极为清净,精进不是已经很好地提起,慧不是已经变得勇猛而能持续运行了吗?”他这样反复思量后,下定决心:“从现在起,我不会再让这种忧生起。”于是提起坚固的精进,在三个月内、六个月内或九个月内,以不来道将它彻底断除。通过这种方式,就称为以嗔断嗔、以忧断忧。巴利
Paṭighaṃtena pajahatīti ettha domanasseneva paṭighaṃ pajahati. Na hi paṭigheneva paṭighappahānaṃ, domanassena vā domanassappahānaṃ nāma atthi. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu temāsikādīsu aññataraṃ paṭipadaṃ gahetvā iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘passa bhikkhu, kiṃ tuyhaṃ sīlena hīnaṭṭhānaṃ atthi, udāhu vīriyena, udāhu paññāya, nanu te sīlaṃ suparisuddhaṃ vīriyaṃ supaggahitaṃ paññā sūrā hutvā vahatī’’ti. So evaṃ paṭisañcikkhitvā, ‘‘na dāni puna imassa domanassassa uppajjituṃ dassāmī’’ti vīriyaṃ daḷhaṃ katvā antotemāse vā antochamāse vā antonavamāse vā anāgāmimaggena taṃ samugghāteti. Iminā pariyāyena paṭigheneva paṭighaṃ, domanasseneva domanassaṃ pajahati nāma.
在那里,嗔随眠不潜伏:意思是,对于这样的忧受,嗔随眠不潜伏。它不会以那个为所缘而生起,也就是说,嗔随眠在那里已经被断除了。通过那个,无明被断除:这里,比丘镇伏了无明随眠之后,进入第四禅;对于被禅那镇伏的无明随眠,他保持它这样被镇伏的状态,修习观,然后用阿拉汉道将它彻底根除。它虽然已经被阿拉汉道断除,但因为先前已经被镇伏,所以在第四禅中说它不潜伏。因此说:在那里,无明随眠不潜伏。巴利
Na tattha paṭighānusayo anusetīti tattha evarūpe domanasse paṭighānusayo nānuseti. Na taṃ ārabbha uppajjati, pahīnova tattha paṭighānusayoti attho. Avijjaṃ tena pajahatīti idha bhikkhu avijjānusayaṃ vikkhambhetvā catutthajjhānaṃ samāpajjati, jhānavikkhambhitaṃ avijjānusayaṃ tathā vikkhambhitameva katvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattamaggena samugghāteti. So arahattamaggena pahīnopi tathā vikkhambhitattāva catutthajjhāne nānuseti nāma. Tenāha – ‘‘na tattha avijjānusayo anusetī’’ti.
466 现在,为了提出一个对等的反问,他说“然而,以乐……”等话。在解答这个问题时,因为乐的对立面是苦,苦的对立面是乐,所以针对这两种受,说的是“异分对等”。而舍受就像黑暗一样,不明显、难以照亮,无明也是如此,因此这里说的是“同分对等”。不过,在无明制造黑暗的地方,明就能驱除黑暗,所以也说了“异分对等”。在“友!无明……”这句里,这两个法都是无漏、出世间的,所以只说了“同分对等”。在“友!解脱……”这句里,从无漏、出世间和无记这三个角度来说,也只说了“同分对等”。“已超逾”的意思是已经越过问题而去。“未能把握问题的边际”是说无法把握问题的界限和尺度,你去问了无对等之法的对等。这涅槃就是无对等的,不可能用蓝色或黄色等任何法来设立对等并显示出来。你正是怀着这个意图发问的,这就是其中的含义。巴利
466. Idāni paṭibhāgapucchaṃ pucchanto sukhāya panāyyetiādimāha. Tassa vissajjane yasmā sukhassa dukkhaṃ, dukkhassa ca sukhaṃ paccanīkaṃ, tasmā dvīsu vedanāsu visabhāgapaṭibhāgo kathito. Upekkhā pana andhakārā avibhūtā duddīpanā, avijjāpi tādisāvāti tenettha sabhāgapaṭibhāgo kathito. Yattakesu pana ṭhānesu avijjā tamaṃ karoti, tattakesu vijjā tamaṃ vinodetīti visabhāgapaṭibhāgo kathito. Avijjāya kho, āvusoti ettha ubhopete dhammā anāsavā lokuttarāti sabhāgapaṭibhāgova kathito. Vimuttiyā kho, āvusoti ettha anāsavaṭṭhena lokuttaraṭṭhena abyākataṭṭhena ca sabhāgapaṭibhāgova kathito. Accayāsīti ettha pañhaṃ atikkamitvā gatosīti attho. Nāsakkhi pañhānaṃ pariyantaṃ gahetunti pañhānaṃ paricchedapamāṇaṃ gahetuṃ nāsakkhi, appaṭibhāgadhammassa paṭibhāgaṃ pucchi. Nibbānaṃ nāmetaṃ appaṭibhāgaṃ , na sakkā nīlaṃ vā pītakaṃ vāti kenaci dhammena saddhiṃ paṭibhāgaṃ katvā dassetuṃ. Tañca tvaṃ iminā adhippāyena pucchasīti attho.
到这一步应当明白:这位居士就像一个比丘在第七户人家得到了筹食,离开后走过了七户人家,站在第八户门口,却完全没意识到自己已经错过了全部七户;同样,他去问那无可比拟之法的比拟,结果在全部七个有比拟可问的问题上都错过了。入涅槃:就是进入涅槃内部,融入涅槃之中。以涅槃为彼岸:涅槃是他的最高归宿,他的最终去处就是涅槃,再没有比这更远的去处了,这就是这句话的意思。以涅槃为终点:涅槃是他的终点、他的归宿,所以叫以涅槃为终点。巴利
Ettāvatā cāyaṃ upāsako yathā nāma sattame ghare salākabhattaṃ labhitvā gato bhikkhu satta gharāni atikkamma aṭṭhamassa dvāre ṭhito sabbānipi satta gehāni viraddhova na aññāsi, evamevaṃ appaṭibhāgadhammassa paṭibhāgaṃ pucchanto sabbāsupi sattasu sappaṭibhāgapucchāsu viraddhova hotīti veditabbo. Nibbānogadhanti nibbānabbhantaraṃ nibbānaṃ anupaviṭṭhaṃ. Nibbānaparāyananti nibbānaṃ paraṃ ayanamassa parā gati, na tato paraṃ gacchatīti attho. Nibbānaṃ pariyosānaṃ avasānaṃ assāti nibbānapariyosānaṃ.
467 “具慧者”是指具备智慧,对界善巧、对处善巧、对缘起善巧、对处非处善巧,这就是它的意思。“大慧者”是指具备这样的智慧:能够把握重大的利益、重大的法义、重大的语词、重大的辩才。正如法乐比丘尼所解说的那样,我也会同样那样解说。到此为止,这部经就成了“佛所说”,而不再是声闻所说。就像大臣们拟写的文书,在没有盖上国王印章之前,还不能算作国王的文书;一旦盖上印章,就成了国王的文书。同样地,因为“我也会同样那样解说”这句佛语的印章已经盖上,这部经就由世尊亲口认可而成了佛所说。其余各处都很容易理解。巴利
467.Paṇḍitāti paṇḍiccena samannāgatā, dhātukusalā āyatanakusalā paṭiccasamuppādakusalā ṭhānāṭṭhānakusalāti attho. Mahāpaññāti mahante atthe mahante dhamme mahantā niruttiyo mahantāni paṭibhānāni pariggaṇhanasamatthāya paññāya samannāgatā. Yathā taṃ dhammadinnāyāti yathā dhammadinnāya bhikkhuniyā byākataṃ, ahampi taṃ evamevaṃ byākareyyanti. Ettāvatā ca pana ayaṃ suttanto jinabhāsito nāma jāto, na sāvakabhāsito. Yathā hi rājayuttehi likhitaṃ paṇṇaṃ yāva rājamuddikāya na lañchitaṃ hoti, na tāva rājapaṇṇanti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati; lañchitamattaṃ pana rājapaṇṇaṃ nāma hoti, tathā, ‘‘ahampi taṃ evameva byākareyya’’nti imāya jinavacanamuddikāya lañchitattā ayaṃ suttanto āhaccavacanena jinabhāsito nāma jāto. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
《小法受持经》的注释巴利
5. Cūḷadhammasamādānasuttavaṇṇanā
468 “如是我闻”这句,说的就是《小法受持经》。其中,“法受持”指的是所执取的法。“现世乐”是指当下的快乐,也就是在造作积聚的那个当下,是快乐的、容易做到的、可以快快乐乐地完成。“未来苦果”是指将来果报成熟时带来痛苦的果报。按照这个方法,应当理解所有词句的含义。巴利
468.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷadhammasamādānasuttaṃ. Tattha dhammasamādānānīti dhammoti gahitagahaṇāni. Paccuppannasukhanti paccuppanne sukhaṃ, āyūhanakkhaṇe sukhaṃ sukaraṃ sukhena sakkā pūretuṃ. Āyatiṃ dukkhavipākanti anāgate vipākakāle dukkhavipākaṃ. Iminā upāyena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.
469 在诸欲中并无过患,意思是在事欲和烦恼欲中都没有过患。所谓“陷入可饮性”,是说他们以烦恼欲对事欲陷入可饮、可享用的状态,也就是随自己的喜好去受用。结髻者,是把头发盘成髻扎起来的人。女出家者,是修苦行的女出家者。她们这样说,就是她们这样讲。宣说遍知,就是宣说舍断和超越。摩卢瓦荚,是一种长条形的摩卢瓦果实。它会裂开,是因为被太阳晒干后绽裂。在沙罗树根,就是在沙罗树旁边。天神为什么心生恐惧呢?因为害怕住处被毁。原来,从落在树根的摩卢瓦种子长出藤蔓,攀上那棵树。这藤蔓叶片又大又多,形状像黑檀树叶。然后它从树根开始缠住那棵树,覆盖所有枝丫,造成巨大的重压。风吹或雨打时,它就形成一股洪流般的力量,把那棵树所有的大小枝条都折断,让树倒在地上。于是,依附在那棵树上的天宫就破裂、坏灭。因此,天神因为害怕住处被毁而心生恐惧。巴利
469.Natthi kāmesu dosoti vatthukāmesupi kilesakāmesupi doso natthi. Pātabyataṃ āpajjantīti te vatthukāmesu kilesakāmena pātabyataṃ pivitabbataṃ, yathāruci paribhuñjitabbataṃ āpajjantīti attho. Moḷibaddhāhīti moḷiṃ katvā baddhakesāhi. Paribbājikāhīti tāpasaparibbājikāhi. Evamāhaṃsūti evaṃ vadanti. Pariññaṃ paññapentīti pahānaṃ samatikkamaṃ paññapenti. Māluvāsipāṭikāti dīghasaṇṭhānaṃ māluvāpakkaṃ. Phaleyyāti ātapena sussitvā bhijjeyya. Sālamūleti sālarukkhassa samīpe. Santāsaṃ āpajjeyyāti kasmā āpajjati? Bhavanavināsabhayā. Rukkhamūle patitamāluvābījato hi latā uppajjitvā rukkhaṃ abhiruhati. Sā mahāpattā ceva hoti bahupattā ca, koviḷārapattasadisehi pattehi samannāgatā. Atha taṃ rukkhaṃ mūlato paṭṭhāya vinandhamānā sabbaviṭapāni sañchādetvā mahantaṃ bhāraṃ janetvā tiṭṭhati. Sā vāte vā vāyante deve vā vassante oghanaṃ janetvā tassa rukkhassa sabbasākhāpasākhaṃ bhañjati, bhūmiyaṃ nipāteti. Tato tasmiṃ rukkhe patiṭṭhitavimānaṃ bhijjati nassati. Iti sā bhavanavināsabhayā santāsaṃ āpajjati.
园天,是指住在各处花园和果园里的天神。林天,是指住在盲林、善林等森林里的天神。树天,是指住在那些特征明显的那勒鲁树、穆钦陀树等树上的天神。住在药草、草类和林主树中的天神,是指住在诃梨勒、余甘子等药草上的,住在棕榈、椰子等草类上的,以及住在林中最大的树上的天神。林中工作者,是指在森林里以耕作、割草、采薪、牧牛等某种工作为生而四处走动的人。应该拔出,意思是咀嚼它们。悬垂者,是指藤蔓在被风吹打的地方,像在嬉戏一样悬垂摇摆。此是乐的意思是:和这种摩卢瓦藤蔓接触是快乐的,看见它也是快乐的。这位天神因为看见、触到藤蔓而生起喜悦,就这样说:这将成为我孩子们的饮水之处,将成为他们的游戏之场,我又得到了第二个天宫啊!巴利
Ārāmadevatāti tattha tattha pupphārāmaphalārāmesu adhivatthā devatā. Vanadevatāti andhavanasubhagavanādīsu vanesu adhivatthā devatā. Rukkhadevatāti abhilakkhitesu naḷerupucimandādīsu rukkhesu adhivatthā devatā. Osadhitiṇavanappatīsūti harītakīāmalakīādīsu osadhīsu tālanāḷikerādīsu tiṇesu vanajeṭṭhakesu ca vanappatirukkhesu adhivatthā devatā. Vanakammikāti vane kasanalāyanadāruāharaṇagorakkhādīsu kenacideva kammena vā vicarakamanussā. Uddhareyyunti khādeyyuṃ. Vilambinīti vātena pahatapahataṭṭhānesu keḷiṃ karontī viya vilambantī. Sukho imissāti evarūpāya māluvālatāya samphassopi sukho, dassanampi sukhaṃ. Ayaṃ me dārakānaṃ āpānamaṇḍalaṃ bhavissati, kīḷābhūmi bhavissati, dutiyaṃ me vimānaṃ paṭiladdhanti latāya dassanepi samphassepi somanassajātā evamāha.
它应该做成一个伞盖——意思是它应该像伞盖那样停在枝条上方。它应该形成一团密集——意思是在下面形成厚厚的一团。它向上爬,把整棵树缠绕起来,然后又向下垂落,碰到地面,这就是这段话的意思。它应该裂开——意思是它这样形成一团密集之后,又从那里开始,沿着那些垂到根部的枝条往上爬,缠住所有枝条,到达树顶后,又以同样的方式下来再上去,把整棵树缠得紧紧的、盖得严严实实,把所有枝条都压到下面,自己却停在最上面。这样,当风吹起或天下雨时,它就会裂开,也就是断掉的意思。结果只剩下一截树桩。本来依附在树枝上的天宫,在树枝断裂时,就在各处就地碎裂;等所有树枝都断了,整个天宫也就毁了。但如果是依附在树上的天宫,只要树根还在,它就不会毁坏。而这座天宫是依附在树枝上的,所以当所有树枝都碎裂时,它也就毁了。那位天神抱着孩子,站在树桩上,开始悲泣。巴利
Viṭabhiṃ kareyyāti sākhānaṃ upari chattākārena tiṭṭheyya. Oghanaṃ janeyyāti heṭṭhā ghanaṃ janeyya. Upari āruyha sakalaṃ rukkhaṃ paliveṭhetvā puna heṭṭhā bhassamānā bhūmiṃ gaṇheyyāti attho. Padāleyyāti evaṃ oghanaṃ katvā puna tato paṭṭhāya yāva mūlā otiṇṇasākhāhi abhiruhamānā sabbasākhā paliveṭhentī matthakaṃ patvā teneva niyāmena puna orohitvā ca abhiruhitvā ca sakalarukkhaṃ saṃsibbitvā ajjhottharantī sabbasākhā heṭṭhā katvā sayaṃ upari ṭhatvā vāte vā vāyante deve vā vassante padāleyya. Bhindeyyāti attho. Khāṇumattameva tiṭṭheyya, tattha yaṃ sākhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ hoti, taṃ sākhāsu bhijjamānāsu tattha tattheva bhijjitvā sabbasākhāsu bhinnāsu sabbaṃ bhijjati. Rukkhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ pana yāva rukkhassa mūlamattampi tiṭṭhati, tāva na nassati. Idaṃ pana vimānaṃ sākhaṭṭhakaṃ, tasmā sabbasākhāsu saṃbhijjamānāsu bhijjittha. Devatā puttake gahetvā khāṇuke ṭhitā paridevituṃ āraddhā.
471 “强贪型的人”,是指贪欲特别厚重的人。他因为贪欲而感受痛苦和忧恼:由于贪欲强烈,对每一个看到的所缘都执取它的相。于是他的亲教师和戒师便下令对他进行处罚。他反复受到处罚,因此感受痛苦和忧恼,但即便如此也绝不违犯戒律。“强嗔型的人”,则因为一点点小事就发怒,甚至和年幼的沙弥互相拉扯推搡着说话。他也因为受到处罚而感受痛苦和忧恼。“痴型的人”,对已经做了的事或还没做的事都不去分辨,种种该做的事都被耽误了。他也因为受到处罚而感受痛苦和忧恼。巴利
471.Tibbarāgajātikoti bahalarāgasabhāvo. Rāgajaṃ dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedetīti tibbarāgajātikattā diṭṭhe diṭṭhe ārammaṇe nimittaṃ gaṇhāti. Athassa ācariyupajjhāyā daṇḍakammaṃ āṇāpenti. So abhikkhaṇaṃ daṇḍakammaṃ karonto dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, natveva vītikkamaṃ karoti. Tibbadosajātikoti appamattikeneva kuppati, daharasāmaṇerehi saddhiṃ hatthaparāmāsādīni karontova katheti. Sopi daṇḍakammapaccayā dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Mohajātiko pana idha kataṃ vā katato akataṃ vā akatato na sallakkheti, tāni tāni kiccāni virādheti. Sopi daṇḍakammapaccayā dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti.
472 “不是强贪类型”等说法,应当按前面所说的相反方式来理解。为什么在这里有的人是强贪等类型,有的人不是强贪等类型呢?这是由业的规律决定的。因为一个人在造业的当下,如果贪的力量强,无贪的力量弱,而无嗔、无痴的力量强,嗔、痴的力量弱,那么弱小的无贪就没办法压伏贪,而强大的无嗔、无痴却能压伏嗔和痴。因此,他由于那种业所决定的结生而投生后,就成了贪欲重的人,性情乐于安乐,不嗔怒,有智慧,拥有像金刚一样的智慧。巴利
472.Na tibbarāgajātikotiādīni vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbāni. Kasmā panettha koci tibbarāgādijātiko hoti, koci na tibbarāgādijātiko? Kammaniyāmena. Yassa hi kammāyūhanakkhaṇe lobho balavā hoti, alobho mando, adosāmohā balavanto, dosamohā mandā, tassa mando alobho lobhaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti, adosāmohā pana balavanto dosamohe pariyādātuṃ sakkonti. Tasmā so tena kammena dinnapaṭisandhivasena nibbatto luddho hoti, sukhasīlo akkodhano paññavā vajirūpamañāṇo.
如果在造业的那一刹那,贪和嗔的力量强,无贪和无嗔的力量弱,而无痴的力量强,痴的力量弱,那么按照前面同样的道理,这个人既是有贪的,也是有嗔的,但同时是有慧的,拥有像金刚一样锐利的智慧,就像达陀跋耶长老那样。巴利
Yassa pana kammāyūhanakkhaṇe lobhadosā balavanto honti, alobhādosā mandā, amoho balavā, moho mando, so purimanayeneva luddho ceva hoti duṭṭho ca, paññavā pana hoti vajirūpamañāṇo dattābhayatthero viya.
如果在造业的那一刻,贪、无嗔、痴的力量强,而另外那些(无贪、有嗔、无痴)的力量弱,那么按照前面同样的方式,这个人就是既贪又迟钝,但他生性喜欢快乐,而且不容易发怒。巴利
Yassa pana kammāyūhanakkhaṇe lobhādosamohā balavanto honti, itare mandā, so purimanayeneva luddho ceva hoti dandho ca, sukhasīlako pana hoti akkodhano.
同样,如果一个人在造业的那一刻,贪、嗔、痴三者都很强,而无贪等善法很弱,那么按照前面同样的方式,这个人就是既贪、又嗔、又痴。巴利
Tathā yassa kammāyūhanakkhaṇe tayopi lobhadosamohā balavanto honti, alobhādayo mandā, so purimanayeneva luddho ceva hoti duṭṭho ca mūḷho ca.
如果在造业的那一刻,无贪、无嗔、无痴力量强,而贪、嗔、痴较弱,那么按照前面同样的方式,这个人烦恼就少,即使看到天界的所缘境,心也不会动摇,不过他还是容易发怒,而且智慧迟钝。巴利
Yassa pana kammāyūhanakkhaṇe alobhadosamohā balavanto honti, itare mandā, so purimanayeneva appakileso hoti, dibbārammaṇampi disvā niccalo, duṭṭho pana hoti dandhapañño ca.
如果在造业的那一刻,无贪、无嗔、痴力量强,其余的心所弱,那么按照前面同样的道理,这个人就是不贪的,而且天性安乐,但他是愚痴的。巴利
Yassa pana kammāyūhanakkhaṇe alobhādosamohā balavanto honti, itare mandā, so purimanayeneva aluddho ceva hoti sukhasīlako ca, mūḷho pana hoti.
同样,如果一个人在造业的那一刹那,无贪、无嗔、无痴力量强,其余的心所微弱,那么按照前面同样的道理,他就是不贪而且有智慧,但却是心怀嗔恨、容易发怒的人。巴利
Tathā yassa kammāyūhanakkhaṇe alobhadosāmohā balavanto honti, itare mandā, so purimanayeneva aluddho ceva hoti paññavā ca, duṭṭho pana hoti kodhano.
如果一个人在造业的那一刹那,无贪、无嗔、无痴这三种也都很强,而贪等烦恼则很弱,那么他就会像摩诃僧伽护长老一样,不贪、不嗔,并且有慧。巴利
Yassa pana kammāyūhanakkhaṇe tayopi alobhādayo balavanto honti, lobhādayo mandā, so mahāsaṅgharakkhitatthero viya aluddho aduṭṭho paññavā ca hoti.
其余各处也都同样是意思浅显易懂。巴利
Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
《大法受持经》的注释巴利
6. Mahādhammasamādānasuttavaṇṇanā
473 Evaṃme suttanti这句,说的就是《大法受持经》。其中,“有如是欲”是指有这样的意愿;“有如是希求”是指有这样的志向;“有如是意图”是指有这样的见解。“在那里”是指在对不可爱之事增长、对可爱之事减损的地方。“以世尊为根本”:世尊是这些法的根本,所以叫“以世尊为根本”。这里要表达的是:尊者,我们这些法,过去是由迦叶正自觉佛为我们生起的。他般涅槃之后,隔了一尊佛的时间,其他任何沙门或婆罗门都没有能力让这些法生起,而这些法是由世尊为我们生起的。我们正是依靠世尊,才了知、通达这些法,所以说“尊者,我们的这些法以世尊为根本”。“以世尊为导引”:世尊是诸法的引导者、调御者、随顺引导者。那些按各自真实相状被一一安立名称、开显出来的法,就叫“以世尊为导引”。“以世尊为皈依”:四地的诸法,在进入一切知智的境界时,就叫“以世尊为皈依”。“皈依”就是趣向、会合。再者,世尊坐在大菩提树下,依证悟之力,触生起:“世尊,我叫什么?”——“你以触达之义,名为触。”受、想、行、识生起:“世尊,我叫什么?”——“你以了知之义,名为识。”这样,世尊按各自真实相状,为四地诸法一一取名,所以也叫“以世尊为皈依”。“唯愿世尊为我们显明”:愿这所说的义理唯在世尊面前显现,意思就是“请你们为我们解说”。巴利
473.Evaṃme suttanti mahādhammasamādānasuttaṃ. Tattha evaṃkāmāti evaṃicchā. Evaṃchandāti evaṃajjhāsayā. Evaṃadhippāyāti evaṃladdhikā. Tatrāti tasmiṃ aniṭṭhavaḍḍhane ceva iṭṭhaparihāne ca. Bhagavaṃmūlakāti bhagavā mūlaṃ etesanti bhagavaṃmūlakā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ime, bhante, amhākaṃ dhammā pubbe kassapasammāsambuddhena uppāditā, tasmiṃ parinibbute ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ime dhamme uppādetuṃ samattho nāma nāhosi, bhagavatā pana no ime dhammā uppāditā. Bhagavantañhi nissāya mayaṃ ime dhamme ājānāma paṭivijjhāmāti evaṃ bhagavaṃmūlakā no, bhante, dhammāti. Bhagavaṃnettikāti bhagavā hi dhammānaṃ netā vinetā anunetāti. Yathāsabhāvato pāṭiyekkaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā dassitā dhammā bhagavaṃnettikā nāma honti. Bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇāti catubhūmakā dhammā sabbaññutaññāṇassa āpāthaṃ āgacchamānā bhagavati paṭisaranti nāmāti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Paṭisarantīti osaranti samosaranti. Apica mahābodhimaṇḍe nisinnassa bhagavato paṭivedhavasena phasso āgacchati, ahaṃ bhagavā kinnāmoti? Tvaṃ phusanaṭṭhena phasso nāma. Vedanā, saññā, saṅkhārā, viññāṇaṃ āgacchati. Ahaṃ bhagavā kinnāmanti? Tvaṃ vijānanaṭṭhena viññāṇaṃ nāmāti evaṃ catubhūmakadhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvato pāṭiyekkaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ nāmaṃ gaṇhanto bhagavā dhamme paṭisaratītipi bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Bhagavantaññeva paṭibhātūti bhagavatoyeva etassa bhāsitassa attho upaṭṭhātu, tumheyeva no kathetvā dethāti attho.
474 应当亲近,就是应当依靠。应当结交,就是应当去接近。如同面对无智之人那样,就是如同面对没有智慧的愚人、盲目的凡夫那样。如同面对有智之人那样,就是如同面对有智慧的聪明人、贤者那样。巴利
474.Sevitabbeti nissayitabbe. Bhajitabbeti upagantabbe. Yathā taṃ aviddasunoti yathā aviduno bālassa andhaputhujjanassa. Yathā taṃ viddasunoti yathā viduno medhāvino paṇḍitassa.
475 比丘们,有法之受持。在前一部经里,纲目是以逆次第的方式安立的;但在这里,导师是顺着法的滋味本身来安立纲目的。其中,法之受持,就是指对杀生等法的执取。巴利
475.Atthi, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānanti purimasutte uppaṭipāṭiākārena mātikā ṭhapitā , idha pana yathādhammaraseneva satthā mātikaṃ ṭhapesi. Tattha dhammasamādānanti pāṇātipātādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
476 无明所摄者,就是具备无明的人。巴利
476.Avijjāgatoti avijjāya samannāgato.
477 有明的人,就是具足明、有慧的人。巴利
477.Vijjāgatoti vijjāya samannāgato paññavā.
478 在“与苦俱”这一句里,邪行、贪欲、邪见这三者,是依前思与后思这两种思的力量,而生起苦受。但决定思则或者与乐相应,或者与舍相应。其余杀生等七种,是依三种思的力量,而生起苦受。就是针对这一点而说:“亦与苦俱,亦与忧俱。”在这里,应当把忧本身理解为苦。或者,当一个人进入寻求之时,在寻求的前后阶段,身苦也同样适用。巴利
478.Sahāpi dukkhenāti ettha micchācāro abhijjhā micchādiṭṭhīti ime tāva tayo pubbacetanāya ca aparacetanāya cāti dvinnaṃ cetanānaṃ vasena dukkhavedanā honti. Sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā pana sukhasampayuttā vā upekkhāsampayuttā vā hoti. Sesā pāṇātipātādayo satta tissannampi cetanānaṃ vasena dukkhavedanā honti. Idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassenā’’ti. Domanassameva cettha dukkhanti veditabbaṃ. Pariyeṭṭhiṃ vā āpajjantassa pubbabhāgaparabhāgesu kāyikaṃ dukkhampi vaṭṭatiyeva.
479 在“与乐俱”这一句里,杀生、粗恶语、嗔恨这三样,是依前思和後思这两种思的作用,而生起乐受。但决定思则一定与苦相应。其余七法,依三种思的作用,都一定生起乐受。在“与喜悦俱”这一句里,这里的喜悦就应当理解为乐。或者,对具足可爱触境的人,在前行和完成阶段,身乐也同样适用。巴利
479.Sahāpisukhenāti ettha pāṇātipāto pharusavācā byāpādoti ime tāva tayo pubbacetanāya ca aparacetanāya cāti dvinnaṃ cetanānaṃ vasena sukhavedanā honti. Sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā pana dukkhasampayuttāva hoti. Sesā satta tissannampi cetanānaṃ vasena sukhavedanā hontiyeva. Sahāpi somanassenāti somanassameva cettha sukhanti veditabbaṃ. Iṭṭhaphoṭṭhabbasamaṅgino vā pubbabhāgaparabhāgesu kāyikaṃ sukhampi vaṭṭatiyeva.
480 第三种法的受持:在这里,有些人当渔夫或猎鹿人,完全靠杀生来谋生。有位受人尊敬的比丘,虽然对方并不情愿,还是给他讲杀生的过患和远离杀生的功德,然后给他授学处。他受持的时候,也是带着痛苦和忧愁受持的。后来过了几天,当他守不住的时候,也还是痛苦。他的前思和后思都与苦相伴,而决定思则或者与乐相伴,或者与舍相伴。一切地方都应该这样理解。所以,这段话正是针对前行和完成阶段的思而说的:“也与苦相伴,也与忧愁相伴。”在这里,忧愁就是苦。巴利
480. Tatiyadhammasamādāne idhekacco macchabandho vā hoti, māgaviko vā, pāṇupaghātaṃyeva nissāya jīvikaṃ kappeti. Tassa garuṭṭhāniyo bhikkhu akāmakasseva pāṇātipāte ādīnavaṃ, pāṇātipātaviratiyā ca ānisaṃsaṃ kathetvā sikkhāpadaṃ deti. So gaṇhantopi dukkhito domanassitova hutvā gaṇhāti. Aparabhāge katipāhaṃ vītināmetvā rakkhituṃ asakkontopi dukkhitova hoti, tassa pubbāparacetanā dukkhasahagatāva honti. Sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā pana sukhasahagatā vā upekkhāsahagatā vāti evaṃ sabbattha attho veditabbo . Iti pubbabhāgaparabhāgacetanāva sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassenā’’ti. Domanassameva cettha dukkhanti veditabbaṃ.
481 在第四种法的受持中,在十个方面,三种前行、后行与决定阶段的思心所都必定与快乐相应。正是针对这一点才这样说:“既与快乐一起,也与喜悦一起。”在这里,应当知道喜悦本身就是快乐。巴利
481. Catutthadhammasamādāne dasasupi padesu tissopi pubbabhāgāparabhāgasanniṭṭhāpakacetanā sukhasampayuttā hontiyeva, taṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassenā’’ti. Somanassameva cettha sukhanti veditabbaṃ.
482 “苦味的葫芦”就是味道发苦的葫芦。“与毒混合”就是与哈拉哈拉毒混在一起、掺杂、搅和在一起。“不会让人喜欢”就是不会讨人喜欢,不会让人满意。“你会遭遇”就是你会碰上。“不加思择就喝”就是不对它作观察思考就喝下去。巴利
482.Tittakālābūti tittakarasaalābu. Visena saṃsaṭṭhoti halāhalavisena sampayutto missito luḷito. Nacchādessatīti na ruccissati na tuṭṭhiṃ karissati. Nigacchasīti gamissasi. Appaṭisaṅkhāya piveyyāti taṃ appaccavekkhitvā piveyya.
483 “饮料杯”是指装满了甘甜饮料的杯子。“颜色具足”是说因为饮料的颜色等而色泽美好;由于杯里盛着饮料,这个饮料杯也就被这样称呼了。“将令人欢喜”是说它会赋予味道:因为那哈拉哈拉毒无论被放进哪里,都会让那东西带上它自己的味道。因此说“将令人欢喜”。巴利
483.Āpānīyakaṃsoti āpānīyassa madhurapānakassa bharitakaṃso. Vaṇṇasampannoti pānakavaṇṇādīhi sampannavaṇṇo, kaṃse pakkhittapānakavasena pānakakaṃsopi evaṃ vutto. Chādessatīti tañhi halāhalavisaṃ yattha yattha pakkhittaṃ hoti, tassa tasseva rasaṃ deti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘chādessatī’’ti.
484 “腐尿”就是指尿本身。就像人的身体虽然肤色像金子一样,仍然被称为“腐身”;当天新长出来的藤蔓,也被叫作“腐藤”。同样,刚排出来的尿虽然新鲜,也还是“腐尿”。“以种种药”是指用诃子、余甘子等各种药物。“他会快乐”是指他会没有病,身体呈现金色,过得安乐。巴利
484.Pūtimuttanti muttameva. Yathā hi manussabhāvo suvaṇṇavaṇṇo pūtikāyotveva, tadahujātāpi galocilatā pūtilatātveva vuccati. Evaṃ taṅkhaṇaṃ gahitaṃ taruṇampi muttaṃ pūtimuttameva. Nānābhesajjehīti harītakāmalakādīhi nānosadhehi. Sukhī assāti arogo suvaṇṇavaṇṇo sukhī bhaveyya.
485 酪和蜜,就是非常纯净的酪和非常甜美的蜜。混合在一起,就是合到一处、掺和、搅匀。他喝那个四甜药时会喜欢它。而那种混着肛漏的血液会流出,这药对它不起作用,反而会让食物凝结、阻塞通道。至于那种混着胆汁的血液,这药正好是它的清凉剂。巴利
485.Dadhi ca madhu cāti suparisuddhaṃ dadhi ca sumadhuraṃ madhu ca. Ekajjhaṃ saṃsaṭṭhanti ekato katvā missitaṃ āluḷitaṃ. Tassa tanti tassa taṃ catumadhurabhesajjaṃ pivato rucceyya. Idañca yaṃ bhagandarasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ lohitaṃ pakkhandati, na tassa bhesajjaṃ, āhāraṃ thambhetvā maggaṃ avalañjaṃ karoti. Yaṃ pana pittasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ lohitaṃ, tassetaṃ bhesajjaṃ sītalakiriyāya pariyattabhūtaṃ.
486 极为明亮,就是非常明亮。意思是说,因为乌云散去而远离了。乌云已消散,是说乌云离去,天已放晴。处于虚空中的黑暗,就是位于虚空的黑暗。“已击破”,就是在众多所谓沙门婆罗门的其他外道之说中,已经胜伏、击败。照耀、灼热、放光,是说就像秋季正午时分的太阳一样,放出光明、灼热、闪耀。巴利
486.Viddheti ubbiddhe. Meghavigamena dūrībhūteti attho. Vigatavalāhaketi apagatameghe, deveti ākāse. Ākāsagataṃ tamagatanti ākāsagataṃ tamaṃ. Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇaparappavādeti puthūnaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇasaṅkhātānaṃ paresaṃ vāde. Abhivihaccāti abhihantvā. Bhāsate ca tapate ca virocate cāti saradakāle majjhanhikasamaye ādiccova obhāsaṃ muñcati tapati vijjotatīti.
这部经对天神们来说极其可爱、极其可意。这里有一件事:据说在南方象养国,有一座叫桑喀拉瓦寺的寺院。在斋堂门口,住在桑喀拉瓦树上的天神,夜里听到一位年轻比丘用吟诵调诵出这部经,就发出了赞叹声。年轻比丘问:“这是什么?”天神说:“尊者,我是住在这棵树上的天神。”
“天神,你是对声音欢喜,还是对经文欢喜?”
“尊者,声音谁都有,我是对经文欢喜。世尊坐在祇园里宣说的那天,和今天相比,连一个音节都没有差别。”
“天神,世尊宣说的那天,你听到了吗?”
“是的,尊者。”
“你当时站在哪里听到的?”
“尊者,我去了祇园,但那些有大威德的天神们来时,我在那里找不到位置,就站在这里听到了。”
“站在这里能听清楚声音吗?”
“那么,尊者,您能听到我的声音吗?”
“能听到,天神。”
“尊者,感觉就像坐在右耳旁说话一样。”
“天神,那你见到世尊的容貌了吗?”
“尊者,我心里想‘世尊正在看着我呢’,就站不住了。”
“天神,你没能生起殊胜。”天神就在那里消失了。据说就在那一天,这位天子证得了入流果。这部经就是这样为天神们所喜爱、所可意。其余部分在各处都是浅显易懂的。巴利
Idaṃ pana suttaṃ devatānaṃ ativiya piyaṃ manāpaṃ. Tatridaṃ vatthu – dakkhiṇadisāyaṃ kira hatthibhogajanapade saṅgaravihāro nāma atthi. Tassa bhojanasāladvāre saṅgararukkhe adhivatthā devatā rattibhāge ekassa daharassa sarabhaññavasena idaṃ suttaṃ osārentassa sutvā sādhukāraṃ adāsi. Daharo kiṃ esoti āha. Ahaṃ, bhante, imasmiṃ rukkhe adhivatthā devatāti. Kasmiṃ devate pasannāsi, kiṃ sadde, udāhu sutteti? Saddo nāma, bhante, yassa kassaci hotiyeva, sutte pasannāmhi. Satthārā jetavane nisīditvā kathitadivase ca ajja ca ekabyañjanepi nānaṃ natthīti. Assosi tvaṃ devate satthārā kathitadivaseti? Āma, bhante. Kattha ṭhitā assosīti? Jetavanaṃ, bhante, gatāmhi, mahesakkhāsu pana devatāsu āgacchantīsu tattha okāsaṃ alabhitvā idheva ṭhatvā assosinti. Ettha ṭhitāya sakkā sutthu saddo sotunti? Tvaṃ pana, bhante, mayhaṃ saddaṃ suṇasīti? Āma devateti. Dakkhiṇakaṇṇapasse nisīditvā kathanakālo viya, bhante, hotīti. Kiṃ pana devate satthu rūpaṃ passasīti? Satthā mameva oloketīti maññamānā saṇṭhātuṃ na sakkomi, bhanteti. Visesaṃ pana nibbattetuṃ asakkhittha devateti. Devatā tattheva antaradhāyi. Taṃ divasaṃ kiresa devaputto sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhito. Evamidaṃ suttaṃ devatānaṃ piyaṃ manāpaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
第7篇 审察者经的注释巴利
7. Vīmaṃsakasuttavaṇṇanā
487 “如是我闻”这一句,指的是《审察者经》。在这部经里,“审察者”有三种:义理审察者、行审察者、导师审察者。其中,义理审察者出现在这句经文里:“贤友们,智者们是审察者。”行审察者出现在这里:“阿难,当一位比丘确实精通界、精通处、精通缘起、精通处与非处,阿难,到这种程度,就完全可以把那位明智的比丘称为‘审察者’。”而在这部经里,指的是导师审察者。“心差别”就是指心的种类、心的判定。“审察”就是指寻求、全面寻求、考察。“如是了知”意思是:为了这样去认知。巴利
487.Evaṃme sutanti vīmaṃsakasuttaṃ. Tattha vīmaṃsakenāti tayo vīmaṃsakā – atthavīmaṃsako saṅkhāravīmaṃsako satthuvīmaṃsakoti. Tesu, ‘‘paṇḍitā hāvuso, manussā vīmaṃsakā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.2) ettha atthavīmaṃsako āgato. ‘‘Yato kho, ānanda, bhikkhu dhātukusalo ca hoti, āyatanakusalo ca hoti, paṭiccasamuppādakusalo ca hoti, ṭhānāṭṭhānakusalo ca hoti, ettāvatā kho, ānanda, paṇḍito bhikkhu vīmaṃsakoti alaṃ vacanāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.124) ettha saṅkhāravīmaṃsako āgato. Imasmiṃ pana sutte satthuvīmaṃsako adhippeto. Cetopariyāyanti cittavāraṃ cittaparicchedaṃ. Samannesanāti esanā pariyesanā upaparikkhā. Iti viññāṇāyāti evaṃ vijānanatthāya.
488 在“对两种法应当审察如来”这句话里,这里是在显示善知识这个助缘。因为善知识这个助缘确实很大。它的巨大,应当这样来理解:有一次,具寿阿难心里想:“梵行一半是靠自己的能力,一半是靠善知识的能力。”他没法靠自己的理解下结论,就去见世尊,问:“尊者,梵行的一半,是不是就是善友、善同伴、与善人交往?”世尊说:“阿难,不要这样说,阿难,千万别这样说。阿难,整个梵行就是善友、善同伴、与善人交往。阿难,一位有善友、有善同伴、与善人交往的比丘,可以预期他将修习圣八支道,将多修习圣八支道。阿难,一位有善友……的比丘,是怎样修习圣八支道、多修习圣八支道的呢?阿难,这里一位比丘修习依远离的正见……修习依远离的正定。阿难,比丘正是这样……多修习。阿难,你也应当通过这个道理来理解:整个梵行就是善友、善同伴、与善人交往。阿难,正是因为依靠我这个善友,有生法的众生才从生中解脱;有老法的……有愁、悲、苦、忧、恼法的众生,才从愁、悲、苦、忧、恼中解脱。”巴利
488.Dvīsu dhammesu tathāgato samannesitabboti idha kalyāṇamittūpanissayaṃ dasseti. Mahā hi esa kalyāṇamittūpanissayo nāma. Tassa mahantabhāvo evaṃ veditabbo – ekasmiṃ hi samaye āyasmā ānando upaḍḍhaṃ attano ānubhāvena hoti, upaḍḍhaṃ kalyāṇamittānubhāvenāti cintetvā attano dhammatāya nicchetuṃ asakkonto bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchi, – ‘‘upaḍḍhamidaṃ, bhante, brahmacariyassa, yadidaṃ kalyāṇamittatā kalyāṇasahāyatā kalyāṇasampavaṅkatā’’ti. Bhagavā āha – ‘‘mā hevaṃ, ānanda, mā hevaṃ, ānanda, sakalamevidaṃ, ānanda, brahmacariyaṃ yadidaṃ kalyāṇamittatā kalyāṇasahāyatā, kalyāṇasampavaṅkatā. Kalyāṇamittassetaṃ, ānanda, bhikkhuno pāṭikaṅkhaṃ kalyāṇasahāyassa kalyāṇasampavaṅkassa, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvessati, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bahulīkarissati. Kathañcānanda, bhikkhu kalyāṇamitto…pe… ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāveti, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bahulīkaroti. Idhānanda, bhikkhu sammādiṭṭhiṃ bhāveti…pe… sammāsamādhiṃ bhāveti vivekanissitaṃ evaṃ kho, ānanda, bhikkhu kalyāṇamitto…pe… bahulīkaroti, tadamināpetaṃ, ānanda, pariyāyena veditabbaṃ. Yathā sakalamevidaṃ brahmacariyaṃ yadidaṃ kalyāṇamittatā kalyāṇasahāyatā kalyāṇasampavaṅkatā. Mamañhi, ānanda, kalyāṇamittaṃ āgamma jātidhammā sattā jātiyā parimuccanti. Jarādhammā…pe… sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsadhammā sattā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsehi parimuccantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.2).
世尊在讲比丘们的外在条件圆满时,也这样说:“比丘们,作为外在条件,我看不到还有别的哪一种单一条件,能像善友这样带来这么大的利益。比丘们,善友能带来巨大的利益。”(《增支部》1.113)
世尊在讲玛哈春达削减烦恼的修行方法时,也说:“别人会成为恶友,我们在这里要成为善友——应当这样作削减。”(《中部》1.83)
世尊在向美吉亚长老讲使心解脱成熟的法时,也特别强调了善友这一依靠,说:“美吉亚,对于还没有成熟的心解脱,有五种法能让它成熟。是哪五种呢?美吉亚,这里有一位比丘是善友……”(《无问自说》31)
世尊在反复教导爱子罗睺罗长老时,也说:巴利
Bhikkhūnaṃ bāhiraṅgasampattiṃ kathentopi āha – ‘‘bāhiraṃ, bhikkhave, aṅganti karitvā nāññaṃ ekaṅgampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ mahato atthāya saṃvattati, yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, kalyāṇamittatā. Kalyāṇamittatā, bhikkhave, mahato atthāya saṃvattatī’’ti (a. ni. 1.113). Mahācundassa kilesasallekhapaṭipadaṃ kathentopi, ‘‘pare pāpamittā bhavissanti, mayamettha kalyāṇamittā bhavissāmāti sallekho karaṇīyo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.83) āha. Meghiyattherassa vimuttiparipācaniyadhamme kathentopi, ‘‘aparipakkāya, meghiya, cetovimuttiyā pañca dhammā paripākāya saṃvattanti. Katame pañca? Idha, meghiya, bhikkhu kalyāṇamitto hoti’’ti (udā. 31) kalyāṇamittūpanissayameva visesesi. Piyaputtassa rāhulattherassa abhiṇhovādaṃ dentopi –
“ 要亲近善友,安住在僻静的坐卧处;
住在远离喧嚣的地方,饮食要知道节制。
在衣服、食物,以及医药资具和坐卧处这些生活用品上,
对这些资具不要生起渴爱,不要再回到世间来。”巴利
‘‘Mitte bhajassu kalyāṇe, pantañca sayanāsanaṃ; Vivittaṃ appanigghosaṃ, mattaññū hohi bhojane. Cīvare piṇḍapāte ca, paccaye sayanāsane; Etesu taṇhaṃ mākāsi, mā lokaṃ punarāgamī’’ti. (su. ni. 340, 341) –
他最先讲的就是亲近善知识这个依止。亲近善知识这件事,意义就是这样大。在这里,世尊为了显示这一点,开始了这样的教导:应当在两种法上审察如来。意思是:有智慧的比丘应当在两种法上寻找、探寻如来。世尊由此发出狮子吼说:如果有人这样想——“这位是大族姓出身”,或者“具足相好”,或者“容貌端正、令人欢喜”,或者“有名声、有显著标记”,或者“依靠他,我就能得到衣服等资具”——这样想了之后来依靠我而住,那是不必要的。但如果有人这样观察:“这位有能力做我的导师,能完成导师的职责”,他就应该来亲近我。据说,这部经就叫作佛陀狮子吼经。巴利
Kalyāṇamittūpanissayameva sabbapaṭhamaṃ kathesi. Evaṃ mahā esa kalyāṇamittūpanissayo nāma. Idhāpi taṃ dassento bhagavā dvīsu dhammesu tathāgato samannesitabboti desanaṃ ārabhi. Paṇḍito bhikkhu dvīsu dhammesu tathāgataṃ esatu gavesatūti attho. Etena bhagavā ayaṃ mahājaccoti vā, lakkhaṇasampannoti vā, abhirūpo dassanīyoti vā, abhiññāto abhilakkhitoti vā, imaṃ nissāyāhaṃ cīvarādayo paccaye labhissāmīti vā, evaṃ cintetvā maṃ nissāya vasanakiccaṃ natthi. Yo pana evaṃ sallakkheti, ‘‘pahoti me esa satthā hutvā satthukiccaṃ sādhetu’’nti, so maṃ bhajatūti sīhanādaṃ nadati. Buddhasīhanādo kira nāmesa suttantoti.
现在,为了说明这两种法,他说了“眼所知和耳所知”。其中,导师的身体行为,对想要考察的人来说,是眼所知的法;语言行为,是耳所知的法。接着,为了说明考察这些法的方式,他说了“哪些是杂染的”等话。其中,“杂染的”是指与烦恼相应的。而这些并不是眼和耳所能直接认知的。不过,就像水在晃动或冒出水泡时,就能知道里面有鱼一样;同样,看见一个人在杀生等,或者听见他在说妄语等,从这些身体和语言的行为来看,就能推知推动这些行为的内心是杂染的。所以才这样说。因为对于杂染的心来说,身体行为和语言行为也同样是杂染的。“它们不存在于如来那里”,意思是这些在如来身上不存在,找不到。这样了知,就是说知道它们确实不存在,所以才找不到,并不是因为被藏起来了。就像世尊有一天在比丘僧团中,就这些法进行自恣时说:“来吧,比丘们,我现在向你们自恣,你们如果对我的身体行为或语言行为有什么不满,就可以说出来。”这样说之后,具寿舍利弗从座位上起来,把上衣搭在一只肩上,朝着世尊的方向合掌,对世尊这样说:“尊者,我们对世尊的身体行为或语言行为,没有任何不满。因为尊者,世尊是未生起的道路的令生起者,未产生的道路的令产生者,未宣说的道路的宣说者,是知道道路、通达道路、精通道路的人。而如今,尊者的弟子们也都随道路而行,随后具足。”这样,如来的身体行为和语言行为是清净的。就连那位年轻的婆罗门,为了在如来的身体和语言之门上找到任何可挑剔之处,跟随了七个月,连芝麻那么大的过失都没看到。一个还是人身的人,怎么可能在佛陀的身体和语言之门上看到什么可挑剔的呢?就连魔天之子,从菩萨决意出家开始,找了六年,也没找到任何可挑剔之处,哪怕只是一丝心念的闪动都没有。据说魔这样想:“如果我能看到他哪怕只是一点点不善的念头,我就在那里打他的头然后离开。”他找了六年都没找到,在佛陀成道后还跟了一年,也没看到任何过失,于是在离开的时候礼敬了佛陀——巴利
Idāni te dve dhamme dassento cakkhusotaviññeyyesūti āha. Tattha satthu kāyiko samācāro vīmaṃsakassa cakkhuviññeyyo dhammo nāma. Vācasiko samācāro sotaviññeyyo dhammo nāma. Idāni tesu samannesitabbākāraṃ dassento ye saṃkiliṭṭhātiādimāha. Tattha saṃkiliṭṭhāti kilesasampayuttā. Te ca na cakkhusotaviññeyyā. Yathā pana udake calante vā pupphuḷake vā muñcante anto maccho atthīti viññāyati, evaṃ pāṇātipātādīni vā karontassa, musāvādādīni vā bhaṇantassa kāyavacīsamācāre disvā ca sutvā ca taṃsamuṭṭhāpakacittaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhanti viññāyati. Tasmā evamāha. Saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa hi kāyavacīsamācārāpi saṃkiliṭṭhāyeva nāma. Na te tathāgatassa saṃvijjantīti na te tathāgatassa atthi. Na upalabbhantīti evaṃ jānātīti attho. Natthitāyeva hi te na upalabbhanti na paṭicchannatāya. Tathā hi bhagavā ekadivasaṃ imesu dhammesu bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavārento āha – ‘‘handa dāni, bhikkhave, pavāremi vo, na ca me kiñci garahatha kāyikaṃ vā vācasikaṃ vā’’ti. Evaṃ vutte āyasmā sāriputto uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṃ paṇāmetvā bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘na kho mayaṃ, bhante, bhagavato kiñci garahāma kāyikaṃ vā vācasikaṃ vā. Bhagavā hi, bhante, anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā, asañjātassa maggassa sañjānetā, anakkhātassa maggassa akkhātā, maggaññū maggavidū maggakovido. Maggānugā ca, bhante, etarahi sāvakā viharanti pacchāsamannāgatā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.215). Evaṃ parisuddhā tathāgatassa kāyavacīsamācārā. Uttaropi sudaṃ māṇavo tathāgatassa kāyavacīdvāre anārādhanīyaṃ kiñci passissāmīti satta māse anubandhitvā likkhāmattampi na addasa. Manussabhūto vā esa buddhabhūtassa kāyavacīdvāre kiṃ anārādhanīyaṃ passissati? Māropi devaputto bodhisattassa sato mahābhinikkhamanato paṭṭhāya chabbassāni gavesamāno kiñci anārādhanīyaṃ nāddasa, antamaso cetoparivitakkamattampi. Māro kira cintesi – ‘‘sacassa vitakkitamattampi akusalaṃ passissāmi, tattheva naṃ muddhani paharitvā pakkamissāmī’’ti. So chabbassāni adisvā buddhabhūtampi ekaṃ vassaṃ anubandhitvā kiñci vajjaṃ apassanto gamanasamaye vanditvā –
“ 大雄啊,大福德者,以神通与名声光耀;
已超越一切怨仇与怖畏的乔达摩,我顶礼其双足。”巴利
‘‘Mahāvīra mahāpuññaṃ, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ; Sabbaverabhayātītaṃ, pāde vandāmi gotama’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.159) –
说完这首偈颂后,他就离开了。巴利
Gāthaṃ vatvā gato.
“混杂的”:是指有时黑、有时白,这样黑白混杂。“纯白的”:是指完全清净、没有烦恼。“存在”:是指这些纯白的法确实存在、可以找到。对如来来说,身行清净等纯白之法确实存在。所以他说:“比丘们,如来有这四种不需要防护的法。哪四种呢?比丘们,如来的身行清净,如来没有身恶行,不需要如来去防护‘别让旁人知道我这个’。如来的语行清净……意行清净……活命清净,比丘们,如来没有邪命,不需要如来去防护‘别让旁人知道我这个’。”(《增支部》7.58)巴利
Vītimissāti kāle kaṇhā, kāle sukkāti evaṃ vomissakā. Vodātāti parisuddhā nikkilesā. Saṃvijjantīti vodātā dhammā atthi upalabbhanti. Tathāgatassa hi parisuddhā kāyasamācārādayo. Tenāha – ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa arakkheyyāni. Katamāni cattāri? Parisuddhakāyasamācāro, bhikkhave, tathāgato, natthi tathāgatassa kāyaduccaritaṃ, yaṃ tathāgato rakkheyya, ‘mā me idaṃ paro aññāsī’ti. Parisuddhavacīsamācāro… parisuddhamanosamācāro… parisuddhājīvo, bhikkhave, tathāgato , natthi tathāgatassa micchājīvo, yaṃ tathāgato rakkheyya, mā me idaṃ paro aññāsī’’ti (a. ni. 7.58).
“这个善法”指的是这个没有过失的活命第八戒。意思是应当这样去探查:“这位尊者导师是长久以来就一直具备这个戒,从很久以前开始就具足了呢,还是只是短暂具备,昨天、前天或大前天某一天才得到的?”有些人住在某个地方时,做了很多邪命的事,时间一久就被人看出来了,变得很明显。他就跑到某个边地村落或者海边,搭一间草屋,装成住在林里的修行人一样生活。人们对他生起崇敬,供养他精美的资具。当地的比丘们看到他受到特别照顾,心想:“这位尊者也太傲慢了,他到底是谁?”于是去调查,知道“他在某个地方,叫什么名字,做了邪命的事之后就跑了”。于是他们集会,依法、公平地对他做驱逐之类的甘马,说不能和这个人一起做伍波萨他或自恣。正是为了审查这种隐藏的行为到底有没有,才这样说的。巴利
Imaṃ kusalaṃ dhammanti imaṃ anavajjaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ. ‘‘Ayamāyasmā satthā kiṃ nu kho dīgharattaṃ samāpanno aticirakālato paṭṭhāya iminā samannāgato, udāhu ittarasamāpanno hiyyo vā pare vā parasuve vā divase samāpanno’’ti evaṃ gavesatūti attho. Ekaccena hi ekasmiṃ ṭhāne vasantena bahu micchājīvakammaṃ kataṃ, taṃ tattha kālātikkame paññāyati, pākaṭaṃ hoti. So aññataraṃ paccantagāmaṃ vā samuddatīraṃ vā gantvā paṇṇasālaṃ kāretvā āraññako viya hutvā viharati. Manussā sambhāvanaṃ uppādetvā tassa paṇīte paccaye denti. Janapadavāsino bhikkhū tassa parihāraṃ disvā, ‘‘atidappito vatāyaṃ āyasmā, ko nu kho eso’’ti pariggaṇhantā, ‘‘asukaṭṭhāne asukaṃ nāma micchājīvaṃ katvā pakkantabhikkhū’’ti ñatvā na sakkā iminā saddhiṃ uposatho vā pavāraṇā vā kātunti sannipatitvā dhammena samena ukkhepanīyādīsu aññataraṃ kammaṃ karonti. Evarūpāya paṭicchannapaṭipattiyā atthibhāvaṃ vā natthibhāvaṃ vā vīmaṃsāpetuṃ evamāha.
像这样了知,意思是:他知道自己长久以来一直具足,而不是短暂具足。这并不奇怪。如今如来已经证得一切知智,他的活命第八戒在漫长岁月中本来就是清净的,这有什么好奇怪的呢?他在还是菩萨的时候就已经是这样了。巴利
Evaṃjānātīti dīgharattaṃ samāpanno, na ittarasamāpannoti jānāti. Anacchariyaṃ cetaṃ. Yaṃ tathāgatassa etarahi sabbaññutaṃ pattassa dīgharattaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ parisuddhaṃ bhaveyya. Yassa bodhisattakālepi evaṃ ahosi.
据说在过去,犍陀罗王和韦迭希王两人是朋友。他们看到欲乐的过患,就把王位交给儿子们,出家做了仙人,在一个森林村里乞食。边地一向很难得到盐。他们得到没有盐的粥,坐在一间厅堂里喝。偶尔有人拿盐粉来布施给他们。有一天,有人用叶子包了盐粉,送给韦迭希仙人。韦迭希接过来,把一半放在犍陀罗仙人旁边,一半放在自己身边。后来,他看到自己还剩了一点,心想“别浪费了”,就用叶子包好,放在草丛里。又有一天,喝粥的时候他想起来这件事,看到那些盐粉,就走到犍陀罗仙人跟前说:“老师,请拿一些。”犍陀罗仙人问:“韦迭希,你从哪里得到的?”韦迭希仙人说:“那天吃剩的,我怕浪费,就收起来了。”犍陀罗仙人不想拿,只喝了没有盐的粥,然后对韦迭希仙人说:巴利
Atīte kira gandhārarājā ca vedeharājā ca dvepi sahāyakā hutvā kāmesu ādīnavaṃ disvā rajjāni puttānaṃ niyyātetvā isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā ekasmiṃ araññagāmake piṇḍāya caranti. Paccanto nāma dullabhaloṇo hoti. Tato aloṇaṃ yāguṃ labhitvā ekissāya sālāya nisīditvā pivanti. Antarantare manussā loṇacuṇṇaṃ āharitvā denti. Ekadivasaṃ eko vedehisissa paṇṇe pakkhipitvā loṇacuṇṇaṃ adāsi . Vedehisi gahetvā upaḍḍhaṃ gandhārisissa-santike ṭhapetvā upaḍḍhaṃ attano santike ṭhapesi. Tato thokaṃ paribhuttāvasesaṃ disvā, ‘‘mā idaṃ nassī’’ti paṇṇena veṭhetvā tiṇagahane ṭhapesi. Puna ekasmiṃ divase yāgupānakāle satiṃ katvā olokento taṃ disvā gandhārisiṃ upasaṅkamitvā, ‘‘ito thokaṃ gaṇhatha ācariyā’’ti āha. Kuto te laddhaṃ vedehisīti? Tasmiṃ divase paribhuttāvasesaṃ ‘‘mā nassī’’ti mayā ṭhapitanti. Gandhārisi gahetuṃ na icchati, aloṇakaṃyeva yāguṃ pivitvā vedehaṃ isiṃ avoca –
“ 舍弃了十六千圆满村庄,
舍弃了丰饶仓库,如今你还要积藏吗?”巴利
‘‘Hitvā gāmasahassāni, paripuṇṇāni soḷasa; Koṭṭhāgārāni phītāni, sannidhiṃ dāni kubbasī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.76);
韦迭希对他说:“你们已经舍弃王位出家了,如今为什么为了囤积一点点盐末的缘故,而不做与出家相宜之事呢?” “我做了什么,韦迭希?” 于是韦迭希对他说:巴利
Vedehisi avoca – ‘‘tumhe rajjaṃ pahāya pabbajitā, idāni kasmā loṇacuṇṇamattasannidhikāraṇā pabbajjāya anucchavikaṃ na karothā’’ti? Kiṃ mayā kataṃ vedehisīti? Atha naṃ āha –
“ 舍弃了犍陀罗国,那拥有丰饶财富的地方;
你已经从教诫者的身份退出来了,现在却还要在这里教诫人。”巴利
‘‘Hitvā gandhāravisayaṃ, pahūtadhanadhāriyaṃ; Pasāsanato nikkhanto, idha dāni pasāsasī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.77);
“ 毗提诃啊,我说的是正法,非法不合我意。
我正在说法的时候,恶不会沾染我。”巴利
‘‘Dhammaṃ bhaṇāmi vedeha, adhammo me na ruccati; Dhammaṃ me bhaṇamānassa, na pāpamupalimpatī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.78);
“ 若以任何方式令他人受损恼,
纵使话有大义利,智者亦不应说。”巴利
‘‘Yena kenaci vaṇṇena, paro labhati ruppanaṃ; Mahatthiyampi ce vācaṃ, na taṃ bhāseyya paṇḍito’’ti. (jā. 1.7.79);
“ 任凭他烦恼还是不烦恼,就算像糠秕一样被撒得粉碎;
我说法时,邪恶沾染不了我。”巴利
‘‘Kāmaṃ ruppatu vā mā vā, bhusaṃva vikirīyatu; Dhammaṃ me bhaṇamānassa, na pāpamupalimpatī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.80);
于是韦迭希想:“这个人连自己的智慧都没有,也不在老师跟前学律仪,就像盲水牛在树林里游荡。”这样想过之后,他说道:巴利
Tato vedehisi yassa sakāpi buddhi natthi, ācariyasantike vinayaṃ na sikkhati, so andhamahiṃso viya vane caratīti cintetvā āha –
“ 如果一个人没有自己的智慧,或者没有好好修学戒律;
就像林中的盲水牛一样,许多人会到处游荡。
因为,而且在这里,有些人已在师长面前受过良好训练。
因此,被律调伏的人,心善得安定而行。”巴利
‘‘No ce assa sakā buddhi, vinayo vā susikkhito; Vane andhamahiṃsova, careyya bahuko jano. Yasmā ca panidhekacce, āceramhi susikkhitā; Tasmā vinītavinayā, caranti susamāhitā’’ti. (jā. 1.7.81-82);
他这样说完之后,维底仙人不知道“这是我做的”,便请求犍陀罗仙人原谅。他们两人修习苦行,后来都往生到了梵天界。就这样,如来在还是菩萨的时候,长久以来都以正命为第八支的戒,保持清净。巴利
Evañca pana vatvā vedehisi ajānitvā mayā katanti gandhārisiṃ khamāpesi. Te ubhopi tapaṃ caritvā brahmalokaṃ agamaṃsu. Evaṃ tathāgatassa bodhisattakālepi dīgharattaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ parisuddhaṃ ahosi.
这位具寿比丘是不是达到了名声显赫?这位具寿、我们的导师比丘,是不是达到了大家都知道的、明摆着的状态?他自己是不是也得到了眷属的圆满?为了让大家这样去审察:以他那种人所共知的显赫状态和依附名声的状态,到底能不能看出某些过患?世尊这样开示。诸比丘,只要一位比丘还没有被国王、大臣等人所熟知,或者还没有得到眷属的圆满,那么像慢、过慢这类过患就不会出现,他住得像已经彻底寂静的人一样,像入流者一样,像一来者一样。他到底是圣者还是凡夫,根本没办法知道。巴利
Uttajjhāpanno ayamāyasmā bhikkhu yasapattoti ayamāyasmā amhākaṃ satthā bhikkhu ñattaṃ paññātabhāvaṃ pākaṭabhāvaṃ ajjhāpanno nu kho, sayañca parivārasampattiṃ patto nu kho noti. Tena cassa paññātajjhāpannabhāvena yasasannissitabhāvena ca kiṃ ekacce ādīnavā sandissanti udāhu noti evaṃ samannesantūti dasseti. Na tāva, bhikkhaveti, bhikkhave, yāva bhikkhu na rājarājamahāmattādīsu abhiññātabhāvaṃ vā parivārasampattiṃ vā āpanno hoti, tāva ekacce mānātimānādayo ādīnavā na saṃvijjanti upasantūpasanto viya sotāpanno viya sakadāgāmī viya ca viharati. Ariyo nu kho puthujjano nu khotipi ñātuṃ na sakkā hoti.
诸比丘,所谓“又因为……”这句话是说:当这里某位比丘出了名,或者有了众多随从的时候,他就会像一头恶牛用尖角乱撞牛群,又像豹子踩踏鹿群一样,到处顶撞、伤害其他比丘。他没有恭敬心,行为不合僧团规矩,走起路来好像只用脚尖点地一样轻慢。
但另有一种良家子弟,他越是有名望、有声誉,就越像谷粒饱满的稻穗一样,更加低垂谦下。当国王、大臣等人前来接近时,他省察自己其实一无所有,在心中建立起沙门的认知。他像一头断了角的公牛,又像旃陀罗的小孩一样,温顺柔和,心态谦卑,为了比丘僧团以及包括天神的世间众生的利益和安乐而修行。
正是针对这样的行持,世尊才说:“在这里,他不会有一些过患。”巴利
Yatoca kho, bhikkhaveti yadā pana idhekacco bhikkhu ñāto hoti parivārasampanno vā, tadā tiṇhena siṅgena gogaṇaṃ vijjhanto duṭṭhagoṇo viya, migasaṅghaṃ abhimaddamāno dīpi viya ca aññe bhikkhū tattha tattha vijjhanto agāravo asabhāgavutti aggapādena bhūmiṃ phusanto viya carati. Ekacco pana kulaputto yathā yathā ñāto hoti yasassī, tathā tathā phalabhārabharito viya sāli suṭṭhutaraṃ onamati, rājarājamahāmattādīsu upasaṅkamantesu akiñcanabhāvaṃ paccavekkhitvā samaṇasaññaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā chinnavisāṇausabho viya, caṇḍāladārako viya ca sorato nivāto nīcacitto hutvā bhikkhusaṅghassa ceva sadevakassa ca lokassa, hitāya sukhāya paṭipajjati. Evarūpaṃ paṭipattiṃ sandhāya ‘‘nāssa idhekacce ādīnavā’’ti āha.
如来在八种世间法面前都是如如不动的:得利时如如不动,失利时也如如不动;有名声时如如不动,没名声时也如如不动;被称赞时如如不动,被讥嫌时也如如不动;快乐时如如不动,痛苦时也如如不动。所以,无论从哪个方面来看,他身上都找不到这些过患。所谓“无畏而止息”,意思是:已经没有恐惧,所以止息了;也就是彻底止息、永远止息。或者说,不是因为害怕才止息,所以叫“无畏而止息”。恐惧有四种:烦恼带来的恐惧、轮回带来的恐惧、恶趣带来的恐惧、被人非难带来的恐惧。凡夫对这四种恐惧都害怕。有学圣者只害怕其中三种,因为他们已经断除了恶趣的恐惧。所以,七有学圣者属于“因恐惧而止息”,而漏尽者才叫“无畏而止息”,因为他连一种恐惧都没有了。难道他不怕别人非难吗?不怕。不过,他是出于对众生的悲悯,才守护自己不被非难,心里想:“不要让众生因为我这样的漏尽者而造下恶业、走向毁灭。”就像住在红莲池精舍的亚萨长老那样。巴利
Tathāgato pana aṭṭhasu lokadhammesu tādī, so hi lābhepi tādī, alābhepi tādī, yasepi tādī, ayasepi tādī, pasaṃsāyapi tādī, nindāyapi tādī, sukhepi tādī, dukkhepi tādī, tasmā sabbākārena nāssa idhekacce ādīnavā saṃvijjanti. Abhayūparatoti abhayo hutvā uparato, accantūparato satatūparatoti attho. Na vā bhayena uparatotipi abhayūparato. Cattāri hi bhayāni kilesabhayaṃ vaṭṭabhayaṃ duggatibhayaṃ upavādabhayanti. Puthujjano catūhipi bhayehi bhāyati. Sekkhā tīhi, tesañhi duggatibhayaṃ pahīnaṃ, iti satta sekkhā bhayūparatā, khīṇāsavo abhayūparato nāma, tassa hi ekampi bhayaṃ natthi. Kiṃ paravādabhayaṃ natthīti? Natthi. Parānuddayaṃ pana paṭicca, ‘‘mādisaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ paṭicca sattā mā nassantū’’ti upavādaṃ rakkhati. Mūluppalavāpivihāravāsī yasatthero viya.
据说,那位长老进红莲池村托钵。他来到一位施主家门口时,有人接过他的钵,靠着门边的矮凳给他铺好座位。那位大臣的女儿也靠着同一张矮凳,在后面铺了一个更低的座位坐下。这时,一位同住比丘也随后进村托钵,他站在门口往里一看,注意到长老正和大臣的女儿坐在同一张床座上,心里想:“这个穿粪扫衣的,在寺院里装得好像很寂静安稳,到了村里却和女施主坐在同一张床座上。”他又想:“难道是我看错了?”于是一再看,还是认定自己没看错,就走了。长老吃完饭,回到寺院,进了自己的住处,关上门坐下。那位同住比丘也吃完饭回到寺院,心想:“我要抓住那个穿粪扫衣的,把他赶出寺院。”他毫无收敛地走到长老的住处,从日常用的水罐里舀水,弄出很大声响来洗脚。长老心想:“这个行为放逸的人是谁?”他一观察,全都明白了,又想:“别让他对我起了恶念,因此堕入恶趣。”于是腾空而起,在靠近屋顶圆板的地方结跏趺坐。那位同住比丘气冲冲地提起门闩,打开门进去,却看不见长老,以为他钻到床底下去了,看了看那里也没有,就准备出去。长老咳了一声。那人抬头看见了他,实在忍不住,就这样说:“朋友,穿粪扫衣的,你这么大的神通,跟女施主坐在同一张床座上,像话吗?”(长老回答:)
“尊者,出家人本来就不和女人坐在同一张床座上,是你自己看错了。”诸漏已尽的人,就是这样出于对别人的悲悯,守护着、避免着别人的非难。巴利
Thero kira mūluppalavāpigāmaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Athassa upaṭṭhākakuladvāraṃ pattassa pattaṃ gahetvā thaṇḍilapīṭhakaṃ nissāya āsanaṃ paññapesuṃ. Amaccadhītāpi taṃyeva pīṭhakaṃ nissāya paratobhāge nīcataraṃ āsanaṃ paññāpetvā nisīdi. Eko nevāsiko bhikkhu pacchā piṇḍāya paviṭṭho dvāre ṭhatvāva olokento thero amaccadhītarā saddhiṃ ekamañce nisinnoti sallakkhetvā, ‘‘ayaṃ paṃsukūliko vihāreva upasantūpasanto viya viharati, antogāme pana upaṭṭhāyikāhi saddhiṃ ekamañce nisīdatī’’ti cintetvā, ‘‘kiṃ nu kho mayā duddiṭṭha’’nti punappunaṃ oloketvā tathāsaññīva hutvā pakkāmi. Theropi bhattakiccaṃ katvā vihāraṃ gantvā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya nisīdi. Nevāsikopi katabhattakicco vihāraṃ gantvā, ‘‘taṃ paṃsukūlikaṃ niggaṇhitvā vihārā nikkaḍḍhissāmī’’ti asaññatanīhārena therassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā paribhogaghaṭato uluṅkena udakaṃ gahetvā mahāsaddaṃ karonto pāde dhovi. Thero, ‘‘ko nu kho ayaṃ asaññatacāriko’’ti āvajjanto sabbaṃ ñatvā, ‘‘ayaṃ mayi manaṃ padosetvā apāyūpago mā ahosī’’ti vehāsaṃ abbhuggantvā kaṇṇikāmaṇḍalasamīpe pallaṅkena nisīdi. Nevāsiko duṭṭhākārena ghaṭikaṃ ukkhipitvā dvāraṃ vivaritvā anto paviṭṭho theraṃ apassanto, ‘‘heṭṭhāmañcaṃ paviṭṭho bhavissatī’’ti oloketvā tatthāpi apassanto nikkhamituṃ ārabhi. Thero ukkāsi. Itaro uddhaṃ olokento disvā adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto evamāha – ‘‘patirūpaṃ te, āvuso, paṃsukūlika evaṃ ānubhāvasampannassa upaṭṭhāyikāya saddhiṃ ekamañce nisīditu’’nti. Pabbajitā nāma, bhante, mātugāmena saddhiṃ na ekamañce nisīdanti, tumhehi pana duddiṭṭhametanti. Evaṃ khīṇāsavā parānuddayāya upavādaṃ rakkhanti.
“由贪的灭尽”就是指贪彻底灭尽。因为已经离贪,所以他不会去亲近欲乐,也不是靠反复思量抉择才勉强压住。而当他这样了知如来断除烦恼之后,不论在什么地方,行住坐卧之时,甚至坐在四众弟子围绕、庄严布置的法座上,他也可以这样说:导师确实离贪、离嗔、离痴,已经吐弃烦恼,断除垢秽,就像摆脱了一切云雾的满月一样,极其清净。正当他这样赞叹如来断除烦恼的功德时,其他人可能会这样问那位审察的比丘——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Khayā rāgassāti rāgassa khayeneva. Vītarāgattā kāme na paṭisevati, na paṭisaṅkhāya vāretvāti. Tañceti evaṃ tathāgatassa kilesappahānaṃ ñatvā tattha tattha ṭhitanisinnakālādīsupi catuparisamajjhe alaṅkatadhammāsane nisīditvāpi itipi satthā vītarāgo vītadoso vītamoho vantakileso pahīnamalo abbhā muttapuṇṇacando viya suparisuddhoti evaṃ tathāgatassa kilesappahāne vaṇṇaṃ kathayamānaṃ taṃ vīmaṃsakaṃ bhikkhuṃ pare evaṃ puccheyyuṃ ceti attho.
“因相”是指各种原因和根据。“随觉”是指随之生起的观察智慧。“或在僧众中住”,是指有时住在人数不定的比丘僧团中间。“或独自一人住”,是指像经里说的“诸比丘,我想独自静修半个月”“我想独自静修三个月”,这样独自隐居,以及在巴利雷亚林丛中独自安住。“善行者”,是指行得极好、修行端正、精勤用功、与修行相应的人。确实也有这样的比丘。“恶行者”,是指行得极差、修行不正、一味执著身体强壮、舍弃了业处的人。也确实有这样的人。“教诫众人”,是指被群体关系绑住、乐于群居、习惯成群结队,于是不断照顾、带领大众。也确实有这样的人。与这些人相反的,则是脱离群体、不被系缚、自在独住的比丘。巴利
Ākārāti kāraṇāni. Anvayāti anubuddhiyo. Saṅghe vā viharantoti appekadā aparicchinnagaṇanassa bhikkhusaṅghassa majjhe viharanto. Eko vā viharantoti icchāmahaṃ, bhikkhave , aḍḍhamāsaṃ paṭisallīyitunti, temāsaṃ paṭisallīyitunti evaṃ paṭisallāne ceva pālileyyakavanasaṇḍe ca ekako viharanto. Sugatāti suṭṭhugatā suppaṭipannā kārakā yuttapayuttā. Evarūpāpi hi ekacce bhikkhū atthi. Duggatāti duṭṭhugatā duppaṭipannā kāyadaḷhibahulā vissaṭṭhakammaṭṭhānā. Evarūpāpi ekacce atthi. Gaṇamanusāsantīti gaṇabandhanena baddhā gaṇārāmā gaṇabahulikā hutvā gaṇaṃ pariharanti. Evarūpāpi ekacce atthi. Tesaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtā gaṇato nissaṭā visaṃsaṭṭhā vippamuttavihārinopi atthi.
有些人贪图利养,眼睛只盯着利养,四处奔走就为了四种资具带来的好处,确实有比丘陷在利养里。也有人不被利养污染,对四种资具心能抽离、不沾着,像月亮从云里出来一样安住。这位具寿不会因为那样就轻视那个人:这位具寿——也就是导师——不会因为某人某种行持就轻视他,不会想“这个人在修行、在做事”“这个人离开了群体,脱开了束缚”“这个人不被利养污染,对资具心能抽离,像月亮从云里出来一样”,不会因为这种在家式的执著而抬高他。也不会想“这个人修行差劲,没在真正用功,身体僵硬沉重,丢掉了业处”“这个人被群体的绳索绑住”“这个人贪图利养,心浮气躁,眼睛只盯着利养”,不会因为这种在家式的执著而贬低他。这话说的是什么?说的是如来对众生保持平等。因为——巴利
Āmisesu sandissantīti āmisagiddhā āmisacakkhukā catupaccayaāmisatthameva āhiṇḍamānā āmisesu sandissamānakabhikkhūpi atthi. Āmisena anupalittā catūhi paccayehi vinivattamānasā abbhā muttacandasadisā hutvā viharamānāpi atthi. Nāyamāyasmā taṃ tena avajānātīti ayaṃ āyasmā satthā tāya tāya paṭipattiyā taṃ taṃ puggalaṃ nāvajānāti, ayaṃ paṭipanno kārako, ayaṃ gaṇato nissaṭo visaṃsaṭṭho. Ayaṃ āmisena anupalitto paccayehi vinivattamānaso abbhā mutto candimā viyāti evamassa gehasitavasena ussādanāpi natthi. Ayaṃ duppaṭipanno akārako kāyadaḷhibahulo vissaṭṭhakammaṭṭhāno, ayaṃ gaṇabandhanabaddho, ayaṃ āmisagiddho lolo āmisacakkhukoti evamassa gehasitavasena apasādanāpi natthīti attho. Iminā kiṃ kathitaṃ hoti? Tathāgatassa sattesu tādibhāvo kathito hoti. Ayañhi –
“ 对杀人的提婆达多、盗贼指鬘,
无论对财护象还是对罗睺罗,牟尼对一切众生都平等。”巴利
‘‘Vadhakassa devadattassa, corassaṅgulimālino; Dhanapāle rāhule ca, sabbesaṃ samako munī’’ti. (mi. pa. 6.6.5);
489 这里说到“诸比丘”,是指那两类检验者:一类是因为问“这位尊者的行相是什么”而出现的结缚检验者,另一类是因为认为“这位尊者是安住无畏、已经离执的人”而出现的根本检验者。在这两者当中,应该由根本检验者进一步直接反问如来。因为他先前只是从别人的话里得出了结论。而别人可能在知道的情况下说,也可能在不知道的情况下说;这样一来,他说的话既可能是真的,也可能是不真的。所以,意思就是:不要只凭别人的话就下结论,而应该在这之后更进一步,直接向如来追问。巴利
489.Tatra, bhikkhaveti tesu dvīsu vīmaṃsakesu. Yo, ‘‘ke panāyasmato ākārā’’ti pucchāyaṃ āgato gaṇṭhivīmaṃsako ca, yo ‘‘abhayūparato ayamāyasmā’’ti āgato mūlavīmaṃsako ca. Tesu mūlavīmaṃsakena tathāgatova uttari paṭipucchitabbo. So hi pubbe parasseva kathāya niṭṭhaṅgato. Paro ca nāma jānitvāpi katheyya ajānitvāpi. Evamassa kathā bhūtāpi hoti abhūtāpi, tasmā parasseva kathāya niṭṭhaṃ agantvā tato uttari tathāgatova paṭipucchitabboti attho.
“在解说时”:在这里,因为如来根本不会有错误的解说,所以不区分“正确说”或“错误说”,而只是说“在解说时”。“这是我的道路,这是我的行处”,意思是:这是我的道,这是我的境。也有读作“etāpātho”的,它的意思是:我那与维持生命的第八条戒相应的戒是清净的;正因为我的戒清净,所以我才能在检验比丘的智门中这样显现,也就是说,这样进入他的视野。“我却不因此成为那样的人”则是说明:我虽然具足这清净戒,却不会因此就与之混同,不会带着渴爱;正因为戒清净,所以我没有渴爱。巴利
Byākaramānoti ettha yasmā tathāgatassa micchābyākaraṇaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā sammā micchāti avatvā byākaramānotveva vuttaṃ. Etaṃ pathohamasmietaṃ gocaroti esa mayhaṃ patho esa gocaroti attho. ‘‘Etāpātho’’tipi pāṭho, tassattho mayhaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ parisuddhaṃ, svāhaṃ tassa parisuddhabhāvena vīmaṃsakassa bhikkhuno ñāṇamukhe etāpātho, evaṃ āpāthaṃ gacchāmīti vuttaṃ hoti. No ca tena tammayoti tenapi cāhaṃ parisuddhena sīlena na tammayo, na sataṇho, parisuddhasīlattāva nittaṇhohamasmīti dīpeti.
把法一层比一层讲得更殊胜、更精妙,就是让所讲的内容越来越高级、越来越殊胜。所谓“有对立面的黑白”,就是把黑法和白法拿来,让它们互相对照、互相敌对:通过排除黑法来说明白法,通过排除白法来说明黑法,以这种互相对立的方式来讲黑与白。即使在讲黑法时,也是带着努力、带着果报来讲;讲白法时,也是带着努力、带着果报来讲。所谓“以证智了知其中某一法,在诸法中达到究竟”,意思是:在所讲的法中,以证智了知某个能通达证悟的法之后,便依那个通达证悟之法,对所讲之法达到究竟。所谓“于大师生起净信”,意思是:这样于法达到究竟之后,由于更加增上,便生起“那位世尊是正自觉者”的净信,从而于大师生起净信。而那位世尊所说的法,也是善说之法,因为能引导出离。凡已进入那法之修行的那僧团,也是善修行,因为所修之道远离弯曲等过失。如此,便也于法与僧生起净信。所谓“而那样”,指的是:那位如此产生净信的比丘,会在不同的场合,赞叹这三种宝的功德。巴利
Uttaruttariṃpaṇītapaṇītanti uttaruttariṃ ceva paṇītatarañca katvā deseti. Kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāganti kaṇhaṃ ceva sukkañca, tañca kho sappaṭibhāgaṃ savipakkhaṃ katvā, kaṇhaṃ paṭibāhitvā sukkanti sukkaṃ paṭibāhitvā kaṇhanti evaṃ sappaṭibhāgaṃ katvā kaṇhasukkaṃ deseti. Kaṇhaṃ desentopi saussāhaṃ savipākaṃ deseti, sukkaṃ desentopi saussāhaṃ savipākaṃ deseti. Abhiññāya idhekaccaṃ dhammaṃ dhammesu niṭṭhaṃ gacchatīti tasmiṃ desite dhamme ekaccaṃ paṭivedhadhammaṃ abhiññāya tena paṭivedhadhammena desanādhamme niṭṭhaṃ gacchati. Satthari pasīdatīti evaṃ dhamme niṭṭhaṃ gantvā bhiyyosomattāya sammāsambuddho so bhagavāti satthari pasīdati. Tena pana bhagavatā yo dhammo akkhāto, sopi svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo niyyānikattā. Yvāssa taṃ dhammaṃ paṭipanno saṅgho, sopi suppaṭipanno vaṅkādidosarahitaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipannattāti evaṃ dhamme saṅghepi pasīdati. Tañceti taṃ evaṃ pasannaṃ tattha tattha tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ kathentaṃ bhikkhuṃ.
490 “以这些方式”是指这些用来检验导师的根据。“以这些语句”是指这些文字组合成的语句。“以这些文句”是指这里所说的这些文字。“信已安立”是指确定无疑的信已经建立。“已生根”是指依入流道而生起了根。因为入流道就是信的根。“有理由的”是指经过寻找原因之后才接受,所以是有缘由的。“以见为根本”是指以入流道为根本。因为入流道就称为“见”。“坚固的”是指牢固。“不可被夺的”是指无法被夺走。无论是沙门——止息了恶行的修行人,还是婆罗门——断除了恶行的修行人,还是天——因业报而投生的天神,还是魔——自在天魔,都无法夺走它。因为即使是自在天魔,也无法夺走入流者的信,就像苏兰巴塔那样。巴利
490.Imehi ākārehīti imehi satthuvīmaṃsanakāraṇehi. Imehi padehīti imehi akkharasampiṇḍanapadehi. Imehi byañjanehīti imehi idha vuttehi akkharehi. Saddhā niviṭṭhāti okappanā patiṭṭhitā. Mūlajātāti sotāpattimaggavasena sañjātamūlā. Sotāpattimaggo hi saddhāya mūlaṃ nāma. Ākāravatīti kāraṇaṃ pariyesitvā gahitattā sakāraṇā. Dassanamūlikāti sotāpattimaggamūlikā. So hi dassananti vuccati. Daḷhāti thirā. Asaṃhāriyāti harituṃ na sakkā. Samaṇena vāti samitapāpasamaṇena vā. Brāhmaṇena vāti bāhitapāpabrāhmaṇena vā. Devena vāti upapattidevena vā. Mārena vāti vasavattimārena vā, sotāpannassa hi vasavattimārenāpi saddhā asaṃhāriyā hoti sūrambaṭṭhassa viya.
据说,苏兰巴塔听完导师说法后证得了入流果,回到家里。这时,魔罗化现出三十二种殊胜相好庄严的佛陀形象,站在他家门口,派人传话说:“导师来了。”苏兰心想:“我刚从导师那里听完法回来,这到底是怎么回事?”于是走上前去,以为是导师,礼拜后站在一旁。魔罗说:“苏兰巴塔,我对你说的‘色是无常的……乃至……识是无常的’,那是我没有经过思量、随口说的。所以你应该执取‘色是常的……乃至……识是常的’。”苏兰心想:“佛陀绝不可能不经思量、不作现观而说任何话,这一定是魔罗来扰乱我的。”于是对他说:“你是魔罗!”魔罗没法说谎,就承认说:“是,我是魔罗。”被问“你为什么来”时,他说:“为了动摇你的信心。”苏兰说:“黑魔!你一个人待着吧,像你这样的魔罗,就算一百个、一千个,也动摇不了我的信心。通过圣道生起的信心,就像立在岩石大地上的须弥山一样,是不可动摇的,你在这里能做什么?”他弹了一个响指。魔罗站不住,当场就消失了。
“或由梵天神”是指梵身天等当中的某位梵天神。“或由世间任何其他众生”是指除了这些沙门等之外,世间任何其他众生也无法夺走它。
“探寻法”是指探寻事物的自性。“善通达法性”是指对法性善加通达,意思是以自性彻底地善加探寻。其余各处都是显而易见的。巴利
So kira satthu dhammadesanaṃ sutvā sotāpanno hutvā gehaṃ āgato. Atha māro dvattiṃsavaralakkhaṇappaṭimaṇḍitaṃ buddharūpaṃ māpetvā tassa gharadvāre ṭhatvā – ‘‘satthā āgato’’ti sāsanaṃ pahiṇi. Sūro cintesi, ‘‘ahaṃ idāneva satthu santikā dhammaṃ sutvā āgato, kiṃ nu kho bhavissatī’’ti upasaṅkamitvā satthusaññāya vanditvā aṭṭhāsi. Māro āha – ‘‘yaṃ te mayā, sūrambaṭṭha, rūpaṃ aniccaṃ…pe… viññāṇaṃ aniccanti kathitaṃ, taṃ anupadhāretvāva sahasā mayā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā tvaṃ rūpaṃ niccaṃ…pe… viññāṇaṃ niccanti gaṇhāhī’’ti. Sūro cintesi – ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, yaṃ buddhā anupadhāretvā apaccakkhaṃ katvā kiñci katheyyuṃ, addhā ayaṃ mayhaṃ vibādhanatthaṃ māro āgato’’ti. Tato naṃ tvaṃ māroti āha. So musāvādaṃ kātuṃ nāsakkhi, āma mārosmīti paṭijāni. Kasmā āgatosīti vutte tava saddhācālanatthanti āha. Kaṇha pāpima, tvaṃ tāva ekako tiṭṭha, tādisānaṃ mārānaṃ satampi sahassampi mama saddhaṃ cāletuṃ asamatthaṃ, maggena āgatā saddhā nāma silāpathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhitasineru viya acalā hoti, kiṃ tvaṃ etthāti accharaṃ pahari. So ṭhātuṃ asakkonto tatthevantaradhāyi. Brahmunā vāti brahmakāyikādīsu aññatarabrahmunā vā. Kenaci vā lokasminti ete samaṇādayo ṭhapetvā aññenapi kenaci vā lokasmiṃ harituṃ na sakkā. Dhammasamannesanāti sabhāvasamannesanā. Dhammatāsusamanniṭṭhoti dhammatāya susamanniṭṭho, sabhāveneva suṭṭhu samannesito hotīti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
8. 《憍赏弥经》的注释巴利
8. Kosambiyasuttavaṇṇanā
491 “如是我闻”这句,就是《憍赏弥经》。其中“憍赏弥”是一座城的名字。据说这座城的园林、池塘等各个地方,都长满了憍赏弥树,非常繁茂,因此就得名为“憍赏弥”。也有人认为,是因为建在一位名叫库桑巴的仙人草庵附近,所以得名。“科斯达”是指由科斯达长者所建的园林。巴利
491.Evaṃme sutanti kosambiyasuttaṃ. Tattha kosambiyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tassa kira nagarassa ārāmapokkharaṇīādīsu tesu tesu ṭhānesu kosambarukkhāva ussannā ahesuṃ, tasmā kosambīti saṅkhaṃ agamāsi. Kusambassa nāma isino assamato avidūre māpitattātipi eke. Ghositārāmeti ghositaseṭṭhinā kārite ārāme.
据说从前有个叫阿迪拉的国家。后来,一个叫科图哈拉卡的穷人因为害怕闹饥荒,带着妻子儿女前往一个田地界限分明、粮食丰足的国家。路上他背不动儿子了,就把儿子丢下自己走了。母亲折返回来,带上儿子继续赶路。他们走进一个牧牛人的村子,当时牧牛人正好煮好了捣碎的乳粥。他们得到乳粥后就吃了。那个男子吃了太多乳粥,消化不了,夜里就死了,就在那里投生到一只母狗的肚子里,生为狗。这只狗成了牧牛人喜爱又中意的狗。牧牛人常去侍奉一位独觉佛。独觉佛吃完饭后,也会给这只狗一团食物。狗对独觉佛生起了感情,于是跟着牧牛人一起去草舍。巴利
Pubbe kira addilaraṭṭhaṃ nāma ahosi. Tato kotūhalako nāma daliddo chātakabhayena saputtadāro kedāraparicchinnaṃ subhikkhaṃ raṭṭhaṃ gacchanto puttaṃ vahituṃ asakkonto chaḍḍetvā agamāsi. Mātā nivattitvā taṃ gahetvā gatā. Te ekaṃ gopālakagāmakaṃ pavisiṃsu, gopālakānañca tadā pahatapāyaso paṭiyatto hoti, tato pāyasaṃ labhitvā bhuñjiṃsu. Atha so puriso pahūtapāyasaṃ bhuñjitvā jirāpetuṃ asakkonto rattibhāge kālaṃ katvā tattheva sunakhiyā kucchimhi paṭisandhiṃ gahetvā kukkuro jāto. So gopālakassa piyo ahosi manāpo, gopālako ca paccekabuddhaṃ upaṭṭhāsi. Paccekabuddhopi bhattakiccāvasāne kukkurassa ekaṃ piṇḍaṃ deti. So paccekabuddhe sinehaṃ uppādetvā gopālakena saddhiṃ paṇṇasālampi gacchati.
牧牛人不在的时候,到了吃饭的时间,狗就自己走到独觉佛的草屋门口吠叫,用来通报时间;在路上看到凶猛的野兽,它也吠叫着把它们赶跑。它凭着对独觉佛的柔软心命终之后,投生到了天界。在那里,它的名字就叫瞿沙天子。它从天界死后,投生在憍赏弥的一个家族里。一个没有儿子的长者给了它今生的父母钱财,把它收作儿子。后来,长者自己有了亲生儿子,就开始想办法杀它,前后杀了七次。但它因为福德深厚,七次都死不了,最后靠一位长者女儿的机智才保住了命,并在养父去世后继承了长者的地位,被称为科斯达长者。憍赏弥还有另外两位长者,一位叫库库塔长者,一位叫帕瓦利卡长者。连他在内,一共是三位。巴利
So gopālake asannihite bhattavelāya sayameva gantvā kālārocanatthaṃ paṇṇasāladvāre bhussati, antarāmaggepi caṇḍamige disvā bhussitvā palāpeti. So paccekabuddhe mudukena cittena kālaṃ katvā devaloke nibbatti. Tatrassa ghosakadevaputtotveva nāmaṃ ahosi. So devalokato cavitvā kosambiyaṃ ekasmiṃ kulaghare nibbatti. Taṃ aputtako seṭṭhi tassa mātāpitūnaṃ dhanaṃ datvā puttaṃ katvā aggahesi. Atha so attano putte jāte sattakkhattuṃ mārāpetuṃ upakkami. So puññavantatāya sattasupi ṭhānesu maraṇaṃ appatvā avasāne ekāya seṭṭhidhītāya veyyattiyena laddhajīviko aparabhāge pituaccayena seṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ patvā ghositaseṭṭhi nāma jāto. Aññepi kosambiyaṃ kukkuṭaseṭṭhi pāvārikaseṭṭhīti dve seṭṭhino santi. Imehi saddhiṃ tayo ahesuṃ.
那时,和这些富商做朋友的五百位仙人,靠这些富商供养,住在山脚下。他们时常为了喝点咸酸粥而来到有人烟的地方。有一次正值热季,他们走在人走的路上,穿过一片没有水的大荒野,到了荒野尽头,看见一棵大榕树,就想:这棵树这么大,这里肯定住着一位有大威力的天神。要是她能给我们一点喝的或吃的,那就好了。天神知道了仙人们的心意,心想:我要照顾他们。于是用自己的神力,从树枝之间放出一股像犁头那么粗的水流。仙人们看见那像银柱一样流下来的水,各自用容器接了水喝,喝完后心想:天神给了我们喝的水,可这里是远离村落的荒野,要是她也能给我们食物,那就好了。天神又顺着仙人们的心意,给了他们天界的粥和嚼食之类的东西,让他们吃饱。仙人们心想:天神既给了我们喝的水,也给了我们食物,什么都给了。要是她能让我们见到她本人,那就好了。巴利
Tena ca samayena tesaṃ sahāyakānaṃ seṭṭhīnaṃ kulūpakā pañcasatā isayo pabbatapāde vasiṃsu. Te kālena kālaṃ loṇambilasevanatthāya manussapathaṃ āgacchanti. Athekasmiṃ vāre gimhasamaye manussapathaṃ āgacchantā nirudakamahākantāraṃ atikkamitvā kantārapariyosāne mahantaṃ nigrodharukkhaṃ disvā cintesuṃ – ‘‘yādiso ayaṃ rukkho, addhā ettha mahesakkhāya devatāya bhavitabbaṃ, sādhu vatassa, sace no pānīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā dadeyyā’’ti. Devatā isīnaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā imesaṃ saṅgahaṃ karissāmīti attano ānubhāvena viṭapantarato naṅgalasīsamattaṃ udakadhāraṃ pavattesi. Isigaṇo rajatakkhandhasadisaṃ udakavaṭṭiṃ disvā attano bhājanehi udakaṃ gahetvā paribhogaṃ katvā cintesi – ‘‘devatāya amhākaṃ paribhogaudakaṃ dinnaṃ, idaṃ pana agāmakaṃ mahāaraññaṃ, sādhu vatassa, sace no āhārampi dadeyyā’’ti. Devatā isīnaṃ upasaṃkappanavasena dibbāni yāgukhajjakādīni datvā santappesi. Isayo cintayiṃsu – ‘‘devatāya amhākaṃ paribhogaudakampi bhojanampi sabbaṃ dinnaṃ, sādhu vatassa, sace no attānaṃ dasseyyā’’ti.
天神知道了他们的心意,就显现出上半身。他们问道:天神啊,你的福报这么大,是造了什么业才得到这样的福报呢?尊者,并没有造什么特别大的业,只是造了一点小小的业而已。原来,这位天神就是依靠半伍波萨他的业,才得到了那样的福报。巴利
Devatā tesaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā upaḍḍhakāyaṃ dassesi. Te āhaṃsu – ‘‘devate, mahatī te sampatti, kiṃ kammaṃ katvā imaṃ sampattiṃ adhigatāsī’’ti? Bhante, nātimahantaṃ parittakaṃ kammaṃ katvāti. Upaḍḍhauposathakammaṃ nissāya hi devatāya sā sampatti laddhā.
据说,给孤独长者家里有个佣工。因为在这位长者的家里,每逢伍波萨他日,连奴仆佣工在内,全家所有人都会持守伍波萨他。有一天,这个佣工一大早就独自出门干活去了。大长者正在留意那些能领到食物的人,发现只有他一个人去了林子里,就把他傍晚的饭食也留了出来。做饭的女奴只煮了他一个人的饭,等他从林子里回来,就把饭盛好给了他。佣工问:“平常日子到了这个时候,家里都吵吵嚷嚷的,今天却特别安静,这是怎么回事?”女奴告诉他:“今天这家里所有人都持守伍波萨他,大长者只给你一个人留了饭。”他说:“是这样吗,大娘?”她说:“是的,主人。”他又说:“大娘,像现在这样受了伍波萨他,算不算完整的伍波萨他业呢?你去帮我问问大长者。”女奴去问了之后,大长者说:“不算完整的伍波萨他业,但算一半的业。就让他也持守伍波萨他吧。”佣工听了,没有吃饭,漱了口,就持守伍波萨他,然后回到自己住的地方躺下。他因为断了饮食,身体虚弱,夜里风大扰动,到天快亮时就死了。他凭着这半分伍波萨他业的果报,投生在大轮森林里的一棵榕树上,成了天子。后来,他把这段经过告诉了那些仙人。巴利
Anāthapiṇḍikassa kira gehe ayaṃ devaputto kammakāro ahosi. Seṭṭhissa hi gehe uposathadivasesu antamaso dāsakammakāre upādāya sabbo jano uposathiko hoti. Ekadivasaṃ ayaṃ kammakāro ekakova pāto uṭṭhāya kammantaṃ gato. Mahāseṭṭhi nivāpaṃ labhanamanusse sallakkhento etassevekassa araññaṃ gatabhāvaṃ ñatvā assa sāyamāsatthāya nivāpaṃ adāsi. Bhattakārikā dāsī ekasseva bhattaṃ pacitvā araññato āgatassa bhattaṃ vaḍḍhetvā adāsi, kammakāro āha – ‘‘aññesu divasesu imasmiṃ kāle gehaṃ ekasaddaṃ ahosi, ajja ativiya sannisinnaṃ, kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti ? Tassa sā ācikkhi – ‘‘ajja imasmiṃ gehe sabbe manussā uposathikā, mahāseṭṭhi tuyhevekassa nivāpaṃ adāsī’’ti. Evaṃ ammāti? Āma sāmīti. Imasmiṃ kāle uposathaṃ samādinnassa uposathakammaṃ hoti na hotīti mahāseṭṭhiṃ puccha ammāti? Tāya gantvā pucchito mahāseṭṭhi āha – ‘‘sakalauposathakammaṃ na hoti, upaḍḍhakammaṃ pana hoti, uposathiko hotū’’ti . Kammakāro bhattaṃ abhuñjitvā mukhaṃ vikkhāletvā uposathiko hutvā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā nipajji. Tassa āhāraparikkhīṇakāyassa rattiṃ vāto kuppi. So paccūsasamaye kālaṃ katvā upaḍḍhauposathakammanissandena mahāvaṭṭaniaṭaviyaṃ nigrodharukkhe devaputto hutvā nibbatti. So taṃ pavattiṃ isīnaṃ ārocesi.
仙人们说:“是您为我们宣说了过去从未听过的佛、法、僧。佛陀真的已经出现在世间了吗?”天人们回答:“是的,尊者,已经出现了。”仙人们又问:“那现在住在哪里?”天人们说:“尊者,在舍卫城附近的祇园精舍。”仙人们说:“诸位请先留步,我们去拜见世尊。”于是他们满心欢喜地出发,一路辗转来到了憍赏弥城。城里的几位大长者听说“仙人们来了”,就出城迎接,并邀请说:“尊者,明天请接受我们的供养。”第二天,他们为这群仙人办了盛大的布施。仙人们吃完饭就说要走。长者们问:“尊者,你们以前来的时候,总要住上一两个月,甚至三四个月才走。这次怎么昨天刚到,今天就说要走呢?”仙人们回答:“是的,居士们,因为佛陀已经出现在世间了,而人的寿命什么时候到头谁也说不准,所以我们才急着赶路。”长者们便说:“既然这样,尊者,我们也一起去吧,我们一起走。”仙人们说:“你们在家人随从众多,还是请留步,我们先走一步。”于是他们出发上路,途中只在一个地方歇了两天,就急匆匆地赶到了舍卫城,径直前往祇园精舍,来到世尊身边。听了世尊的甘露妙法后,他们全都出家,证得了阿拉汉果。巴利
Isayo tumhehi mayaṃ buddho, dhammo, saṅghoti asutapubbaṃ sāvitā, uppanno nu kho loke buddhoti? Āma, bhante, uppannoti. Idāni kuhiṃ vasatīti? Sāvatthiṃ nissāya jetavane, bhanteti. Isayo tiṭṭhatha tāva tumhe mayaṃ satthāraṃ passissāmāti haṭṭhatuṭṭhā nikkhamitvā anupubbena kosambinagaraṃ sampāpuṇiṃsu. Mahāseṭṭhino, ‘‘isayo āgatā’’ti paccuggamanaṃ katvā, ‘‘sve amhākaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhatha, bhante’’ti nimantetvā punadivase isigaṇassa mahādānaṃ adaṃsu. Isayo bhuñjitvāva gacchāmāti āpucchiṃsu. Tumhe, bhante, aññasmiṃ kāle ekampi māsaṃ dvepi tayopi cattāropi māse vasitvā gacchatha. Imasmiṃ pana vāre hiyyo āgantvā ajjeva gacchāmāti vadatha, kimidanti? Āma gahapatayo buddho loke uppanno, na kho pana sakkā jīvitantarāyo vidituṃ, tena mayaṃ turitā gacchāmāti. Tena hi, bhante, mayampi gacchāma, amhehi saddhiṃyeva gacchathāti. Tumhe agāriyā nāma mahājaṭā, tiṭṭhatha tumhe, mayaṃ puretaraṃ gamissāmāti nikkhamitvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne dvepi divasāni avasitvā turitagamaneneva sāvatthiṃ patvā jetavanavihāre satthu santikameva agamaṃsu. Satthu madhuradhammakathaṃ sutvā sabbeva pabbajitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu.
那三位长者也各自用五百辆牛车,装满酥油、蜂蜜、糖浆等物,以及精细的成匹布料等,从憍赏弥出发,一路逐渐到达舍卫城,在祇园精舍附近扎营,然后前往世尊那里,顶礼、问候寒暄之后,坐在一边。世尊为这三位朋友宣说了甜美的法谈。他们生起强烈的欢喜,便邀请世尊,第二天做了盛大的布施。再次邀请,又第二天……就这样布施了半个月后,他们趴在世尊脚边恳求:“请答应到我们的乡下去。”世尊说:“居士们,如来乐于住在空寂之处。”他们领会到:到这里就算是答应了。于是心想“世尊已经答应了”,便向十力世尊顶礼后离去。回去的路上,每走一由旬就建一座寺院,一路逐渐回到憍赏弥,到处说:“佛陀出世了。”那三个人也各自在自己的园林里花费巨资,为世尊建造居住的精舍。其中,鸡长者建造的叫鸡园,帕瓦利卡长者在芒果园中建造的叫帕瓦利卡芒果园,瞿师罗建造的叫科斯达园。这里所说“在瞿师罗长者建造的园林中”,就是指这件事。巴利
Tepi tayo seṭṭhino pañcahi pañcahi sakaṭasatehi sappimadhuphāṇitādīni ceva paṭṭunnadukūlādīni ca ādāya kosambito nikkhamitvā anupubbena sāvatthiṃ patvā jetavanasāmante khandhāvāraṃ bandhitvā satthu santikaṃ gantvā vanditvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Satthā tiṇṇampi sahāyakānaṃ madhuradhammakathaṃ kathesi. Te balavasomanassajātā satthāraṃ nimantetvā punadivase mahādānaṃ adaṃsu. Puna nimantetvā punadivaseti evaṃ aḍḍhamāsaṃ dānaṃ datvā, ‘‘amhākaṃ janapadaṃ āgamanāya paṭiññaṃ dethā’’ti pādamūle nipajjiṃsu. Bhagavā, ‘‘suññāgāre kho gahapatayo tathāgatā abhiramantī’’ti āha. Ettāvatā paṭiññā dinnā nāma hotīti gahapatayo sallakkhetvā dinnā no bhagavatā paṭiññāti dasabalaṃ vanditvā nikkhamitvā antarāmagge yojane yojane ṭhāne vihāraṃ kāretvā anupubbena kosambiṃ patvā, ‘‘loke buddho uppanno’’ti kathayiṃsu. Tayopi janā attano attano ārāme mahantaṃ dhanapariccāgaṃ katvā bhagavato vasanatthāya vihāre kārāpayiṃsu. Tattha kukkuṭaseṭṭhinā kārito kukkuṭārāmo nāma ahosi. Pāvārikaseṭṭhinā ambavane kārito pāvārikambavano nāma ahosi. Ghositena kārito ghositārāmo nāma ahosi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘ghositaseṭṭhinā kārite ārāme’’ti.
在“争论者”等词中,争吵的前期阶段叫做“争论”,已经生起这种争论的人,就是“争论者”。因为互相推搡等行为,争吵发展到顶点,已经爆发这种争吵的人,就是“争吵者”。说违逆对方的话,就是“争议”,陷入这种争议的人,就是“陷入争议者”。“以口舌”就是用话语当刺;“刺伤”就是刺戳对方。他们既不能使对方明白,也不接受对方的说服——意思是,即使把义理和理由摆出来,也不能让彼此了解。就算他们开始尝试说服对方,对方也不接受这种说服,就是不愿意了解。对于“使理解”这个词,道理也是一样,而这里的“使理解”其实就是“说服”的另一种说法。那么,他们为什么会成为争论者呢?只是因为一件极小的事。巴利
Bhaṇḍanajātātiādīsu kalahassa pubbabhāgo bhaṇḍanaṃ nāma, taṃ jātaṃ etesanti bhaṇḍanajātā. Hatthaparāmāsādivasena matthakaṃ patto kalaho jāto etesanti kalahajātā. Viruddhabhūtaṃ vādanti vivādaṃ, taṃ āpannāti vivādāpannā. Mukhasattīhīti vācāsattīhi. Vitudantāti vijjhantā. Te na ceva aññamaññaṃ saññāpenti na ca saññattiṃ upentīti te atthañca kāraṇañca dassetvā neva aññamaññaṃ jānāpenti. Sacepi saññāpetuṃ ārabhanti, tathāpi saññattiṃ na upenti, jānituṃ na icchantīti attho. Nijjhattiyāpi eseva nayo. Ettha ca nijjhattīti saññattivevacanamevetaṃ. Kasmā panete bhaṇḍanajātā ahesunti? Appamattakena kāraṇena.
据说有两位比丘住在同一座住处,一位是持律者,一位是经师。其中,那位经师比丘有一天进了厕所,把洗手用剩的水留在容器里就出来了。持律者随后进去,看见那水,出来后就问那位比丘:“贤友,这水是你留下的吗?”
“是的,贤友。”
“你不知道这样做是犯戒吗?”
“是的,我不知道。”
“贤友,这样做是犯戒的。”
“如果是犯戒,我就发露忏悔。”
“不过,贤友,如果是无意中、没有留意时做的,那就不算犯戒。”于是那位比丘对这项犯戒就形成了“不犯戒”的看法。巴利
Dve kira bhikkhū ekasmiṃ āvāse vasanti vinayadharo ca suttantiko ca. Tesu suttantiko bhikkhu ekadivasaṃ vaccakuṭiṃ paviṭṭho ācamanaudakāvasesaṃ bhājane ṭhapetvāva nikkhami. Vinayadharo pacchā paviṭṭho taṃ udakaṃ disvā nikkhamitvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ pucchi, āvuso, tayā idaṃ udakaṃ ṭhapitanti? Āma, āvusoti. Tvamettha āpattibhāvaṃ na jānāsīti? Āma na jānāmīti. Hoti, āvuso, ettha āpattīti. Sace hoti desessāmīti. Sace pana te, āvuso, asañcicca asatiyā kataṃ, natthi te āpattīti. So tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhi ahosi.
持律者对自己的弟子们说:“这位经师犯了戒,自己却不知道。”那些弟子见到经师的弟子们,就说:“你们的亲教师犯了戒,连犯戒这件事都搞不清楚。”他们回去把这话告诉了自己的亲教师。亲教师听了这样说:“这位持律者先前说‘无犯’,现在又说‘犯’,他这是打妄语。”他们又跑去说:“你们的亲教师才是打妄语的人。”就这样,双方你一句我一句,争吵越闹越大。上面这段话就是针对这件事说的。巴利
Vinayadharo attano nissitakānaṃ, ‘‘ayaṃ suttantiko āpattiṃ āpajjamānopi na jānātī’’ti ārocesi. Te tassa nissitake disvā – ‘‘tumhākaṃ upajjhāyo āpattiṃ āpajjitvāpi āpattibhāvaṃ na jānātī’’ti āhaṃsu. Te gantvā attano upajjhāyassa ārocesuṃ. So evamāha – ‘‘ayaṃ vinayadharo pubbe ‘anāpattī’ti vatvā idāni ‘āpattī’ti vadati, musāvādī eso’’ti. Te gantvā, ‘‘tumhākaṃ upajjhāyo musāvādī’’ti evaṃ aññamaññaṃ kalahaṃ vaḍḍhayiṃsu, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
“禀告世尊”这句话,说的是他讲了这样一番话:“尊者,在这里,憍赏弥的比丘们起了争执……”等等。他这样说,既不是因为偏爱谁,也不是想制造分裂,而是出于希望他们得到利益、希望他们得到安乐。据说这位比丘本身就是个促成和合的人,所以他心里想:“这些比丘已经起了争论,靠我或者其他比丘都没法让他们和合。在这包括天神的世间,除了那位无与伦比的世尊,再没有别人了——也许世尊能亲自去,或者把他们叫到跟前,为他们开示与忍辱和慈爱相关的可忆念之法,从而促成和合。”他就是怀着这种希望他们得到利益、希望他们得到安乐的心,才前去禀告世尊的。巴利
Bhagavantaṃ etadavocāti etaṃ, ‘‘idha, bhante, kosambiyaṃ bhikkhū bhaṇḍanajātā’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tañca kho neva piyakamyatāya na bhedādhippāyena, atha kho atthakāmatāya hitakāmatāya. Sāmaggikārako kiresa bhikkhu, tasmāssa etadahosi – ‘‘yathā ime bhikkhū vivādaṃ āraddhā, na sakkā mayā, nāpi aññena bhikkhunā samaggā kātuṃ, appeva nāma sadevake loke appaṭipuggalo bhagavā sayaṃ vā gantvā, attano vā santikaṃ pakkosāpetvā etesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ khantimettāpaṭisaṃyuttaṃ sāraṇīyadhammadesanaṃ kathetvā sāmaggiṃ kareyyā’’ti atthakāmatāya hitakāmatāya gantvā avoca.
492 比丘们,有这六种法是可念的:这段开示是接着前面因争吵和斗嘴而引出的。到这里,就出现了六种可念的法,所以这部《憍赏弥经》就是按照它内在的关联一路讲下来的。其中,“可念”是指值得记念,即使过了很久也不该忘掉。如果有人圆满这些法,就能让同梵行者觉得他可爱,所以叫“能生可爱”;能让他们尊重他,所以叫“能生尊重”。“为摄受”是为了收摄、团结;“为无诤”是为了不争吵;“为和合”是为了达到和合的状态;“为同一性”是为了达到同一性、消除差异。“导向”即成为。慈身业是以慈心所作的身业。语业、意业也是如此。这些是依比丘们的情况而说的,但在在家众中也是同样适用的。对于比丘们来说,以慈心圆满行仪之法,就叫慈身业。对于在家众来说,为了礼塔、礼菩提树、邀请僧团而前往,看见已入村乞食的比丘便迎接、接钵、设座、随行等,这样一类就是慈身业。巴利
492.Chayime, bhikkhave, dhammā sāraṇīyāti heṭṭhā kalahabhaṇḍanavasena desanā āraddhā. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne cha sāraṇīyā dhammā āgatāti evamidaṃ kosambiyasuttaṃ yathānusandhināva gataṃ hoti. Tattha sāraṇīyāti saritabbayuttā addhāne atikkantepi na pamussitabbā. Yo te dhamme pūreti, taṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyaṃ karontīti piyakaraṇā. Garuṃ karontīti garukaraṇā. Saṅgahāyāti saṅgahaṇatthāya. Avivādāyāti avivādanatthāya. Sāmaggiyāti samaggabhāvatthāya . Ekībhāvāyāti ekībhāvatthāya ninnānākaraṇāya. Saṃvattantīti bhavanti. Mettaṃ kāyakammanti mettacittena kattabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ. Vacīkammamanokammesupi eseva nayo. Imāni bhikkhūnaṃ vasena āgatāni, gihīsupi labbhantiyeva. Bhikkhūnañhi mettacittena ābhisamācārikadhammapūraṇaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Gihīnaṃ cetiyavandanatthāya bodhivandanatthāya saṅghanimantanatthāya gamanaṃ gāmaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭhe bhikkhū disvā paccuggamanaṃ pattapaṭiggahaṇaṃ āsanapaññāpanaṃ anugamananti evamādikaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma.
比丘以慈心为人讲解戒律的制定与学处、讲说禅修业处、说法,乃至讲说三藏佛语,这叫作慈语业。对在家众来说,当他们说“我们去礼敬佛塔,去礼敬菩提树,去听法,去供灯、供花环、供花作供养,我们受持三善行并奉行,我们布施食筹等物,布施雨安居的资具,今天我们要向僧团供养四种资具,我们邀请僧团。你们准备好嚼食等食物,铺设座位,备好饮用水,去迎接僧团,请他们坐在已铺好的座位上,然后大家要欢喜踊跃地服务”——像这样说话的时候,就叫作慈语业。巴利
Bhikkhūnaṃ mettacittena ācārapaññattisikkhāpadaṃ, kammaṭṭhānakathanaṃ dhammadesanā tepiṭakampi buddhavacanaṃ mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Gihīnañca, ‘‘cetiyavandanatthāya gacchāma, bodhivandanatthāya gacchāma, dhammassavanaṃ karissāma, padīpamālāpupphapūjaṃ karissāma, tīṇi sucaritāni samādāya vattissāma, salākabhattādīni dassāma, vassāvāsikaṃ dassāma, ajja saṅghassa cattāro paccaye dassāma, saṅghaṃ nimantetvā khādanīyādīni saṃvidahatha, āsanāni paññāpetha, pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhapetha, saṅghaṃ paccuggantvā ānetha, paññattāsane nisīdāpetvā chandajātā ussāhajātā veyyāvaccaṃ karothā’’tiādikathanakāle mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma.
比丘们清晨起来,料理身体、履行塔院等义务之后,在僻静处坐下,心里想:“愿这座精舍里的比丘们快乐,无怨,无害。”这叫作慈意业。在家众心里想:“愿尊者们快乐,无怨,无害。”这也叫作慈意业。巴利
Bhikkhūnaṃ pātova uṭṭhāya sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇavattādīni ca katvā vivittāsane nisīditvā, ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre bhikkhū sukhī hontu, averā abyāpajjhā’’ti cintanaṃ mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma. Gihīnaṃ ‘‘ayyā sukhī hontu, averā abyāpajjhā’’ti cintanaṃ mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma.
当面和背后,就是指在面前和在背后。其中,新学比丘在做衣等事务时,上前去帮忙、结成同伴,这叫做面前的慈身业。对上座比丘们来说,洗脚、礼拜、扇风、供养等种种合宜的敬重行为,也叫做面前的慈身业。不论新学还是上座,看到别人随意放置的木器等物品,不对它们心生轻慢,而是像自己放的东西一样收拾归位,这叫做背后的慈身业。用“天授长老”“帝须长老”这样带着敬意的称呼来说话,叫做面前的慈语业。而在精舍里见不到人时,打听“我们的天授长老在哪里?”
“我们的帝须长老什么时候回来?”——这样充满牵挂和关切的话,叫做背后的慈语业。用被慈爱浸润的双眼,以非常清净欢喜的面容注视对方,叫做面前的慈意业。心里作意“愿天授长老、帝须长老健康无病”,叫做背后的慈意业。巴利
Āvi ceva raho cāti sammukhā ca parammukhā ca. Tattha navakānaṃ cīvarakammādīsu sahāyabhāvūpagamanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Therānaṃ pana pādadhovanavandanabījanadānādibhedampi sabbaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Ubhayehipi dunnikkhittānaṃ dārubhaṇḍādīnaṃ tesu avamaññaṃ akatvā attanā dunnikkhittānaṃ viya paṭisāmanaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Devatthero tissattheroti evaṃ paggayha vacanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Vihāre asantaṃ pana paripucchantassa, kuhiṃ amhākaṃ devatthero, amhākaṃ tissatthero kadā nu kho āgamissatīti evaṃ mamāyanavacanaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Mettāsinehasiniddhāni pana nayanāni ummīletvā suppasannena mukhena olokanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma. Devatthero, tissatthero arogo hotu appābādhoti samannāharaṇaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma.
“利得”是指衣服等已经得到的资具。“如法”是指避开欺诈等邪命方式,通过如法、平等的乞食行仪而获得。“乃至仅落入钵中的那么一点”是指最低限度上,落入钵中、在钵里面的那两三汤匙乞食。“不分与而受用者”:这里有两种“分与”,即“物品分与”和“人别分与”。其中,以“我要给这么多,不给那么多”这样的心念来区分,叫“物品分与”;以“我要给这个人,不给那个人”这样的心念来区分,叫“人别分与”。这两种都不做,只是受用不分与的食物,这就叫“不分与而受用者”。巴利
Lābhāti cīvarādayo laddhapaccayā. Dhammikāti kuhanādibhedaṃ micchājīvaṃ vajjetvā dhammena samena bhikkhācariyavattena uppannā. Antamaso pattapariyāpannamattampīti pacchimakoṭiyā patte pariyāpannaṃ pattassa antogataṃ dvattikaṭacchubhikkhāmattampi. Appaṭivibhattabhogīti ettha dve paṭivibhattāni nāma āmisapaṭivibhattaṃ puggalapaṭivibhattañca. Tattha, ‘‘ettakaṃ dassāmi, ettakaṃ na dassāmī’’ti evaṃ cittena vibhajanaṃ āmisapaṭivibhattaṃ nāma. ‘‘Asukassa dassāmi, asukassa na dassāmī’’ti evaṃ cittena vibhajanaṃ pana puggalapaṭivibhattaṃ nāma. Tadubhayampi akatvā yo appaṭivibhattaṃ bhuñjati, ayaṃ appaṭivibhattabhogī nāma.
与持戒的共住梵行者共同受用的人,在这里,“共同受用者”的特点是:无论得到什么精美的食物,都不会怀着“用利养换取利养”的企图送给在家人,也不会自己享用;他在接受供养时,心里想的是“愿这东西归僧团共有”,带回去后敲响犍椎,然后才受用,把食物看成是僧团共有的东西。那么,这个随念法,谁能圆满,谁不能圆满呢?破戒的人首先就不能圆满,因为持戒的人不会接受他的东西。而戒行清净、不违越行仪的比丘,则能够圆满。巴利
Sīlavantehisabrahmacārīhi sādhāraṇabhogīti ettha sādhāraṇabhogino idaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ, yaṃ yaṃ paṇītaṃ labbhati, taṃ taṃ neva lābhena lābhaṃ jigīsanāmukhena gihīnaṃ deti, na attanā paribhuñjati; paṭiggaṇhantova saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotūti gahetvā gaṇḍiṃ paharitvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ saṅghasantakaṃ viya passati. Idaṃ pana sāraṇīyadhammaṃ ko pūreti, ko na pūretīti? Dussīlo tāva na pūreti. Na hi tassa santakaṃ sīlavantā gaṇhanti. Parisuddhasīlo pana vattaṃ akhaṇḍento pūreti.
这里说一下这个仪轨:如果有人指定对象来布施,把东西送给母亲、父亲、老师、亲教师等人,他只是把该给的东西给了出去,这并不成为随念法,只叫做“守着牵挂”。随念法只有对已经放下牵挂的人才相应。然而,如果做指定布施,就应该布施给病人、照顾病人的人、外来客僧、旅途中的比丘,以及刚出家还不知道怎么拿桑喀帝和钵的人。布施给他们之后,如果还有剩下的,不是从长老座位开始平均分,而是谁拿多少就给他多少。如果没有剩余了,就再去乞食,从长老座位开始,把得到的好食物一样一样送出去,剩下的自己才吃。因为经文说“布施给持戒者”,所以不布施给破戒者也是可以的。巴利
Tatridaṃ vattaṃ – yo hi odissakaṃ katvā mātu vā pitu vā ācariyupajjhāyādīnaṃ vā deti, so dātabbaṃ deti, sāraṇīyadhammo panassa na hoti, palibodhajagganaṃ nāma hoti. Sāraṇīyadhammo hi muttapalibodhasseva vaṭṭati, tena pana odissakaṃ dentena gilānagilānupaṭṭhākaāgantukagamikānañceva navapabbajitassa ca saṅghāṭipattaggahaṇaṃ ajānantassa dātabbaṃ. Etesaṃ datvā avasesaṃ therāsanato paṭṭhāya thokaṃ thokaṃ adatvā yo yattakaṃ gaṇhāti, tassa tattakaṃ dātabbaṃ. Avasiṭṭhe asati puna piṇḍāya caritvā therāsanato paṭṭhāya yaṃ yaṃ paṇītaṃ, taṃ taṃ datvā sesaṃ paribhuñjitabbaṃ, ‘‘sīlavantehī’’ti vacanato dussīlassa adātumpi vaṭṭati.
这种随念法在训练有素的僧团里很容易圆满,在没受过训练的僧团里则不然。因为在训练有素的僧团里,如果有人从别处得到食物,他不会拿;即使从别处得不到,也只拿适量,不会多拿。而且,这种随念法即使这样一次又一次去乞食,把每次得到的东西都布施出去,也要十二年才能圆满,不能少于这个时间。假如到了第十二年,一位修满随念法的比丘把装满乞食的钵放在斋堂里,自己去洗澡,僧团的长老问:“这是谁的钵?”有人回答:“是那位修满随念法者的。”长老说:“拿来。”于是把所有的乞食都分给大家吃完,只留下空钵。那位比丘回来看到空钵,心想:“他们一点都没给我留,全吃光了。”于是心生忧恼,随念法就破了,必须再修十二年才能圆满,这就像外道的别住法一样,一旦破了就得重新修满。然而,如果他想:“我真是有福报,真是大善利啊!同梵行者连问都不问我,就直接吃了我钵里的食物。”由此心生欢喜,那他的随念法才算真正圆满。巴利
Ayaṃ pana sāraṇīyadhammo susikkhitāya parisāya supūro hoti, no asikkhitāya parisāya. Susikkhitāya hi parisāya yo aññato labhati, so na gaṇhāti, aññato alabhantopi pamāṇayuttameva gaṇhāti, na atirekaṃ. Ayañca pana sāraṇīyadhammo evaṃ punappunaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā laddhaṃ laddhaṃ dentassāpi dvādasahi vassehi pūrati, na tato oraṃ. Sace hi dvādasamepi vasse sāraṇīyadhammapūrako piṇḍapātapūraṃ pattaṃ āsanasālāyaṃ ṭhapetvā nahāyituṃ gacchati, saṅghatthero ca kasseso pattoti? Sāraṇīyadhammapūrakassāti vutte – ‘‘āharatha na’’nti sabbaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ vicāretvā bhuñjitvā ca rittapattaṃ ṭhapeti. Atha so bhikkhu rittapattaṃ disvā, ‘‘mayhaṃ asesetvāva paribhuñjiṃsū’’ti domanassaṃ uppādeti, sāraṇīyadhammo bhijjati, puna dvādasa vassāni pūretabbo hoti, titthiyaparivāsasadiso hesa. Sakiṃ khaṇḍe jāte puna pūretabbova. Yo pana, ‘‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṃ vata me, yassa me pattagataṃ anāpucchāva sabrahmacārī paribhuñjantī’’ti somanassaṃ janeti, tassa puṇṇo nāma hoti.
这样,对于已经圆满修成随念法的人来说,既没有嫉妒,也没有悭吝,他为人所喜爱,容易得到生活所需;即使把钵里的食物分给别人,也不会减少;在分配物品的场合,总能得到最好的那份;遇到恐怖或饥荒时,天神们也会积极来护佑他。巴利
Evaṃ pūritasāraṇīyadhammassa pana neva issā, na macchariyaṃ hoti, so manussānaṃ piyo hoti, sulabhapaccayo; pattagatamassa dīyamānampi na khīyati, bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ labhati, bhaye vā chātake vā sampatte devatā ussukkaṃ āpajjanti.
这里有几个例子。据说,住在山洞山(勒那山)的帝萨长老,依止大吉里村而住。有五十位大长老要去龙岛礼塔,路过大吉里村时进村乞食,却什么都没得到,就出来了。长老正要进村,看见他们,问道:“尊者,得到了吗?”他们回答:“贤友,我们走了一圈(也没得到)。”长老知道他们没得到,就说:“尊者,等我回来之前,请就在这里等着。”他们说:“贤友,我们五十个人连沾湿钵底那么一点都没得到。”长老说:“尊者,常住在这里的人是有本事的,就算乞不到食,也懂得乞食路上的实际情况。”大长老们就留下了。长老进了村。就在村口第一户人家,那位大近事女已经准备好了乳饭,正望着长老来的方向站着。长老一到门口,她就把钵盛满,供养了他。长老拿着这些食物来到长老们跟前,对僧团长老说:“尊者,请拿吧。”僧团长老心想:“我们这么多人什么都没得到,这个人却这么快就拿着食物回来了,这是怎么回事?”于是看了看其他人的脸色。长老从他们看人的样子就明白了,说道:“这是如法公平得来的钵食,尊者,请放心拿吧。”于是从首座开始,给所有人都按需要分足了,自己也吃饱了。巴利
Tatrimāni vatthūni – leṇagirivāsī tissatthero kira mahāgirigāmaṃ upanissāya vasati. Paññāsa mahātherā nāgadīpaṃ cetiyavandanatthāya gacchantā girigāme piṇḍāya caritvā kiñci aladdhā nikkhamiṃsu. Thero pavisanto te disvā pucchi – ‘‘laddhaṃ, bhante’’ti? Vicarimhā, āvusoti. So aladdhabhāvaṃ ñatvā āha – ‘‘yāvāhaṃ, bhante, āgacchāmi, tāva idheva hothā’’ti. Mayaṃ, āvuso, paññāsa janā pattatemanamattampi na labhimhāti. Nevāsikā nāma, bhante, paṭibalā honti, alabhantāpi bhikkhācāramaggasabhāvaṃ jānantīti. Therā āgamiṃsu. Thero gāmaṃ pāvisi. Dhurageheyeva mahāupāsikā khīrabhattaṃ sajjetvā theraṃ olokayamānā ṭhitā therassa dvāraṃ sampattasseva pattaṃ pūretvā adāsi. So taṃ ādāya therānaṃ santikaṃ gantvā, ‘‘gaṇhatha, bhante’’ti saṅghattheramāha. Thero, ‘‘amhehi ettakehi kiñci na laddhaṃ, ayaṃ sīghameva gahetvā āgato, kiṃ nu kho’’ti sesānaṃ mukhaṃ olokesi. Thero olokanākāreneva ñatvā – ‘‘dhammena samena laddhapiṇḍapāto, nikkukkuccā gaṇhatha bhante’’tiādito paṭṭhāya sabbesaṃ yāvadatthaṃ datvā attanāpi yāvadatthaṃ bhuñji.
饭后,长老们问他:“贤友,你是什么时候证悟出世间法的?”他说:“尊者,我没有出世间法。”又问:“贤友,你得到了禅那吗?”他说:“尊者,这个我也没有。”又问:“贤友,难道你有神通吗?”他说:“尊者,我所圆满的是随念法。自从我圆满那个法以来,就算有十万位比丘,我钵里的食物也不会耗尽。”长老们说:“萨度,萨度,善士,这确实与你相称。”以上就是关于“钵里的食物不会耗尽”这件事。巴利
Atha naṃ bhattakiccāvasāne therā pucchiṃsu – ‘‘kadā, āvuso, lokuttaradhammaṃ paṭivijjhī’’ti? Natthi me, bhante, lokuttaradhammoti. Jhānalābhīsi, āvusoti? Etampi me, bhante, natthīti. Nanu, āvuso, pāṭihāriyanti? Sāraṇīyadhammo me, bhante, pūrito, tassa me dhammassa pūritakālato paṭṭhāya sacepi bhikkhusatasahassaṃ hoti, pattagataṃ na khīyatīti. Sādhu sādhu, sappurisa, anucchavikamidaṃ tuyhanti. Idaṃ tāva pattagataṃ na khīyatīti ettha vatthu.
这位长老有一次去支提山,当时那里正举行大山庄严大供养。他走到分配施物的地方,问:“这里最好的东西是什么?”有人回答:“有两件衣料,尊者。”长老就说:“这些该归我。”一位大臣听到这话,就去禀告国王:“有个年轻比丘这样说。”国王说:“年轻比丘会有这样的心思;细软的衣料才适合上座长老们。”国王说了句“我要供养上座长老们”,就把那两件衣料放在一边。等到比丘僧团按顺序站好,国王开始供养时,放在最上面的那两件衣料却不落到他手里,落下来的是别的衣料。可轮到那位年轻比丘受供时,那两件衣料却落到了他手中。国王把衣料放在他手里,看了看大臣的脸,然后请年轻比丘坐下,供养完毕,等僧众散去后,国王坐到年轻比丘身边,问:“尊者,您是什么时候证悟这个法的?”那位比丘连以迂回的方式都不说不实之语,直接答道:“大王,我没有出世间法。”国王问:“尊者,您之前不是说过吗?”他答:“是的,大王。我是可忆念法的圆满者。自从我圆满这个法以来,在分配施物的地方,最好的那份就会落到我手里。”国王说:“萨度,萨度,尊者,这确实与您相称。”说完礼敬而去。这就是“在分配施物之处得到最好那份”的事例。巴利
Ayameva pana thero cetiyapabbate giribhaṇḍamahāpūjāya dānaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā, ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne kiṃ varabhaṇḍa’’nti pucchati. Dve sāṭakā, bhanteti. Ete mayhaṃ pāpuṇissantīti. Taṃ sutvā amacco rañño ārocesi – ‘‘eko daharo evaṃ vadatī’’ti. ‘‘Daharassevaṃ cittaṃ, mahātherānaṃ pana sukhumasāṭakā vaṭṭantī’’ti vatvā, ‘‘mahātherānaṃ dassāmī’’ti ṭhapesi. Tassa bhikkhusaṅghe paṭipāṭiyā ṭhite dentassa matthake ṭhapitāpi te sāṭakā hatthaṃ nārohanti, aññeva ārohanti. Daharassa dānakāle pana hatthaṃ āruḷhā. So tassa hatthe ṭhapetvā amaccassa mukhaṃ oloketvā daharaṃ nisīdāpetvā dānaṃ datvā saṅghaṃ vissajjetvā daharassa santike nisīditvā, ‘‘kadā, bhante, imaṃ dhammaṃ paṭivijjhitthā’’ti āha. So pariyāyenapi asantaṃ avadanto, ‘‘natthi mayhaṃ, mahārāja, lokuttaradhammo’’ti āha. Nanu, bhante, pubbeva avacutthāti? Āma, mahārāja, sāraṇīyadhammapūrako ahaṃ, tassa me dhammassa pūritakālato paṭṭhāya bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ pāpuṇātīti. Sādhu sādhu, bhante, anucchavikamidaṃ tumhākanti vanditvā pakkāmi. Idaṃ bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ pāpuṇātīti ettha vatthu.
婆罗门提萨怖畏事件发生时,住在兄弟村的居民们没告诉长老尼就自己逃走了。长老尼在清晨时分对年轻的比丘尼们说:“这个村子安静得有点过分,你们先去查看一下。”她们去了之后,发现所有人都已经离开了,就回来报告长老尼。长老尼听后说:“你们不用去想他们走的事,只管在自己的诵习、问法和如理作意上用功就好。”说完,到了乞食的时间,她穿好袈裟,和另外十一位比丘尼一起来到村口的榕树下站着。住在树上的天神给这十二位比丘尼布施了团食,然后说:“尊者们,别去别处了,以后就常来这里吧。”长老尼有个弟弟,是一位名叫那伽的长老。他心想:“这里太危险了,没法再待下去,我们到对岸去吧。”于是他和另外十一个人一起从自己的住处出发,来到兄弟村,想见长老尼一面就走。长老尼听说“长老们来了”,就走到他们跟前,问:“尊者们,有什么事?”他把事情经过说了一遍。长老尼说:“今天就在寺院里住一天,明天再走。”长老们就去了寺院。巴利
Brāhmaṇatissabhaye pana bhātaragāmavāsino nāgattheriyā anārocetvāva palāyiṃsu. Therī paccūsakāle, ‘‘ativiya appanigghoso gāmo, upadhāretha tāvā’’ti daharabhikkhuniyo āha. Tā gantvā sabbesaṃ gatabhāvaṃ ñatvā āgamma theriyā ārocesuṃ. Sā sutvā, ‘‘mā tumhe tesaṃ gatabhāvaṃ cintayittha, attano uddesaparipucchāyonisomanasikāresuyeva yogaṃ karothā’’ti vatvā bhikkhācāravelāya pārupitvā attadvādasamā gāmadvāre nigrodharukkhamūle aṭṭhāsi. Rukkhe adhivatthā devatā dvādasannampi bhikkhunīnaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ datvā, ‘‘ayye, aññattha mā gacchatha, niccaṃ idheva ethā’’ti āha. Theriyā pana kaniṭṭhabhātā nāgatthero nāma atthi. So, ‘‘mahantaṃ bhayaṃ, na sakkā idha yāpetuṃ, paratīraṃ gamissāmāti attadvādasamova attano vasanaṭṭhānā nikkhanto theriṃ disvā gamissāmī’’ti bhātaragāmaṃ āgato. Therī, ‘‘therā āgatā’’ti sutvā tesaṃ santikaṃ gantvā, kiṃ ayyāti pucchi. So taṃ pavattiṃ ācikkhi. Sā, ‘‘ajja ekadivasaṃ vihāreyeva vasitvā sveva gamissathā’’ti āha. Therā vihāraṃ agamaṃsu.
第二天,长老尼在树下乞食后,来到长老面前,说:“请受用这份钵食。”长老说:“长老尼,够吃了。”说完就沉默地站着。长老尼又说:“贤者,这是如法的钵食,请受用吧,不要有顾虑。”长老还是说:“长老尼,够吃了。”她便拿起钵抛向空中,钵停在虚空中。长老说:“就算它停在七棵棕榈树那么高的地方,那也还是比丘尼的食物,长老尼。”说完,他又说:“恐惧并不是任何时候都存在的。等恐惧平息后,在讲说圣种法时,如果有人心里这样指责我:‘这位常行乞食的比丘,是靠吃比丘尼的食物度日的’,我肯定受不了。比丘尼们,你们要保持不放逸。”说完,他就上路了。巴利
Therī punadivase rukkhamūle piṇḍāya caritvā theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā, ‘‘imaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti āha. Thero, ‘‘vaṭṭissati therī’’ti vatvā tuṇhī aṭṭhāsi. Dhammiko tātā piṇḍapāto kukkuccaṃ akatvā paribhuñjathāti. Vaṭṭissati therīti. Sā pattaṃ gahetvā ākāse khipi, patto ākāse aṭṭhāsi. Thero, ‘‘sattatālamatte ṭhitampi bhikkhunībhattameva, therīti vatvā bhayaṃ nāma sabbakālaṃ na hoti, bhaye vūpasante ariyavaṃsaṃ kathayamāno, ‘bho piṇḍapātika bhikkhunībhattaṃ bhuñjitvā vītināmayitthā’ti cittena anuvadiyamāno santhambhetuṃ na sakkhissāmi, appamattā hotha theriyo’’ti maggaṃ āruhi.
树神也在心里盘算:“如果这位长老接受长老尼手里的团食,我就不让他折返;如果他不接受,我就让他折返。”她怀着这个念头站在那里,看见长老要走,就从树上下来,说:“尊者,把钵给我。”她接过钵,把长老带回树下,铺好座位,供养团食,等他吃完饭、让他作出承诺,然后照顾十二位比丘尼和十二位比丘,整整七年。这就是“天神发起精勤”的那件事。在那件事里,那位长老尼正是具足六和敬法的人。巴利
Rukkhadevatāpi, ‘‘sace thero theriyā hatthato piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjissati, na naṃ nivattessāmi, sace pana na paribhuñjissati, nivattessāmī’’ti cintayamānā ṭhatvā therassa gamanaṃ disvā rukkhā oruyha pattaṃ, bhante, dethāti pattaṃ gahetvā theraṃ rukkhamūlaṃyeva ānetvā āsanaṃ paññāpetvā piṇḍapātaṃ datvā katabhattakiccaṃ paṭiññaṃ kāretvā dvādasa bhikkhuniyo, dvādasa ca bhikkhū satta vassāni upaṭṭhahi. Idaṃ devatā ussukkaṃ āpajjantīti ettha vatthu, tatra hi therī sāraṇīyadhammapūrikā ahosi.
在“不破”等说法中:如果一个人在七种犯戒聚的开头或结尾犯了学处,他的戒就像衣服边缘破了的布,叫做“破”。如果是在中间犯的,他的戒就像衣服中间破了个洞的布,叫做“穿”。如果接连犯了两三条,他的戒就像一头属于黑红色等颜色之一的母牛,在背上或肚子上冒出一块异色,叫做“斑”。如果是一段一段间隔着犯的,他的戒就像牛身上东一块西一块散布着异色斑点的牛,叫做“杂”。如果所有学处完全没有犯,这些戒就叫做“不破、不穿、不斑、不杂”。这些戒能让人从渴爱的奴役中解脱出来,获得自由的身份,所以叫“自在”。因为被佛陀等智者称赞,所以叫“智者所赞”。因为不被渴爱和邪见执取,也不会被任何人抓住把柄说“你曾经犯过某某戒”,所以叫“不被执取”。它们能导向近行定或安止定,所以叫做“能引生定”。“以戒同分而住”的意思是:与在各个地方居住的比丘们达到同等的戒而共住。因为入流者等圣者的戒,即使他们住在大海彼岸或天界,与其他入流者等圣者的戒也是完全相同的,在道相应的戒上没有差别。就是针对这个说的。巴利
Akhaṇḍānītiādīsu yassa sattasu āpattikkhandhesu ādimhi vā ante vā sikkhāpadaṃ bhinnaṃ hoti, tassa sīlaṃ pariyante chinnasāṭako viya khaṇḍaṃ nāma. Yassa pana vemajjhe bhinnaṃ, tassa majjhe chiddasāṭako viya chiddaṃ nāma hoti. Yassa pana paṭipāṭiyā dve tīṇi bhinnāni, tassa piṭṭhiyaṃ vā kucchiyaṃ vā uṭṭhitena visabhāgavaṇṇena kāḷarattādīnaṃ aññataravaṇṇā gāvī viya sabalaṃ nāma hoti. Yassa pana antarantarā bhinnāni, tassa antarantarā visabhāgabinducitrā gāvī viya kammāsaṃ nāma hoti. Yassa pana sabbena sabbaṃ abhinnāni, tassa tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni nāma honti. Tāni panetāni taṇhādāsabyato mocetvā bhujissabhāvakaraṇato bhujissāni. Buddhādīhi viññūhi pasatthattā viññuppasatthāni. Taṇhādiṭṭhīhi aparāmaṭṭhattā, ‘‘idaṃ nāma tvaṃ āpannapubbo’’ti kenaci parāmaṭṭhuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā ca aparāmaṭṭhāni. Upacārasamādhiṃ vā appanāsamādhiṃ vā saṃvattayantīti samādhisaṃvattanikānīti vuccanti. Sīlasāmaññagatoviharatīti tesu tesu disābhāgesu viharantehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ samānabhāvūpagatasīlo viharati . Sotāpannādīnañhi sīlaṃ samuddantarepi devalokepi vasantānaṃ aññesaṃ sotāpannādīnaṃ sīlena samānameva hoti, natthi maggasīle nānattaṃ, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
这里说的“见”,是指与道相应的正见。“圣”是指没有过失。“能出离”是指它能导向出离。“对如此修行的人”是指依照这种方式去实践的人。“为了灭尽苦”是为了灭尽一切苦。“以见同分而住”是指达到同等的见地而安住。“顶”是指最上、最高的部分。“能总摄一切椽”是指能收摄、统合一切椽;“能聚合一切椽”是指把一切椽连结、拼合成一个整体,也就是“集合”的意思。“那就是顶”说的是被称为尖顶屋顶的那个顶。因为五层等殿堂都要靠屋顶才能立住,屋顶一旦塌落,从泥土等基础开始,一切都会跟着倒塌,所以才这样说。“正是如此”的意思是:就像屋顶对于尖顶屋那样,在这些值得忆念的法当中,这个圣见也是最高的、能总摄一切、能聚合一切的法,应当这样理解。巴利
Yāyaṃ diṭṭhīti maggasampayuttā sammādiṭṭhi. Ariyāti niddosā. Niyyātīti niyyānikā. Takkarassāti yo tathākārī hoti. Dukkhakkhayāyāti sabbadukkhakkhayatthaṃ. Diṭṭhisāmaññagatoti samānadiṭṭhibhāvaṃ upagato hutvā viharati. Agganti jeṭṭhakaṃ. Sabbagopānasiyo saṅgaṇhātīti saṅgāhikaṃ. Sabbagopānasīnaṃ saṅghāṭaṃ karotīti saṅghāṭanikaṃ. Saṅghāṭaniyanti attho. Yadidaṃ kūṭanti yametaṃ kūṭāgārakaṇṇikāsaṅkhātaṃ kūṭaṃ nāma. Pañcabhūmikādipāsādā hi kūṭabaddhāva tiṭṭhanti. Yasmiṃ patite mattikaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbe patanti. Tasmā evamāha. Evameva khoti yathā kūṭaṃ kūṭāgārassa, evaṃ imesampi sāraṇīyadhammānaṃ yā ayaṃ ariyā diṭṭhi, sā aggā ca saṅgāhikā ca saṅghāṭaniyā cāti daṭṭhabbā.
493 比丘们,那么,“这是哪种见”在这里是什么意思呢?比丘们,这里所说的“入流道之见”——它是圣的、能导向出离的,修行它的人能因此正确地走向苦的彻底灭尽——这个见是怎样、由于什么原因而能导向出离呢?这就是这段的意思。“心被缠缚”仅仅到这个程度,就叫做心仍然被缠缚。这个道理在所有地方都一样。“我的心善加安立”意思是我的心被很好地安放好了。“为了觉悟诸谛”是为了觉悟四种谛。“圣”等词中,那种智因为是圣者们才有的,不是凡夫有的,所以称为“圣”。而只有那些具有出世间法的人才有它,别人没有,所以称为“出世间”。又因为凡夫完全没有它,所以称为“不与凡夫共通”。这个道理在每一处都是如此。巴利
493.Kathañca, bhikkhave, yāyaṃ diṭṭhīti ettha, bhikkhave, yāyaṃ sotāpattimaggadiṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyāti vuttā, sā kathaṃ kena kāraṇena niyyātīti attho. Pariyuṭṭhitacittova hotīti ettāvatāpi pariyuṭṭhitacittoyeva nāma hotīti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Suppaṇihitaṃ me mānasanti mayhaṃ cittaṃ suṭṭhu ṭhapitaṃ. Saccānaṃ bodhāyāti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ bodhatthāya. Ariyantiādīsu taṃ ñāṇaṃ yasmā ariyānaṃ hoti, na puthujjanānaṃ, tasmā ariyanti vuttaṃ. Yesaṃ pana lokuttaradhammopi atthi, tesaṃyeva hoti, na aññesaṃ, tasmā lokuttaranti vuttaṃ. Puthujjanānaṃ pana abhāvato asādhāraṇaṃ puthujjanehīti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sabbavāresu.
494 我得到直接的止,意思是:我在自己的心里得到了止。得寂灭也是同样的道理。这里,“止”指心一境性,“寂灭”指烦恼的止息。巴利
494.Labhāmi paccattaṃ samathanti attano citte samathaṃ labhāmīti attho. Nibbutiyampi eseva nayo. Ettha ca samathoti ekaggatā. Nibbutīti kilesavūpasamo.
495 对于这样的见,也就是指这样的入流道之见。巴利
495.Tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyāti evarūpāya sotāpattimaggadiṭṭhiyā.
496 “法性”是指它的本性。“这是法性”就是说,这是它的本性。“出罪显现”是指通过僧团甘马或者通过发露,出罪的情况显现出来。因为圣弟子犯戒的时候,犯重罪就像建小屋那样,犯轻罪就像同宿那样,而且只是无心地犯,不是故意去犯,犯了之后也不覆藏。所以才说“于是他就迅速地……”等等。“年幼”就是年少。“童子”就是年纪不大。“迟钝”是因为眼根、耳根等迟钝。“仰卧婴儿”是因为年纪太小而仰面躺着,意思是还不能向右侧卧或向左侧卧。“踩到火炭”是指用手或脚碰到了伸向各处的火炭。一般人碰到的时候,手不会马上被烧伤,比如确实有人用手拿起火炭,一边翻转一边还能走很远。但婴儿的手脚非常细嫩,一碰到就会被烫伤,发出“咝”的声音并赶紧缩回来,所以这里用婴儿来举例。年纪大的人即使被烫也能忍住,而这个人忍不住,所以也用婴儿来举例。“发露”是指如果有能接受发露的同分比丘在场,哪怕只过了一天或一夜也不拖延,在夜里只要具备四支条件,就前往同分比丘的住处如实发露。巴利
496.Dhammatāyāti sabhāvena. Dhammatā esāti sabhāvo esa. Vuṭṭhānaṃ paññāyatīti saṅghakammavasena vā desanāya vā vuṭṭhānaṃ dissati. Ariyasāvako hi āpattiṃ āpajjanto garukāpattīsu kuṭikārasadisaṃ, lahukāpattīsu sahaseyyādisadisaṃ acittakāpattiṃyeva āpajjati, tampi asañcicca, no sañcicca, āpannaṃ na paṭicchādeti. Tasmā atha kho naṃ khippamevātiādimāha. Daharoti taruṇo. Kumāroti na mahallako. Mandoti cakkhusotādīnaṃ mandatāya mando. Uttānaseyyakoti atidaharatāya uttānaseyyako, dakkhiṇena vā vāmena vā passena sayituṃ na sakkotīti attho. Aṅgāraṃ akkamitvāti ito cito ca pasāritena hatthena vā pādena vā phusitvā. Evaṃ phusantānaṃ pana manussānaṃ na sīghaṃ hattho jhāyati, tathā hi ekacce hatthena aṅgāraṃ gahetvā parivattamānā dūrampi gacchanti. Daharassa pana hatthapādā sukhumālā honti, so phuṭṭhamatteneva dayhamāno cirīti saddaṃ karonto khippaṃ paṭisaṃharati, tasmā idha daharova dassito. Mahallako ca dayhantopi adhivāseti, ayaṃ pana adhivāsetuṃ na sakkoti. Tasmāpi daharova dassito. Desetīti āpattipaṭiggāhake sabhāgapuggale sati ekaṃ divasaṃ vā rattiṃ vā anadhivāsetvā rattiṃ caturaṅgepi tame sabhāgabhikkhuno vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā desetiyeva.
497 “高低之事”就是指高的和低的事情。“该做什么”是说,像这样说了“我该做什么”之后,所应当做的事。其中,高的事是指做衣服、染色,在佛塔上涂灰泥,以及在伍波萨他堂、塔庙、菩提树屋中应当做的种种工作等等。低的事是指洗脚、涂油等琐碎小事;或者也可以说,在佛塔上涂灰泥等是高的事,而在同一个地方煮染料水、取水、制作刷子、系蔓藤等则是低的事。“发起精勤”是指已经进入精勤努力的状态,承担起应当做的事。“有热切的期望”就是怀有深切的愿望。“食嫩草”是指一边拔草一边吃。“回顾小牛”是指一再地回头看小牛。就像母牛在树林里,小牛从别处来到某个地方卧下,母牛就不会远离卧在那里的小牛,只在附近走动吃草,然后抬起脖子,一心一意只注视着小牛。同样地,入流者在办理种种事务时,不论高低,他的心都倾向于那件事,毫不松懈,以炽盛的意愿和深切的期望去做。巴利
497.Uccāvacānīti uccanīcāni. Kiṃ karaṇīyānīti kiṃ karomīti evaṃ vatvā kattabbakammāni. Tattha uccakammaṃ nāma cīvarassa karaṇaṃ rajanaṃ cetiye sudhākammaṃ uposathāgāracetiyagharabodhigharesu kattabbakammanti evamādi. Avacakammaṃ nāma pādadhovanamakkhanādikhuddakakammaṃ, atha vā cetiye sudhākammādi uccakammaṃ nāma. Tattheva kasāvapacanaudakānayanakucchakaraṇa niyyāsabandhanādi avacakammaṃ nāma. Ussukkaṃ āpanno hotīti ussukkabhāvaṃ kattabbataṃ paṭipanno hoti. Tibbāpekkho hotīti bahalapatthano hoti. Thambañcaālumpatīti tiṇañca ālumpamānā khādati. Vacchakañca apacinātīti vacchakañca apaloketi. Taruṇavacchā hi gāvī araññe ekato āgataṃ vacchakaṃ ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nipannaṃ pahāya dūraṃ na gacchati, vacchakassa āsannaṭṭhāne caramānā tiṇaṃ ālumpitvā gīvaṃ ukkhipitvā ekantaṃ vacchakameva ca viloketi, evameva sotāpanno uccāvacāni kiṃ karaṇīyāni karonto tanninno hoti, asithilapūrako tibbacchando bahalapatthano hutvāva karoti.
这件事的经过是这样的:据说,大塔庙正在做涂灰泥的工程时,有一位圣弟子一手拿着灰浆罐,一手扶着腰,心想“我要去涂灰泥”,就走上了塔庙的广场。有一位身体粗壮的比丘走过去,站在长老面前。长老心想:“如果顾念别人,就会成为障碍。”于是就从那个地方换到了另一个地方。那位比丘也跟着到了那里。长老又换到别处,就这样换了好几个地方之后,对他说:“善士,塔庙广场这么大,难道你在别的地方找不到位置吗?”但那位比丘还是没有离开。巴利
Tatridaṃ vatthu – mahācetiye kira sudhākamme kariyamāne eko ariyasāvako ekena hatthena sudhābhājanaṃ, ekena kucchaṃ gahetvā sudhākammaṃ karissāmīti cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ āruḷho. Eko kāyadaḷhibahulo bhikkhu gantvā therassa santike aṭṭhāsi. Thero aññasmiṃ sati papañco hotīti tasmā ṭhānā aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ gato. Sopi bhikkhu tattheva agamāsi. Thero puna aññaṃ ṭhānanti evaṃ katipayaṭṭhāne āgataṃ, – ‘‘sappurisa mahantaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ kiṃ aññasmiṃ ṭhāne okāsaṃ na labhathā’’ti āha. Na itaro pakkāmīti.
498 具备力量,就是具有体力。用心,就是生起想要听法的心,也就是成为一个有需求的人。作意,就是放在心里。以全部心力专注,就是连一点点散乱都不产生,用整个心去专注。倾耳,就是把耳朵竖起来听。确实,圣弟子们喜欢听法,他们到了说法的地方坐下后,不会打瞌睡,不会跟任何人闲聊,也不会心散乱;他们就像在享用不死之法一样,对听法从不满足,一直到天亮。因此这样说。巴利
498.Balatāya samannāgatoti balena samannāgato. Aṭṭhiṃ katvāti atthikabhāvaṃ katvā, atthiko hutvāti attho. Manasikatvāti manasmiṃ karitvā. Sabbacetasā samannāharitvāti appamattakampi vikkhepaṃ akaronto sakalacittena samannāharitvā. Ohitasototi ṭhapitasoto. Ariyasāvakā hi piyadhammassavanā honti, dhammassavanaggaṃ gantvā niddāyamānā vā yena kenaci saddhiṃ sallapamānā vā vikkhittacittā vā na nisīdanti, atha kho amataṃ paribhuñjantā viya atittāva honti dhammassavane, atha aruṇaṃ uggacchati. Tasmā evamāha.
500 “法性已被善加审察”的意思是:自性已被好好地审察。“为了证悟入流果”是工具格的表达,意思是“以证悟入流果的智慧”。如此“具足七支”,就是以此七种大省察智而具足。这是诸位导师一致的说法。因为出世间道确实不存在多个心识刹那的情况。巴利
500.Dhammatāsusamanniṭṭhā hotīti sabhāvo suṭṭhu samannesito hoti. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāyāti karaṇavacanaṃ , sotāpattiphalasacchikatañāṇenāti attho. Evaṃ sattaṅgasamannāgatoti evaṃ imehi sattahi mahāpaccavekkhaṇañāṇehi samannāgato. Ayaṃ tāva ācariyānaṃ samānakathā. Lokuttaramaggo hi bahucittakkhaṇiko nāma natthi.
诡辩者却说:并不存在所谓只占一个心识刹那的道,因为经里有“这样修习七年”的说法,所以修习道可以长达七年。他又说,烦恼是迅速断除的,是靠七种智断除的。那就应该对他说:请拿出经文来。他肯定找不到别的经文,只会引出这一段:“这是他证得的第一智,这是他证得的第二智……乃至这是他证得的第七智。”然后应该问他:这部经是应引伸其义,还是义已决定?他会说:“义已决定,经文怎么说,意思就是那样。”接着应该问他:“‘法性善审察,是为了证悟入流果’这句是什么意思?”他肯定会说:“意思是为了证悟入流果。”然后再问他:“是具足道的人证果,还是具足果的人证果?”他如果明白,就会说:“是具足果的人证果。”这时就应该对他说:“诸比丘,这样具足七支的圣弟子,就是具足入流果的人。照你这么说,圣弟子不用修习道,就像青蛙一样跳过去,直接取证果位了。不要因为自己拿到一部经,就随便乱说。回答问题的人,必须亲近导师而住,学习佛语,通达义理之后才能作答。”应当使他信解:“这七种智只是圣弟子的省察智,出世间道并不存在许多心识刹那,它只占一个心识刹那。”他如果能接受,就随他接受。如果不能接受,就对他说:“你一早到寺院去喝粥吧。”然后把他打发走。其余各处都很浅显易懂。巴利
Vitaṇḍavādī pana ekacittakkhaṇiko nāma maggo natthi, ‘‘evaṃ bhāveyya satta vassānī’’ti hi vacanato sattapi vassāni maggabhāvanā honti. Kilesā pana lahu chijjantā sattahi ñāṇehi chijjantīti vadati. So suttaṃ āharāti vattabbo, addhā aññaṃ suttaṃ apassanto, ‘‘idamassa paṭhamaṃ ñāṇaṃ adhigataṃ hoti, idamassa dutiyaṃ ñāṇaṃ…pe… idamassa sattamaṃ ñāṇaṃ adhigataṃ hotī’’ti imameva āharitvā dassessati. Tato vattabbo kiṃ panidaṃ suttaṃ neyyatthaṃ nītatthanti. Tato vakkhati – ‘‘nītatthatthaṃ, yathāsuttaṃ tatheva attho’’ti. So vattabbo – ‘‘dhammatā susamanniṭṭhā hoti sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāyāti ettha ko attho’’ti? Addhā sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāyatthoti vakkhati. Tato pucchitabbo, ‘‘maggasamaṅgī phalaṃ sacchikaroti, phalasamaṅgī’’ti. Jānanto, ‘‘phalasamaṅgī sacchikarotī’’ti vakkhati. Tato vattabbo, – ‘‘evaṃ sattaṅgasamannāgato kho, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako sotāpattiphalasamannāgato hotīti idha maggaṃ abhāvetvā maṇḍūko viya uppatitvā ariyasāvako phalameva gaṇhissati. Mā suttaṃ me laddhanti yaṃ vā taṃ vā avaca. Pañhaṃ vissajjentena nāma ācariyasantike vasitvā buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā attharasaṃ viditvā vattabbaṃ hotī’’ti. ‘‘Imāni satta ñāṇāni ariyasāvakassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇāneva, lokuttaramaggo bahucittakkhaṇiko nāma natthi, ekacittakkhaṇikoyevā’’ti saññāpetabbo. Sace sañjānāti sañjānātu. No ce sañjānāti, ‘‘gaccha pātova vihāraṃ pavisitvā yāguṃ pivāhī’’ti uyyojetabbo. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
《梵天邀请经》注释巴利
9. Brahmanimantanikasuttavaṇṇanā
501 “如是我闻”这句,说的是《梵天邀请经》。其中,“邪恶的恶见”指低劣的常见。“这是常”——与色身一起的梵天住处本是无常的,却把它说成是“常”。“恒久”等词都是它的同义词。其中,“恒久”是坚牢;“常住”是永远存在;“唯”是完整无缺;“不死殁法”是具有不灭的性质。在“此实在不生”等句中,这里他是想表达:在此处,没有任何会出生、衰老、死亡、殁没或再生的东西。而“更无其他出离”,是说除了这个与色身一起的梵天住处之外,再没有别的出离了。就这样,他心中根深柢固的常见便生起了。而持这种见解的人,把上面的三禅地、四道、四果以及涅槃,全都否定了。“随无明者”,是指被无明伴随、具有无明,成为无知、盲昧的人。“岂有此理”,是一个感叹词。巴利
501.Evaṃme sutanti brahmanimantanikasuttaṃ. Tattha pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigatanti lāmakā sassatadiṭṭhi. Idaṃ niccanti idaṃ saha kāyena brahmaṭṭhānaṃ aniccaṃ ‘‘nicca’’nti vadati. Dhuvādīni tasseva vevacanāni. Tattha dhuvanti thiraṃ. Sassatanti sadā vijjamānaṃ. Kevalanti akhaṇḍaṃ sakalaṃ. Acavanadhammanti acavanasabhāvaṃ. Idañhi na jāyatītiādīsu imasmiṃ ṭhāne koci jāyanako vā jīyanako vā mīyanako vā cavanako vā upapajjanako vā natthīti sandhāya vadati. Ito ca panaññanti ito saha kāyakā brahmaṭṭhānā uttari aññaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāma natthīti evamassa thāmagatā sassatadiṭṭhi uppannā hoti. Evaṃvādī pana so upari tisso jhānabhūmiyo cattāro maggā cattāri phalāni nibbānanti sabbaṃ paṭibāhati. Avijjāgatoti avijjāya gato samannāgato aññāṇī andhībhūto. Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma.
502 那时,比丘们,魔是怎么见到世尊的呢?据说,他坐在自己的宫殿里,时不时地留意世尊的去向:“今天沙门乔达摩住在哪个村子或镇上呢?”就在这个时候,他留意到:“世尊依止炬立城,住在幸运林。”知道以后,他又想:“他到底去哪儿了?”一看,见到世尊正前往梵天界,便想:“沙门乔达摩要去梵天界,要是他在那里说法,梵天神众不会脱离我的掌控,那可不妙。我得赶在他说法之前去捣乱。”于是,他紧跟在世尊身后,用隐身的方式站在梵天神众中间。当他得知“世尊已经呵斥了婆迦梵天神”,就站到梵天神那一边去支持他。因此经文才说:“那时,比丘们,魔……”巴利
502.Atha kho, bhikkhave, māro pāpimāti māro kathaṃ bhagavantaṃ addasa? So kira attano bhavane nisīditvā kālena kālaṃ satthāraṃ āvajjeti – ‘‘ajja samaṇo gotamo katarasmiṃ gāme vā nigame vā vasatī’’ti. Imasmiṃ pana kāle āvajjanto, ‘‘ukkaṭṭhaṃ nissāya subhagavane viharatī’’ti ñatvā, ‘‘kattha nu kho gato’’ti olokento brahmalokaṃ gacchantaṃ disvā, ‘‘samaṇo gotamo brahmalokaṃ gacchati, yāva tattha dhammakathaṃ kathetvā brahmagaṇaṃ mama visayā nātikkameti, tāva gantvā dhammadesanāyaṃ vichandaṃ karissāmī’’ti satthu padānupadiko gantvā brahmagaṇassa antare adissamānena kāyena aṭṭhāsi. So, ‘‘satthārā bakabrahmā apasādito’’ti ñatvā brahmuno upatthambho hutvā aṭṭhāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho, bhikkhave, māro pāpimā’’ti.
“潜入梵天神眷属”是指进入某位梵天神眷属的身体。但他无法潜入大梵天王或梵辅天的身体。“不要轻侮他”,意思是不要轻视这个人。“阿毗布”是指已经战胜并安住者,也就是最胜者。“不被征服”是指不被其他人所征服。“必定”是表示确定语气的词。“以见为见者”表明他能看见一切。“自在者”是指能让所有人都随自己的意愿而行。“主宰者”就是世间的神主。“造作者、创造者”是指世界的造作者和创造者,意思是大地、雪山、须弥山、轮围山、大海、日月这一切都是他创造的。巴利
Brahmapārisajjaṃ anvāvisitvāti ekassa brahmapārisajjassa sarīraṃ pavisitvā. Mahābrahmānaṃ pana brahmapurohitānaṃ vā anvāvisituṃ na sakkoti. Metamāsadoti mā etaṃ apasādayittha. Abhibhūti abhibhavitvā ṭhito jeṭṭhako. Anabhibhūtoti aññehi anabhibhūto. Aññadatthūti ekaṃsavacane nipāto. Dassanavasena daso, sabbaṃ passatīti dīpeti. Vasavattīti sabbajanaṃ vase vatteti. Issaroti loke issaro. Kattā nimmātāti lokassa kattā ca nimmātā ca, pathavīhimavantasinerucakkavāḷamahāsamuddacandimasūriyā ca iminā nimmitāti dīpeti.
“最胜者、得自在者”:意思是,他是这个世间最高的人,也是得自在者。这是在说明:他这样把众生一个个分派出去——“你叫刹帝利,你叫婆罗门,你叫吠舍,你叫首陀罗,你叫在家人,你叫出家人,哪怕你变成骆驼,你变成牛。” “自在者、已生者和当生者之父”:这是说,他因为修成了自在,所以是自在者;他是已生者和当生者的父亲。其中,卵生和胎生的众生,还在卵壳里或母胎里时,叫“当生者”;从出了卵壳或母胎那一刻起,就叫“已生者”。湿生的众生,在第一心识刹那叫“当生者”,从第二心识刹那起就叫“已生者”。化生的众生,在第一威仪路时叫“当生者”,从第二威仪路起就叫“已生者”。应当这样理解。由于他把这些众生全都当成自己的儿子来看待,所以说出“已生者和当生者之父”这样的话。巴利
Seṭṭho sajitāti ayaṃ lokassa uttamo ca sajitā ca. ‘‘Tvaṃ khattiyo nāma hohi, tvaṃ brāhmaṇo nāma, vesso nāma, suddo nāma, gahaṭṭho nāma, pabbajito nāma, antamaso oṭṭho hohi, goṇo hohī’’ti evaṃ sattānaṃ visajjetā ayanti dasseti. Vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānanti ayaṃ ciṇṇavasitāya vasī, ayaṃ pitā bhūtānañca bhabyānañcāti vadati. Tattha aṇḍajajalābujā sattā antoaṇḍakose ceva antovatthimhi ca bhabyā nāma, bahi nikkhantakālato paṭṭhāya bhūtā. Saṃsedajā paṭhamacittakkhaṇe bhabyā, dutiyato paṭṭhāya bhūtā. Opapātikā paṭhamairiyāpathe bhabyā, dutiyato paṭṭhāya bhūtāti veditabbā. Te sabbepi etassa puttāti saññāya, ‘‘pitā bhūtabhabyāna’’nti āha.
呵责大地的人:就像你现在呵责、厌恶大地,说它是“无常、苦、无我”一样,过去那些人也曾是呵责大地的人,不是只有你一个——这句话就是在点明这个意思。“呵责水的人”等等,道理也一样。“住在低劣的身体中”,是指投生在四种恶趣里。“称赞大地的人”:不是像你这样呵责,而是不呵责,反过来称赞大地,说它是“常、坚固、常住、不可断、不可破、不灭”,过去就有这样称赞大地的人,是替大地说话、说大地好话的——他这样说。“贪喜大地的人”:以渴爱和邪见而贪喜大地。其余的也同理。“住在殊胜的身体中”,是指投生在梵天界。“Taṃ tāhaṃ”:由于那个原因,那个我。“Iṅgha”:是催促、敦促之义的虚词。“Upātivattittho”:超越了。“Upātivattito”也是一种读法,意思相同。“Daṇḍena paṭippaṇāmeyyāti”:用四肘长的棍棒打他,把他赶走。“Narakapapāte”:在百人高的大陷坑中。“Virādheyya”:在手能抓握或脚能站立之处,无法抓握或站立。“Nanu tvaṃ bhikkhu passasīti”:比丘,难道你没看见这梵天神众聚集、发光、照耀、明亮吗——这是在显示安住于梵天神教说者的神通威力。“Iti kho maṃ, bhikkhave, māro pāpimā brahmaparisaṃ upanesīti”:诸比丘,魔就这样把我带到梵天神众前。诸比丘,魔说:“比丘,难道你没看见梵天神众具足名声与威光,发光、照耀、明亮吗?如果你也不违越大梵天王的话,而只做梵天神对你说的事,那么你也会同样具足名声与威光而明亮。”他这样说着,就把我带到、引到梵天神众前。“Mā tvaṃ maññitthoti”:你不要这样想。“Māro tvamasi pāpimāti”:你是魔波旬。波旬,由于你杀害大众,所以名为魔;由于你给大众造成邪恶、卑劣的不名誉,所以名为波旬——我如此了知。巴利
Pathavīgarahakāti yathā tvaṃ etarahi, ‘‘aniccā dukkhā anattā’’ti pathaviṃ garahasi jigucchasi, evaṃ tepi pathavīgarahakā ahesuṃ, na kevalaṃ tvaṃyevāti dīpeti. Āpagarahakātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Hīne kāye patiṭṭhitāti catūsu apāyesu nibbattā. Pathavīpasaṃsakāti yathā tvaṃ garahasi, evaṃ agarahitvā, ‘‘niccā dhuvā sassatā acchejjā abhejjā akkhayā’’ti evaṃ pathavīpasaṃsakā pathaviyā vaṇṇavādino ahesunti vadati. Pathavābhinandinoti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena pathaviyā abhinandino. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Paṇīte kāye patiṭṭhitāti brahmaloke nibbattā. Taṃ tāhanti tena kāraṇena taṃ ahaṃ. Iṅghāti codanatthe nipāto. Upātivattitthoti atikkamittha. ‘‘Upātivattito’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho. Daṇḍena paṭippaṇāmeyyāti catuhatthena muggaradaṇḍena pothetvā palāpeyya. Narakapapāteti sataporise mahāsobbhe. Virādheyyāti hatthena gahaṇayutte vā pādena patiṭṭhānayutte vā ṭhāne gahaṇapatiṭṭhānāni kātuṃ na sakkuṇeyya. Nanu tvaṃ bhikkhu passasīti bhikkhu nanu tvaṃ imaṃ brahmaparisaṃ sannipatitaṃ obhāsamānaṃ virocamānaṃ jotayamānaṃ passasīti brahmuno ovāde ṭhitānaṃ iddhānubhāvaṃ dasseti. Iti kho maṃ, bhikkhave, māro pāpimā brahmaparisaṃ upanesīti, bhikkhave , māro pāpimā nanu tvaṃ bhikkhu passasi brahmaparisaṃ yasena ca siriyā ca obhāsamānaṃ virocamānaṃ jotayamānaṃ, yadi tvampi mahābrahmuno vacanaṃ anatikkamitvā yadeva te brahmā vadati, taṃ kareyyāsi, tvampi evamevaṃ yasena ca siriyā ca viroceyyāsīti evaṃ vadanto maṃ brahmaparisaṃ upanesi upasaṃhari. Mā tvaṃ maññitthoti mā tvaṃ maññi. Māro tvamasi pāpimāti pāpima tvaṃ mahājanassa māraṇato māro nāma, pāpakaṃ lāmakaṃ mahājanassa ayasaṃ karaṇato pāpimā nāmāti jānāmi.
503 “全部的寿命”,就是整个寿命。“他们应当这样了知”:他们具备那样广大的苦行功德,而你呢,前一天才刚出生,你能知道什么?你到现在嘴里还飘着奶味呢!——他这样说着来打击对方。“你将执取大地”:意思是你会贪着大地,把它吞下去、完全占有,然后用渴爱、我慢和邪见紧紧抓住它。“你将是我的随侍者”:意思是你会住在我的附近,我走你就跟着走,我站你就站在旁边,我坐你就坐在旁边,我躺你就躺在旁边。“卧具卧者”:就是睡在我的卧具上的人。“可随意驱使的、应被驱逐者”:意思是我可以随自己的喜好,想怎样就怎样差遣你;而且,把你赶走之后,你要比贾贾里卡灌木丛还低矮,比矮冬瓜还矮小。这就是这句话的意思。巴利
503.Kasiṇaṃ āyunti sakalaṃ āyuṃ. Te kho evaṃ jāneyyunti te evaṃ mahantena tapokammena samannāgatā, tvaṃ pana purimadivase jāto, kiṃ jānissasi, yassa te ajjāpi mukhe khīragandho vāyatīti ghaṭṭento vadati. Pathaviṃ ajjhosissasīti pathaviṃ ajjhosāya gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi gaṇhissasi. Opasāyiko me bhavissasīti mayhaṃ samīpasayo bhavissasi, maṃ gacchantaṃ anugacchissasi, ṭhitaṃ upatiṭṭhissasi, nisinnaṃ upanisīdissasi, nipannaṃ upanipajjissasīti attho. Vatthusāyikoti mama vatthusmiṃ sayanako. Yathākāmakaraṇīyo bāhiteyyoti mayā attano ruciyā yaṃ icchāmi, taṃ kattabbo, bāhitvā ca pana jajjharikāgumbatopi nīcataro lakuṇḍaṭakataro kātabbo bhavissasīti attho.
梵天神用这番话,要么是在讨好世尊,要么是在贬低世尊。
所谓“讨好”,是这样说的:“比丘啊,如果你用渴爱等执取大地,你就会成为我的随从——我走你就走,我站你就站,我坐你就坐,我躺你就躺。我会把其他人排开,让你成为我最信任的贴身亲信。”这就是“讨好”。
而用其余那些话,就是“贬低”。这里面的真正用意是:“如果你执取大地,你就得住在我这里,得等我走了之后才能走,等我站了才能站,等我坐了才能坐,等我躺了才能躺;你得在我的地盘上替我守着。而我呢,想怎么处置你就怎么处置你,把你赶出去,让你比果木巴草丛还要低贱。”这就是“贬低”。
这位梵天神是依止于我慢的,所以在这里,贬低才是他真正的意图。对水等其他元素,道理也是一样。巴利
Iminā esa bhagavantaṃ upalāpeti vā apasādeti vā. Upalāpeti nāma sace kho tvaṃ, bhikkhu, taṇhādīhi pathaviṃ ajjhosissasi, opasāyiko me bhavissasi, mayi gacchante gamissasi, tiṭṭhante ṭhassasi, nisinne nisīdissasi, nipanne nipajjissasi, ahaṃ taṃ sesajanaṃ paṭibāhitvā vissāsikaṃ abbhantarikaṃ karissāmīti evaṃ tāva upalāpeti nāma. Sesapadehi pana apasādeti nāma. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – sace tvaṃ pathaviṃ ajjhosissasi, vatthusāyiko me bhavissasi, mama gamanādīni āgametvā gamissasi vā ṭhassasi vā nisīdissasi vā nipajjissasi vā, mama vatthusmiṃ mayhaṃ ārakkhaṃ gaṇhissasi, ahaṃ pana taṃ yathākāmaṃ karissāmi bāhitvā ca jajjharikāgumbatopi lakuṇḍakataranti evaṃ apasādeti nāma. Ayaṃ pana brahmā mānanissito, tasmā idha apasādanāva adhippetā. Āpādīsupi eseva nayo.
在“我是梵天神”这一段:这时,世尊心想:“这位梵天神依止于我慢,自以为‘我知道’,被自己的声望冲昏了头,根本看不到有谁能碰触到他,稍微压一压他才合适。”于是开始了这段教导。其中,“我知趣向”是指我知道他的成就;“我知光耀”是指我知道他的威力。“如此有大威力”是指他这样有大名声、大眷属。巴利
Apicate ahaṃ brahmeti idāni bhagavā, ‘‘ayaṃ brahmā mānanissito ‘ahaṃ jānāmī’ti maññati, attano yasena sammatto sarīraṃ phusitumpi samatthaṃ kiñci na passati, thokaṃ niggahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cintetvā imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha gatiñca pajānāmīti nipphattiñca pajānāmi. Jutiñcāti ānubhāvañca pajānāmi. Evaṃ mahesakkhoti evaṃ mahāyaso mahāparivāro.
“日月所行的范围有多大”:日月在多大的区域内运行。“光芒照耀诸方”:它们在各方闪耀、发光,或者说各方被它们照耀而发光。“如是一千世界”:以那么大的范围为一千世界,意思是连同这个世界在内,共一千个世界。“你的自在力在此处行使”:在这一千个世界中,你的自在力得以行使。“你知道高下”:在这一千个世界里,你知道众生的高低、优劣。“以及有染、离染者”:不只是知道“这是有成就的人,这是普通人”这样的高下,还知道“这个人还有贪染,这个人已经离贪”这样有染与离染的人。“此性与异性”:“此性”指这个世界,“异性”指除此之外的其余九百九十九个世界。“众生的来与去”:在这一千个世界中,你知道众生以结生而来、以死没而去。可是你却生起“我实在太伟大了”这样的想——你名叫千梵天神,但对其他梵天神,即超过你之上的二千梵天神、三千梵天神、四千梵天神、五千梵天神、一万梵天神、十万梵天神的范围,你完全不知道。你就像想用一块四肘长的碎布去丈量东西一样,还自以为很了不起。这是世尊在呵责他。巴利
Yāvatā candimasūriyā pariharantīti yattake ṭhāne candimasūriyā vicaranti. Disā bhanti virocanāti disāsu virocamānā obhāsanti, disā vā tehi virocamānā obhāsanti. Tāva sahassadhā lokoti tattakena pamāṇena sahassadhā loko, iminā cakkavāḷena saddhiṃ cakkavāḷasahassanti attho. Ettha te vattate vasoti ettha cakkavāḷasahasse tuyhaṃ vaso vattati. Paroparañca jānāsīti ettha cakkavāḷasahasse paropare uccanīce hīnappaṇīte satte jānāsi. Atho rāgavirāginanti na kevalaṃ, ‘‘ayaṃ iddho ayaṃ pakatimanusso’’ti paroparaṃ, ‘‘ayaṃ pana sarāgo ayaṃ vītarāgo’’ti evaṃ rāgavirāginampi janaṃ jānāsi. Itthaṃbhāvaññathābhāvanti itthaṃbhāvoti idaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ. Aññathābhāvoti ito sesaṃ ekūnasahassaṃ. Sattānaṃ āgatiṃ gatinti ettha cakkavāḷasahasse paṭisandhivasena sattānaṃ āgatiṃ, cutivasena gatiṃ ca jānāsi. Tuyhaṃ pana atimahantohamasmīti saññā hoti, sahassibrahmā nāma tvaṃ, aññesaṃ pana tayā uttari dvisahassānaṃ tisahassānaṃ catusahassānaṃ pañcasahassānaṃ dasasahassānaṃ satasahassānañca brahmānaṃ pamāṇaṃ natthi, catuhatthāya pilotikāya paṭappamāṇaṃ kātuṃ vāyamanto viya mahantosmīti saññaṃ karosīti niggaṇhāti.
504 “生在这里的”:是指生在初禅地。“因此你不知道那个”:就是因为这个原因,你不知道那个身体。“我绝不与你相等”:即使到了应知之位,我也不和你相等。“以证智”:就是以智慧了知。“怎么会更低劣”:我怎么会比你更低劣呢?巴利
504.Idhūpapannoti idha paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ upapanno. Tena taṃ tvaṃ na jānāsīti tena kāraṇena taṃ kāyaṃ tvaṃ na jānāsi. Neva te samasamoti jānitabbaṭṭhānaṃ patvāpi tayā samasamo na homi. Abhiññāyāti aññāya. Kuto nīceyyanti tayā nīcatarabhāvo pana mayhaṃ kuto.
这位梵天神据说是在佛陀还没出世的时候,就出家做了仙人,修习遍禅的准备工作,成就了各种禅定。他一直没有退失禅那,命终之后投生到第四禅天的广果天,得到五百劫的寿命。在那里住满全部寿命后,又向下投生,修习第三禅那,投生到遍净天,得到二百四十劫的寿命。在那里修习第二禅那,投生到光音天,得到八劫的寿命。在那里修习初禅那,投生到初禅天界,成为寿命一劫的有情。最初他还记得自己造过的业和投生的地方,但时间一久,两样都忘了,就生起了常见。因此,世尊对他说:“所以你不知道那个……乃至……怎会更低劣呢?”巴利
Heṭṭhūpapattiko kiresa brahmā anuppanne buddhuppāde isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā samāpattiyo nibbattetvā aparihīnajjhāno kālaṃ katvā catutthajjhānabhūmiyaṃ vehapphalabrahmaloke pañcakappasatikaṃ āyuṃ gahetvā nibbatti. Tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā heṭṭūpapattikaṃ katvā tatiyajjhānaṃ paṇītaṃ bhāvetvā subhakiṇhabrahmaloke catusaṭṭhikappaṃ āyuṃ gahetvā nibbatti. Tattha dutiyajjhānaṃ bhāvetvā ābhassaresu aṭṭhakappaṃ āyuṃ gahetvā nibbatti. Tattha paṭhamajjhānaṃ bhāvetvā paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ kappāyuko hutvā nibbatti, so paṭhamakāle attanā katakammañca nibbattaṭṭhānañca aññāsi, kāle pana gacchante ubhayaṃ pamussitvā sassatadiṭṭhiṃ uppādesi. Tena naṃ bhagavā, ‘‘tena taṃ tvaṃ na jānāsi…pe… kuto nīceyya’’nti āha.
这时,梵天神心想:“沙门乔达摩知道我的寿命、我投生的地方,以及我过去所造的业。那我现在就问他我过去所造的业吧。”于是,他向导师问起自己过去所造的业,导师便为他说了。巴利
Atha brahmā cintesi – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo mayhaṃ āyuñca nibbattaṭṭhānañca pubbekatakammañca jānāti, handa naṃ pubbe katakammaṃ pucchāmī’’ti satthāraṃ attano pubbekatakammaṃ pucchi. Satthā kathesi.
据说,他过去生在一个良家,看到诸欲的过患后,心想:“我要终结生、老、病、死。”于是出家成为仙人,修成诸等至,获得以神通为基础的禅那。他在恒河岸边建了一座草屋,以禅悦度日。那时,商队首领们时常带着五百辆车穿越沙漠。而在沙漠中,白天走不了,只能夜里赶路。这时,走在最前面的那辆车的驾牛,走着走着忽然掉头,朝来路的方向走去,后面的车也跟着掉头。天亮时,他们才发现自己走了回头路。而那天本该是他们走出沙漠的日子。所有的柴和水都已用尽,于是他们想:“这下我们没命了。”便把牛拴在车轮上,人钻进车影里躺下。那位苦行者清早从草屋出来,坐在草屋门口眺望恒河,看见恒河被巨大的洪流冲卷而来,像一整块滚动而来的宝石堆。他看到后心想:“这世上会不会有众生,因为喝不到这样甘甜的水而受苦呢?”他这样作意时,看见了沙漠中的那支商队,心想:“愿这些众生不要死掉!”于是以神通心决意:“愿这一大股水从恒河断开,流向沙漠中的商队!”心念刚一发起,水就像被引入水渠一样流到了那里。人们被水声惊醒,看见水后欢喜雀跃,沐浴、饮水,也让牛喝足,然后平安到达了想去的地方。导师为了说明这位梵天神过去世的业行——巴利
Pubbe kiresa kulaghare nibbattitvā kāmesu ādīnavaṃ disvā, ‘‘jātijarābyādhimaraṇassa antaṃ karissāmī’’ti nikkhamma isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā samāpattiyo nibbattetvā abhiññāpādakajjhānalābhī hutvā gaṅgātīre paṇṇasālaṃ kāretvā jhānaratiyā vītināmeti. Tadā ca kālena kālaṃ satthavāhā pañcahi sakaṭasatehi marukantāraṃ paṭipajjanti. Marukantāre pana divā na sakkā gantuṃ, rattiṃ gamanaṃ hoti. Atha purimasakaṭassa aggayuge yuttabalibaddā gacchantā nivattitvā āgatamaggābhimukhāva ahesuṃ. Itarasakaṭāni tatheva nivattitvā aruṇe uggate nivattitabhāvaṃ jāniṃsu. Tesañca tadā kantāraṃ atikkamanadivaso ahosi. Sabbaṃ dārudakaṃ parikkhīṇaṃ, tasmā, ‘‘natthi dāni amhākaṃ jīvita’’nti cintetvā goṇe cakkesu bandhitvā manussā sakaṭapacchāyāyaṃ pavisitvā nipajjiṃsu . Tāpasopi kālasseva paṇṇasālato nikkhamitvā paṇṇasāladvāre nisinno gaṅgaṃ olokayamāno addasa gaṅgaṃ mahatā udakoghena vuyhamānaṃ pavattitamaṇikkhandhaṃ viya āgacchantiṃ. Disvā cintesi – ‘‘atthi nu kho imasmiṃ loke evarūpassa madhurodakassa alābhena kilissamānā sattā’’ti. So evaṃ āvajjanto marukantāre taṃ satthaṃ disvā, ‘‘ime sattā mā nassantū’’ti, ‘‘ito mahā udakakkhandho chijjitvā marukantāre satthābhimukho gacchatū’’ti abhiññācittena adhiṭṭhāsi. Sahacittuppādena mātikāruḷhaṃ viya udakaṃ tattha agamāsi. Manussā udakasaddena vuṭṭhāya udakaṃ disvā hatthatuṭṭhā nhāyitvā pivitvā goṇepi pāyetvā sotthinā icchitaṭṭhānaṃ agamaṃsu. Satthā taṃ brahmuno pubbakammaṃ dassento –
“ 你曾让许多人喝到水
在夏季的酷热中,被干渴折磨着;
那是你过去的苦行和戒律修持,
就像从睡梦中醒过来一样,我回忆起来了。”巴利
‘‘Yaṃ tvaṃ apāyesi bahū manusse, Pipāsite ghammani samparete; Taṃ te purāṇaṃ vatasīlavattaṃ, Suttappabuddhova anussarāmī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.71) –
他说了这首偈颂。巴利
Imaṃ gāthamāha.
有一次,那位苦行者在恒河岸边搭了一座树叶屋,靠着一个林野村庄住下来。就在那时,盗贼袭击了那个村庄,抢走值钱的东西,又赶走母牛和俘虏,然后离开。牛、狗和人们都发出巨大的哀号声。苦行者听到那声音,心里想“这是怎么回事?”,知道是“人们遇到了危险”,又想“愿这些众生不要在我眼前丧命”,于是进入作为神通基础的禅那,出定后以神通心,在盗贼回去的路上变现出一支四兵组成的军队,正严阵以待地迎面而来。盗贼们看见后,以为是“国王来了”,就丢下抢来的东西逃走了。苦行者决意“谁的东西就归谁”,那些东西果然就这样各归原主。大众因此得到了平安。世尊为了开示他过去的业,而说道:巴利
Aparasmiṃ samaye tāpaso gaṅgātīre paṇṇasālaṃ māpetvā āraññakaṃ gāmaṃ nissāya vasati. Tena ca samayena corā taṃ gāmaṃ paharitvā hatthasāraṃ gahetvā gāviyo ca karamare ca gahetvā gacchanti. Gāvopi sunakhāpi manussāpi mahāviravaṃ viravanti. Tāpaso taṃ saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti āvajjanto, ‘‘manussānaṃ bhayaṃ uppanna’’nti ñatvā, ‘‘mayi passante ime sattā mā nassantū’’ti abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya abhiññācittena corānaṃ paṭipathe caturaṅginisenaṃ māpesi kammasajjaṃ āgacchantiṃ. Corā disvā, ‘‘rājā’’ti te maññamānā vilopaṃ chaḍḍetvā pakkamiṃsu. Tāpaso ‘‘yaṃ yassa santakaṃ, taṃ tasseva hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi, taṃ tatheva ahosi. Mahājano sotthibhāvaṃ pāpuṇi. Satthā idampi tassa pubbakammaṃ dassento –
“ 伊尼河畔被擒、
正遭押走之人,汝施解救。
那是你过去的苦行与戒行,
就像从睡梦中醒过来一样,我回忆起来了。”巴利
‘‘Yaṃ eṇikūlasmiṃ janaṃ gahītaṃ, Amocayī gayhaka nīyamānaṃ; Taṃ te purāṇaṃ vatasīlavattaṃ, Suttappabuddhova anussarāmī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.72) –
他说了这首偈颂。这里,“eṇikūlasmiṃ”是指恒河岸边。巴利
Imaṃ gāthamāha. Ettha eṇikūlasminti gaṅgātīre.
有一次,恒河上游的一户人家和恒河下游的一户人家交了朋友,彼此结为亲密好友。他们把船只连在一起,装上许多嚼食、啖食以及香、花鬘等物品,顺着恒河的水流驶来。人们一边嚼着、吃着,一边跳舞、唱歌,就像乘着天宫在行进一样,心中充满极大的欢喜。
恒河耶龙王看见后,愤怒起来,心想:“这些人竟然完全不把我放在眼里,我现在就把他们冲到大海里去。”于是他化现出巨大的身躯,把河水分开,腾身而起,展开头冠,发出嘶嘶的响声,站在那里。大众看见后,吓得大声惊叫。
坐在叶屋里的苦行者听到叫声,心想:“这些人刚才还唱着、跳着、满心欢喜地过来,现在却发出恐惧的喊叫,到底是怎么回事?”他作意观察,看见了龙王,便想:“有我在看着,这些众生不该被毁灭。”于是他进入作为神通基础的禅那,舍弃自身形貌,化现出金翅鸟的样子,显示在龙王面前。龙王害怕了,收起头冠,潜入水中。大众因此得以平安。
导师为了说明这也是他过去世的业行——巴利
Puna ekasmiṃ samaye uparigaṅgāvāsikaṃ kulaṃ heṭṭhāgaṅgāvāsikena kulena saddhiṃ mittasanthavaṃ katvā nāvāsaṅghāṭaṃ bandhitvā bahuṃ khādanīyabhojanīyañceva gandhamālādīni ca āropetvā gaṅgāsotena āgacchati. Manussā khādamānā bhuñjamānā naccantā gāyantā devavimānena gacchantā viya balavasomanassā ahesuṃ. Gaṅgeyyako nāgo disvā kupito, ‘‘ime mayi saññampi na karonti, idāni ne samuddameva pāpessāmī’’ti mahantaṃ attabhāvaṃ māpetvā udakaṃ dvidhā bhinditvā uṭṭhāya phaṇaṃ katvā sussūkāraṃ karonto aṭṭhāsi. Mahājano disvā bhīto vissaramakāsi. Tāpaso paṇṇasālāya nisinno sutvā, ‘‘ime gāyantā naccantā somanassajātā āgacchanti, idāni pana bhayaravaṃ raviṃsu, kiṃ nu kho’’ti āvajjanto nāgarājaṃ disvā, ‘‘mayi passante ime sattā mā nassantū’’ti abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā attabhāvaṃ vijahitvā supaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ māpetvā nāgarājassa dassesi. Nāgarājā bhīto phaṇaṃ saṃharitvā udakaṃ paviṭṭho. Mahājano sotthibhāvaṃ pāpuṇi. Satthā idampi tassa pubbakammaṃ dassento –
“ 恒河水流中,舟船被执捉,
凶暴之龙以人形……
你以强力强行救拔了自己,
那正是你往昔的誓愿与戒行。
我像从睡梦中醒来一样回忆起来。”巴利
‘‘Gaṅgāya sotasmiṃ gahītanāvaṃ, Luddena nāgena manussakappā; Amocayittha balasā pasayha, Taṃ te purāṇaṃ vatasīlavattaṃ; Suttappabuddhova anussarāmī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.73) –
他说了这首偈颂。巴利
Imaṃ gāthamāha.
后来有一次,此人出家成为苦行者后,成了一位名叫凯萨瓦的苦行者。那时候,我们的菩萨是名叫劫波的年轻人,他成了凯萨瓦的随侍弟子,听从老师差遣,行为讨人喜欢,聪明又有智慧,能办成事。凯萨瓦没有他就活不下去,全靠着他才维持生活。导师为了说明他过去的业,又……巴利
Aparasmiṃ samaye esa isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā kesavo nāma tāpaso ahosi. Tena samayena amhākaṃ bodhisatto kappo nāma māṇavo kesavassa baddhacaro antevāsiko hutvā ācariyassa kiṃkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī buddhisampanno atthacaro ahosi. Kesavo taṃ vinā vattituṃ nāsakkhi, taṃ nissāyeva jīvikaṃ kappesi. Satthā idampi tassa pubbakammaṃ dassento –
“ 劫波曾经是你的持戒弟子,
他以为那位持戒修行的人是正自觉者。
你过去那套誓愿和戒行,
就像从睡梦中醒来一样,我回忆起来了。”巴利
‘‘Kappo ca te baddhacaro ahosi, Sambuddhimantaṃ vatinaṃ amaññi; Taṃ te purāṇaṃ vatasīlavattaṃ, Suttappabuddhova anussarāmī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.74) –
他说了这首偈颂。巴利
Imaṃ gāthamāha.
导师就这样开示了梵天神在种种不同生命中造下的业。就在导师开示的时候,梵天神便觉察到:就像点亮一千盏灯时,各种形色都清清楚楚地显现出来一样,他的一切业也都明明白白地呈现在心中。他心生净信,说出了这首偈颂——巴利
Evaṃ brahmuno nānattabhāvesu katakammaṃ satthā pakāsesi. Satthari kathenteyeva brahmā sallakkhesi, dīpasahasse ujjalite rūpāni viya sabbakammānissa pākaṭāni ahesuṃ. So pasannacitto imaṃ gāthamāha –
“ 你确实知道我的寿命,
你也知道其他事情,因为你确实是佛陀。
如是,彼之炽盛威光,
照耀梵天界而住。”巴利
‘‘Addhā pajānāsi mametamāyuṃ, Aññampi jānāsi tathā hi buddho; Tathā hi tāyaṃ jalitānubhāvo, Obhāsayaṃ tiṭṭhati brahmaloka’’nti. (jā. 1.7.75);
这时,世尊为了进一步显示自己那无可比拟的境界,说了“哦,梵天,我确实是地”等话。其中,“于地,以地性未曾体验”的意思是:没有以地的性质去体验、没有达到。那到底是什么呢?是涅槃。因为涅槃脱离了一切有为法,所以说不以地的性质而达到,这就叫“未曾体验”。“证知彼”是指了知、亲证那个涅槃。“我不取地”是指我不以渴爱、邪见、我慢这些执取去执取地。对水等其余诸界,道理也一样。详细的解释,应当依照《根本法门经》里所说的方式来理解。巴利
Athassa bhagavā uttari asamasamataṃ pakāsento pathaviṃ kho ahaṃ brahmetiādimāha. Tattha pathaviyā pathavattena ananubhūtanti pathaviyā pathavisabhāvena ananubhūtaṃ appattaṃ. Kiṃ pana tanti? Nibbānaṃ. Tañhi sabbasmā saṅkhatā nissaṭattā pathavisabhāvena appattaṃ nāma. Tadabhiññāyāti taṃ nibbānaṃ jānitvā sacchikatvā. Pathaviṃ nāpahosinti pathaviṃ taṇhādiṭṭhimānagāhehi na gaṇhiṃ. Āpādīsupi eseva nayo. Vitthāro pana mūlapariyāye vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
贤友,如果真要对你来说“一切的一切性”——他这是指出梵天神自己主张的那个“一切”一词,在字面上挑毛病才这么说。可是导师是就“自身”来说“一切”,梵天神却是就“一切的一切”来说的。你说“一切”,又说“以一切的一切性未曾体验”——如果“一切”当中根本没有任何未曾体验的东西,那它里面就有未曾体验的东西。愿你的话不要落空,不要变成虚无——他就是这样以妄语之罪来谴责导师:你的话不要变成空的,不要变成虚无的。巴利
Sace kho te, mārisa, sabbassa sabbattenāti idameva brahmā attano vāditāya sabbanti akkharaṃ niddisitvā akkhare dosaṃ gaṇhanto āha. Satthā pana sakkāyaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sabba’’nti vadati, brahmā sabbasabbaṃ sandhāya. Tvaṃ ‘‘sabba’’nti vadasi, ‘‘sabbassa sabbattena ananubhūta’’nti vadasi, yadi sabbaṃ ananubhūtaṃ natthi, athassa ananubhūtaṃ atthi. Mā heva te rittakamevaahositucchakameva ahosīti tuyhaṃ vacanaṃ rittakaṃ mā hotu, tucchakaṃ mā hotūti satthāraṃ musāvādena niggaṇhāti.
导师的辩才,比这位梵天神高出百倍、千倍、十万倍。所以,为了摧破他的主张,导师举出理由,说了“识”等话。他说:“我要宣说一切,也要宣说未曾体验过的,你听好。”其中,“识”是指应当被了知的东西。“不可见”,因为不进入眼识的范围,所以叫不可见。这两个词都只是在说涅槃。“无边”,因为它没有生灭的间隔,所以叫无边。关于这一点也有偈颂说过:巴利
Satthā pana etasmā brahmunā sataguṇena sahassaguṇena satasahassaguṇena vādītaro, tasmā ahaṃ sabbañca vakkhāmi, ananubhūtañca vakkhāmi, suṇāhi meti tassa vādamaddanatthaṃ kāraṇaṃ āharanto viññāṇantiādimāha. Tattha viññāṇanti vijānitabbaṃ. Anidassananti cakkhuviññāṇassa āpāthaṃ anupagamanato anidassanaṃ nāma, padadvayenapi nibbānameva vuttaṃ. Anantanti tayidaṃ uppādavayaantarahitattā anantaṃ nāma. Vuttampi hetaṃ –
“ 已生起者是有边际的,而非生起者则是无边际的。
在有情之中,诸边被看见;在有情之中,诸边被开示。”巴利
‘‘Antavantāni bhūtāni, asambhūtaṃ anantakaṃ; Bhūte antāni dissanti, bhūte antā pakāsitā’’ti.
涅槃在一切处都放光,在一切处都圆满具足光明。因为除了涅槃之外,再没有别的法比它更光明、更明亮、更清净、更洁白。或者说,涅槃在一切处都这样显现,哪里都不存在没有涅槃的地方,所以叫“一切处放光”。不应当说“在东方等各个方向中,涅槃在某个方向不存在”。另一种说法,“光”是渡口的名字,涅槃在一切处都有渡口,所以叫“一切处有渡口”。据说,涅槃就像大海,人们想从哪一边下去,那一边就是渡口,没有什么地方不是渡口。同样,在三十八种业处中,人们想从哪一门进入涅槃,那一门就是渡口。对涅槃来说,没有哪个业处不是渡口。因此说“一切处有渡口”。那涅槃不曾被地的地性所体验,也不曾被其余水等的水性等所体验。就这样,世尊确立了这个说法:对你们所触及的境界,也就是属于四地的一切法,以那一切性来说,那识是无相、无边、一切处放光的,是你们不曾体验的。巴利
Sabbatopabhanti sabbaso pabhāsampannaṃ. Nibbānato hi añño dhammo sapabhataro vā jotivantataro vā parisuddhataro vā paṇḍarataro vā natthi. Sabbato vā tathā pabhūtameva, na katthaci natthīti sabbatopabhaṃ. Puratthimadisādīsu hi asukadisāya nāma nibbānaṃ natthīti na vattabbaṃ. Atha vā pabhanti titthassa nāmaṃ, sabbato pabhamassāti sabbatopabhaṃ. Nibbānassa kira yathā mahāsamuddassa yato yato otaritukāmā honti, taṃ tadeva titthaṃ, atitthaṃ nāma natthi. Evamevaṃ aṭṭhatiṃsāya kammaṭṭhānesu yena yena mukhena nibbānaṃ otaritukāmā honti, taṃ tadeva titthaṃ. Nibbānassa atitthaṃ nāma kammaṭṭhānaṃ natthi. Tena vuttaṃ sabbatopabhanti. Taṃ pathaviyā pathavattenāti taṃ nibbānaṃ pathaviyā pathavīsabhāvena tato paresaṃ āpādīnaṃ āpādisabhāvena ca ananubhūtaṃ. Iti yaṃ tumhādisānaṃ visayabhūtaṃ sabbatebhūmakadhammajātaṃ tassa sabbattena taṃ viññāṇaṃ anidassanaṃ anantaṃ sabbatopataṃ ananubhūtanti vādaṃ patiṭṭhapesi.
这时,梵天神被世尊逐一令放弃所执取之物,找不到任何可以执取的东西,就想耍个花招,说道:“朋友,那我现在就在你面前消失吧!”这里“消失”的意思是“我施展让自己看不见的神变”。“如果你有本事”意思是:你要是能做到在我面前消失,那就消失吧,施展神变吧。“他根本没法在我面前消失”是说:他根本没办法在我面前消失。那他到底想干什么呢?他想回到根本结生去。因为梵天神的根本结生身极其微细,其他人根本看不到,他们就是靠那造作出来的身体站着的。世尊不让他回到根本结生去。就算不回到根本结生去,假如他想用某种方式把自己藏起来、让人看不见,世尊也能把那黑暗驱散,所以他没法消失。他做不到,就躲进宫殿里,藏在劫波树上,蜷着身子蹲着。梵天神众就取笑他,心里生起这样的想法:“瞧这婆迦梵天神,躲进宫殿里,藏在劫波树上,蜷着身子蹲着,还以为‘你消失了,梵天神’。”他被梵天神众这样嘲弄,就蔫了。巴利
Tato brahmā gahitagahitaṃ satthārā vissajjāpito kiñci gahetabbaṃ adisvā laḷitakaṃ kātukāmo handa carahi te, mārisa, antaradhāyāmīti āha. Tattha antaradhāyāmīti adissamānakapāṭihāriyaṃ karomīti āha. Sace visahasīti yadi sakkosi mayhaṃ antaradhāyituṃ, antaradhāyasi , pāṭihāriyaṃ karohīti. Nevassu me sakkoti antaradhāyitunti mayhaṃ antaradhāyituṃ neva sakkoti. Kiṃ panesa kātukāmo ahosīti? Mūlapaṭisandhiṃ gantukāmo ahosi. Brahmānañhi mūlapaṭisandhikaattabhāvo sukhumo, aññesaṃ anāpātho, abhisaṅkhatakāyeneva tiṭṭhanti. Satthā tassa mūlapaṭisandhiṃ gantuṃ na adāsi. Mūlapaṭisandhiṃ vā agantvāpi yena tamena attānaṃ antaradhāpetvā adissamānako bhaveyya, satthā taṃ tamaṃ vinodesi, tasmā antaradhāyituṃ nāsakkhi. So asakkonto vimāne nilīyati, kapparukkhe nilīyati, ukkuṭiko nisīdati. Brahmagaṇo keḷimakāsi – ‘‘esa kho bako brahmā vimāne nilīyati, kapparukkhe nilīyati, ukkuṭiko nisīdati, brahme tvaṃ antarahitomhī’’ti saññaṃ uppādesi nāmāti. So brahmagaṇena uppaṇḍito maṅku ahosi.
世尊这样说时,我……:比丘们,当那位梵天神说“贤友,那我现在就消失吧”时,世尊见他无法消失,便说了这番话。“说了这首偈”:世尊为什么说这首偈?是为了不让梵天神众有机会这样说:“沙门乔达摩在这个地方到底存在还是不存在,怎么能知道呢?”为了避免梵天神众有这样的议论机会,世尊就在消失后说了这首偈。巴利
Evaṃ vutte ahaṃ, bhikkhaveti, bhikkhave, etena brahmunā, ‘‘handa carahi te, mārisa, antaradhāyāmī’’ti evaṃ vutte taṃ antaradhāyituṃ asakkontaṃ disvā ahaṃ etadavocaṃ. Imaṃ gāthamabhāsinti kasmā bhagavā gāthamabhāsīti? Samaṇassa gotamassa imasmiṃ ṭhāne atthibhāvo vā natthibhāvo vā kathaṃ sakkā jānitunti evaṃ brahmagaṇassa vacanokāso mā hotūti antarahitova gāthamabhāsi.
在这里,“我见到有中的怖畏”,意思是我确实在有之中见到了怖畏。“又见到有与求灭者”,意思是:我见到了这欲有等三种有,也见到那些求灭者——他们寻求灭尽、一再追寻灭尽,却一次又一次地见到他们仍在有中。“我不称叹任何有”,意思是我没有因渴爱或邪见而称叹任何有,也没有去寻求。“也不执取喜贪”,意思是我没有亲近、没有执取对有之渴爱。就这样,导师开示四圣谛。说法结束时,他让听众随说法次第把握住内观的胚种,约一万梵天众饮下了道果的甘露。巴利
Tattha bhavevāhaṃ bhayaṃ disvāti ahaṃ bhave bhayaṃ disvāyeva. Bhavañca vibhavesinanti imañca kāmabhavāditividhampi sattabhavaṃ vibhavesinaṃ vibhavaṃ gavesamānaṃ pariyesamānampi punappunaṃ bhaveyeva disvā. Bhavaṃ nābhivadinti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena kiñci bhavaṃ na abhivadiṃ, na gavesinti attho. Nandiñca na upādiyinti bhavataṇhaṃ na upagañchiṃ, na aggahesinti attho. Iti cattāri saccāni pakāsento satthā dhammaṃ desesi. Desanāpariyosāne desanānusārena vipassanāgabbhaṃ gāhāpetvā dasamattāni brahmasahassāni maggaphalāmatapānaṃ piviṃsu.
他们生起了稀有、未曾有、喜悦的心。他在菩提树下,通过自己一次又一次的说法,也为其他众多天神和人类拔除了深根的“有”——拔起、掘出,意思就是彻底铲除。巴利
Acchariyabbhutacittajātāti acchariyajātā abbhutajātā tuṭṭhijātā ca ahesuṃ. Samūlaṃ bhavaṃ udabbahīti bodhimaṇḍe attano tāya tāya desanāya aññesampi bahūnaṃ devamanussānaṃ samūlakaṃ bhavaṃ udabbahi, uddhari uppāṭesīti attho.
505 那时,魔被愤怒压倒,心想:“就在我还在的时候,沙门乔达摩讲说法义,差不多一万个梵天神都越出了我的掌控。”他因为被愤怒压倒,就附在一位梵天神随众的身上。为了显示这件事,世尊才说:“诸比丘,那时……”等等。这里说“你若这样自己觉悟了”,意思是:如果你就是这样靠自己觉悟了四圣谛。“不要引导声闻众”,意思是:不要把那个法引导给在家的声闻众或出家的声闻众。“住于卑劣身”,意思是:住于四恶趣。“住于殊胜身”,意思是:住于梵天界。这话是针对谁说的呢?是针对那些外道出家、修苦行的游方者。因为在诸佛还没有出世的时候,善男子们出家修苦行,不向任何人请教,独自一人修行,成就各种定,死后投生到梵天界。魔罗就是针对他们才这样说。“贤者,不宣说才是善”,意思是:不向别人宣说、不教诫、不讲说法义,这才是善的,这样更好。“不要教诫别人”,意思是:不要时而游走人间,时而游走天界,时而游走梵天界,时而游走龙界;应该坐在一个地方,以禅那、道、果的快乐度过时光。“以不攀谈故”,意思是:因为不攀谈。“以梵天神的邀请故”,意思是:因为跋迦梵天神用“贤者,这确实是常……”这样的方式,以他自身所在的梵天神境界发出邀请的话。“因此”,意思是:由于这个原因。这个记说的名称、称呼、施设,就成为“梵天神邀请经”。其余各处,意思都很明白。巴利
505. Tasmiṃ pana samaye māro pāpimā kodhābhibhūto hutvā, ‘‘mayi vicaranteyeva samaṇena gotamena dhammakathaṃ kathetvā dasamattāni brahmasahassāni mama vasaṃ ativattitānī’’ti kodhābhibhūtatāya aññatarassa brahmapārisajjassa sarīre adhimucci, taṃ dassetuṃ atha kho, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha sace tvaṃ evaṃ anubuddhoti sace tvaṃ evaṃ attanāva cattāri saccāni anubuddho. Mā sāvake upanesīti gihisāvake vā pabbajitasāvake vā taṃ dhammaṃ mā upanayasi. Hīne kāye patiṭṭhitāti catūsu apāyesu patiṭṭhitā. Paṇīte kāye patiṭṭhitāti brahmaloke patiṭṭhitā. Idaṃ ke sandhāya vadati? Bāhirapabbajjaṃ pabbajite tāpasaparibbājake. Anuppanne hi buddhuppāde kulaputtā tāpasapabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā kassaci kiñci avicāretvā ekacarā hutvā samāpattiyo nibbattetvā brahmaloke uppajjiṃsu, te sandhāya evamāha. Anakkhātaṃ kusalañhi mārisāti paresaṃ anakkhātaṃ anovadanaṃ dhammakathāya akathanaṃ kusalaṃ etaṃ seyyo. Mā paraṃ ovadāhīti kālena manussalokaṃ, kālena devalokaṃ, kālena brahmalokaṃ, kālena nāgalokaṃ āhiṇḍanto mā vicari, ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nisinno jhānamaggaphalasukhena vītināmehīti. Anālapanatāyāti anullapanatāya. Brahmuno ca abhinimantanatāyāti bakabrahmuno ca idañhi, mārisa, niccantiādinā nayena saha kāyakena brahmaṭṭhānena nimantanavacanena. Tasmāti tena kāraṇena. Imassa veyyākaraṇassa brahmanimantanikaṃtveva adhivacanaṃ saṅkhā samaññā paññatti jātā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
第10篇 《魔诃责经》的注释巴利
10. Māratajjanīyasuttavaṇṇanā
506 如是我闻,这句就是《魔诃责经》的经文。其中,潜入腹中,是说进入肚子里,进到肠子之间,坐在胃所在的位置。变得沉甸甸的,是说非常沉重、僵硬,像一堆石头。像积满豆子似的,意思是像吃了豆饭的人的肚子那样,像一个装满豆子的袋子,也像泡胀了的豆子。走进精舍,是说如果这种沉重是饮食不当造成的,在露天经行也不合适,于是就从经行处下来,走进叶屋,坐在平时铺好的座位上。独自如理作意,就是心里琢磨“这到底是怎么回事”,只从自己这方面想办法。如果那位长老当时能这样反省自己的戒行:“但愿前天、昨天或今天所吃的、还没消化的东西,或者其他什么不对劲的毛病,全都消化掉,恢复舒适。”然后用手按摩肚子,那魔就会消融退去。但长老没有那样做,而是如理作意。不要恼害如来:就好比儿子们被恼害,父母就被恼害了;同住比丘和近住弟子们被恼害,亲教师和依止师就被恼害了;地方上的人被恼害,国王就被恼害了。同样,如来的弟子被恼害,如来就被恼害了。所以说“不要恼害如来”。巴利
506.Evaṃme sutanti māratajjanīyasuttaṃ. Tattha koṭṭhamanupaviṭṭhoti kucchiṃ pavisitvā antānaṃ anto anupaviṭṭho, pakkāsayaṭṭhāne nisinno. Garugaro viyāti garukagaruko viya thaddho pāsāṇapuñjasadiso. Māsācitaṃmaññeti māsabhattaṃ bhuttassa kucchi viya māsapūritapasibbako viya tintamāso viya cāti attho. Vihāraṃ pavisitvāti sace āhāradosena esa garubhāvo, abbhokāse caṅkamituṃ na sappāyanti caṅkamā orohitvā paṇṇasālaṃ pavisitvā pakatipaññatte āsane nisīdi. Paccattaṃ yoniso manasākāsīti, ‘‘kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti āvajjamāno attanoyeva upāyena manasi akāsi. Sace pana thero attano sīlaṃ āvajjetvā, ‘‘yaṃ hiyyo vā pare vā parasuve vā paribhuttaṃ avipakkamatthi, añño vā koci visabhāgadoso, sabbaṃ jīratu phāsukaṃ hotū’’ti hatthena kucchiṃ parāmasissa, māro pāpimā vilīyitvā agamissa. Thero pana tathā akatvā yoniso manasi akāsi. Mā tathāgataṃ vihesesīti yathā hi puttesu vihesitesu mātāpitaro vihesitāva honti, saddhivihārikaantevāsikesu vihesitesu ācariyupajjhāyā vihesitāva, janapade vihesite rājā vihesitova hoti, evaṃ tathāgatasāvake vihesite tathāgato vihesitova hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘mā tathāgataṃ vihesesī’’ti.
“站在门闩处”,就是正站在门闩旁边。“门闩”是指门扇。意思是,他从叶屋的门口出来,走到叶屋外面,靠着门扇站立。巴利
Paccaggaḷe aṭṭhāsīti patiaggaḷeva aṭṭhāsi. Aggaḷaṃ vuccati kavāṭaṃ, mukhena uggantvā paṇṇasālato nikkhamitvā bahipaṇṇasālāya kavāṭaṃ nissāya aṭṭhāsīti attho.
507 我过去曾是,魔:长老为什么开始讲这段话呢?据说,长老这样想:“住在虚空中的天神,即使远在百由旬之外,人类的香气也会让他们感到不适。确实有这样的说法:‘王族啊,人类的香气会让百由旬外的天人感到不适。’而这位魔罗,是个住在城里、极其爱干净、有大威力、具足神通的天王,竟然钻进我的肚子里,坐在肠子中间的大肠部位,那他肯定已经被熏得极其难受了。像这样肮脏、令人厌恶的地方,他都钻得进去、坐得下来,那还有什么事做不出来?还有什么能让他羞愧?不过,只要对他说‘你曾是我的亲戚’,没有人会不心软。来吧,我就直戳他这层亲戚关系,用温和的办法把他打发走。”这样想完之后,长老就开始讲这段话。巴利
507.Bhūtapubbāhaṃ pāpimāti kasmā idaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi? Thero kira cintesi – ‘‘ākāsaṭṭhakadevatānaṃ tāva manussagandho yojanasate ṭhitānaṃ ābādhaṃ karoti. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘yojanasataṃ kho rājañña manussagandho deve ubbādhatī’ti (dī. ni. 2.415). Ayaṃ pana māro nāgariko paricokkho mahesakkho ānubhāvasampanno devarājā samāno mama kucchiyaṃ pavisitvā antānaṃ anto pakkāsayokāse nisinno ativiya paduṭṭho bhavissati. Evarūpaṃ nāma jegucchaṃ paṭikūlaṃ okāsaṃ pavisitvā nisīdituṃ sakkontassa kimaññaṃ akaraṇīyaṃ bhavissati, kiṃ aññaṃ lajjissati, tvaṃ mama ñātikoti pana vutte mudubhāvaṃ anāpajjamāno nāma natthi, handassa ñātikoṭiṃ paṭivijjhitvā mudukeneva naṃ upāyena vissajjessāmī’’ti cintetvā imaṃ desanamārabhi.
那时你曾是我的外甥,意思是说,在那个时候,你是我的外甥。这是依照传统世系来说的。但在天界,魔并不是靠着继承父亲或祖父的世系来当王的,而是凭善业的功德力,生到天界做了天王,住到寿命尽时便死去。另有一个人,凭自己造的业,在那个位子上生为统治者。因此可以知道,这位魔也是这样:他从那里死后,又造了善业,到这个时候才生在那个主宰的位子上。巴利
So me tvaṃ bhāgineyyo hosīti so tvaṃ tasmiṃ kāle mayhaṃ bhāgineyyo hosi. Idaṃ paveṇivasena vuttaṃ. Devalokasmiṃ pana mārassa pitu vaṃso pitāmahassa vaṃso rajjaṃ karonto nāma natthi, puññavasena devaloke devarājā hutvā nibbatto, yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā cavati. Añño eko attanā katena kammena tasmiṃ ṭhāne adhipati hutvā nibbattati. Iti ayaṃ māropi tadā tato cavitvā puna kusalaṃ katvā imasmiṃ kāle tasmiṃ adhipatiṭṭhāne nibbattoti veditabbo.
“无负担者”是指已经卸下负担,意思是与其他人不一样。“以很少的辛苦”就是只受一点点苦。“牧羊的人”就是放山羊、绵羊的人。“走在路上的人”就是已经上路行走的人。“把柴堆在身体上”就是从四周把柴堆成火葬堆。“点火后离开”是说他们估量火葬堆的大小,心想“这么多柴就足够把身体烧尽了”,于是从四个方向点火后离开。那火葬堆像灯焰一样燃烧起来,对长老来说,那时就像进入水洞坐下一样。“抖开衣服”是说长老从禅定中出来,在烟散尽后,踩着像紧叔迦花颜色的火炭,抖了抖衣服。然而他身上连一点热气都没有,衣服也连一根线丝都没被烧到。这就是禅定的果报。巴利
Vidhuroti vigatadhuro, aññehi saddhiṃ asadisoti attho. Appakasirenāti appadukkhena. Pasupālakāti ajeḷakapālakā. Pathāvinoti maggapaṭipannā. Kāye upacinitvāti samantato citakaṃ bandhitvā. Aggiṃ datvā pakkamiṃsūti ettakena sarīraṃ pariyādānaṃ gamissatīti citakassa pamāṇaṃ sallakkhetvā catūsu disāsu aggiṃ datvā pakkamiṃsu. Citako padīpasikhā viya pajjali, therassa udakaleṇaṃ pavisitvā nisinnakālo viya ahosi. Cīvarāni papphoṭetvāti samāpattito vuṭṭhāya vigatadhūme kiṃsukavaṇṇe aṅgāre maddamāno cīvarāni vidhunitvā. Sarīre panassa usumamattampi nāhosi, cīvaresu aṃsumattampi najjhāyi, samāpattiphalaṃ nāmetaṃ.
508 “辱骂”就是用十种骂人的事来骂。“恶言相向”就是用言语去辱骂。“激怒”就是去触恼对方。“恼害”就是让对方痛苦。这一切说的都是以言语去触恼。“就像那专爱捣乱的魔罗一样”,意思是就像那专爱破坏这些人的魔罗。“找到可乘之机”,意思是找到破绽,也就是得到让烦恼生起的所缘和条件。“秃头”等称呼:本来应该说“秃头的、秃头的人”“沙门、沙门的人”,但他们出于轻蔑,就说成“秃头家伙、小沙门”。“下贱的”指那些居士。“黑色的”就是黑的,意思是肤色黝黑的人。“亲足子”这里“亲族”指的是梵天神,因为婆罗门称梵天神为“祖父”。“足之子孙”就是“亲足子”,意思是从梵天神脊背下方的脚出生的。据说他们有这样的主张:“婆罗门从梵天神口中生出,刹帝利从胸口生出,吠舍从肚脐生出,首陀罗从膝盖生出,沙门则从脊背下方的脚生出。”巴利
508.Akkosathāti dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosatha. Paribhāsathāti vācāya paribhāsatha. Rosethāti ghaṭṭetha. Vihesethāti dukkhāpetha. Sabbametaṃ vācāya ghaṭṭanasseva adhivacanaṃ. Yathā taṃ dūsī māroti yathā etesaṃ dūsī māro. Labhetha otāranti labhetha chiddaṃ, kilesuppattiyā ārammaṇaṃ paccayaṃ labheyyāti attho. Muṇḍakātiādīsu muṇḍe muṇḍāti samaṇe ca samaṇāti vattuṃ vaṭṭeyya, ime pana hīḷentā muṇḍakā samaṇakāti āhaṃsu. Ibbhāti gahapatikā. Kiṇhāti kaṇhā, kāḷakāti attho. Bandhupādāpaccāti ettha bandhūti brahmā adhippeto . Tañhi brāhmaṇā pitāmahoti voharanti. Pādānaṃ apaccā pādāpaccā, brahmuno piṭṭhipādato jātāti adhippāyo. Tesaṃ kira ayaṃ laddhi – ‘‘brāhmaṇā brahmuno mukhato nikkhantā, khattiyā urato, vessā nābhito, suddā jāṇuto, samaṇā piṭṭhipādato’’ti.
我是禅修者,我是禅修者,意思是说我们是禅修者,我们确实是禅修者。生于甘甜类者,就是指生性懒惰的人。他们思虑,意思是他们在思考。深度思虑、极度思虑这一类说法,都是加上前缀之后词义得到强化的词。寻找老鼠者,是指傍晚为了觅食,从有洞的树上出来,在树枝上搜寻老鼠的那只动物。据说它表现得极其安静、温和,几乎一动不动,一旦时机到了,就迅速抓住老鼠。豺狼,就是野干,也有人叫它豺。在门缝、污秽处、垃圾堆,是指在门缝里、污秽处和垃圾堆这些地方。其中,门缝指房屋的缝隙;污秽处指排粪便的沟道;垃圾堆就是堆放垃圾的地方。脱离了承载者,是指走出荒漠旷野后,卸下了所背负的东西。在门缝、污秽处、垃圾堆,就是在门缝处、污秽处或垃圾堆。因为它也像被捆住四肢一样,一动不动地傻待在那里。巴利
Jhāyinosmā jhāyinosmāti jhāyino mayaṃ jhāyino mayanti. Madhurakajātāti ālasiyajātā. Jhāyantīti cintayanti. Pajjhāyantītiādīni upasaggavasena vaḍḍhitāni. Mūsikaṃ maggayamānoti sāyaṃ gocaratthāya susirarukkhato nikkhantaṃ rukkhasākhāya mūsikaṃ pariyesanto. So kira upasantūpasanto viya niccalova tiṭṭhati, sampattakāle mūsikaṃ sahasā gaṇhāti. Kotthūti siṅgālo, soṇotipi vadanti. Sandhisamalasaṅkaṭireti sandhimhi ca samale ca saṅkaṭire ca. Tattha sandhi nāma gharasandhi. Samalo nāma gūthaniddhamanapanāḷi. Saṅkaṭiraṃ nāma saṅkāraṭṭhānaṃ. Vahacchinnoti kantārato nikkhanto chinnavaho. Sandhisamalasaṅkaṭireti sandhimhi vā samale vā saṅkaṭire vā. Sopi hi baddhagatto viya niccalo jhāyati.
投生到地狱。如果魔罗是附在人的身体上做这种事,人们就不会有不善,不善只会算魔罗的。但他并没有附在身体上,而是让人看到丑恶的、令人追悔的景象。据说那时,他让比丘们看起来像是拿着投网罩住鱼,像拿着网抓鱼,像放下粘竿捉鸟,像带着狗在林中打猎,像抓着女人坐在酒馆里,像在跳舞,像在唱歌,又像在比丘尼的夜宿处、日住处有异性坐着或站着。人们不管去了山林、树林还是寺院,看到这令人追悔的景象后,回来就告诉别人:沙门竟做这种不是沙门该做的、不合身份的事,供养他们哪来的善?以后什么都别给他们。这样,那些人在所见之处辱骂持戒的人,造下非福,成了填满恶趣的人。所以说投生到地狱。巴利
Nirayaṃ upapajjantīti sace māro manussānaṃ sarīre adhimuccitvā evaṃ kareyya, manussānaṃ akusalaṃ na bhaveyya, mārasseva bhaveyya. Sarīre pana anadhimuccitvā visabhāgavatthuṃ vippaṭisārārammaṇaṃ dasseti, tadā kira so bhikkhū khippaṃ gahetvā macche ajjhottharante viya, jālaṃ gahetvā macche gaṇhante viya, lepayaṭṭhiṃ oḍḍetvā sakuṇe bandhante viya, sunakhehi saddhiṃ araññe migavaṃ carante viya, mātugāme gahetvā āpānabhūmiyaṃ nisinne viya, naccante viya, gāyante viya, bhikkhunīnaṃ rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānesu visabhāgamanusse nisinne viya, ṭhite viya ca katvā dassesi. Manussā araññagatāpi vanagatāpi vihāragatāpi vippaṭisārārammaṇaṃ passitvā āgantvā aññesaṃ kathenti – ‘‘samaṇā evarūpaṃ assamaṇakaṃ ananucchavikaṃ karonti, etesaṃ dinne kuto kusalaṃ, mā etesaṃ kiñci adatthā’’ti. Evaṃ te manussā diṭṭhadiṭṭhaṭṭhāne sīlavante akkosantā apuññaṃ pasavitvā apāyapūrakā ahesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘nirayaṃ upapajjantī’’ti.
509 Anvāviṭṭhā 是“被转动、被卷进去”的意思。“他们遍满而住”并不是说他们仅仅只是遍满而住。他们是站在咖咕桑特世尊的教诫上,修成了这四种梵住,再进一步增长以禅那为基础和近因的观,最后安住在阿拉汉果中。巴利
509.Anvāviṭṭhāti āvaṭṭitā. Pharitvā vihariṃsūti na kevalaṃ pharitvā vihariṃsu. Kakusandhassa pana bhagavato ovāde ṭhatvā ime cattāro brahmavihāre nibbattetvā jhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu.
510 “来处或去处”,就是依结生而说的来处,或依死没而说的去处,我都不知道。“心可能变异”,是指依喜悦而起的变异。“投生到天界”,这里也应按前面的方式理解。正如先前他显示的是能让人追悔的所缘,这里显示的则是能让人生起净信的所缘。据说那时,他在人们看得见的地方,把比丘们显现成:有的在空中行走,有的停在空中,有的盘腿坐在空中,有的在空中做针线活,有的在念书,有的在空中展开袈裟让身体适应气候,有的像刚出家的人在空中游走,有的像年轻沙弥站在空中摘花。人们无论去了山林、树林还是寺院,看到出家众这样的行持后,回来就告诉别人:“比丘们,甚至连沙弥,都有这样的大神力、大威力,供养他们会有大果报,你们应当供养、尊敬他们。”于是人们用四种资具恭敬比丘僧团,做了很多福德,成为遍满天界的人。因此说“投生到天界”。巴利
510.Āgatiṃvā gatiṃ vāti paṭisandhivasena āgamanaṭṭhānaṃ vā, cutivasena gamanaṭṭhānaṃ vā na jānāmi. Siyā cittassa aññathattanti somanassavasena aññathattaṃ bhaveyya. Saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjantīti idhāpi purimanayeneva attho veditabbo. Yathā hi pubbe vippaṭisārakaraṃ ārammaṇaṃ dasseti, evamidhāpi pasādakaraṃ. So kira tadā manussānaṃ dassanaṭṭhāne bhikkhū ākāse gacchante viya, ṭhite viya pallaṅkena nisinne viya, ākāse sūcikammaṃ karonte viya, potthakaṃ vācente viya, ākāse cīvaraṃ pasāretvā kāyaṃ utuṃ gaṇhāpente viya, navapabbajite ākāsena carante viya, taruṇasāmaṇere ākāse ṭhatvā pupphāni ocinante viya katvā dassesi. Manussā araññagatāpi vanagatāpi vihāragatāpi pabbajitānaṃ taṃ paṭipattiṃ disvā āgantvā aññesaṃ kathenti – ‘‘bhikkhūsu antamaso sāmaṇerāpi evaṃmahiddhiko mahānubhāvā, etesaṃ dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ nāma hoti, etesaṃ detha sakkarothā’’ti. Tato manussā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ catūhi paccayehi sakkarontā bahuṃ puññaṃ katvā saggapathapūrakā ahesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjantī’’ti.
511 “来吧,比丘们,你们要安住在身体上,观察身体的不净。”世尊走遍整个赡部洲,甚至去到只有两三位比丘住的地方——巴利
511.Etha tumhe, bhikkhave, asubhānupassino kāye viharathāti bhagavā sakalajambudīpaṃ āhiṇḍanto antamaso dvinnampi tiṇṇampi bhikkhūnaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā –
比丘们,当一位比丘的心经常安住在由修习不净想所熏养的状态中时,他的心面对淫欲行为就会退缩、排斥、退却,不会向外舒展,而是停留在舍或厌逆之中。巴利
‘‘Asubhasaññāparicitena, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno cetasā bahulaṃ viharato methunadhammasamāpattiyā cittaṃ patilīyati patikuṭati pativattati na sampasāriyati, upekkhā vā pāṭikulyatā vā saṇṭhāti.
比丘们,当一位比丘的心经常安住在以对食物的厌逆想所修习的状态中时,他的心对味渴爱就会退缩、排斥、退却,不会舒展开来,而是安住在舍或厌逆之中。巴利
Āhāre paṭikūlasaññāparicitena, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno cetasā bahulaṃ viharato rasataṇhāya cittaṃ patilīyati patikuṭati pativattati na sampasāriyati, upekkhā vā pāṭikulyatā vā saṇṭhāti.
比丘们,当一位比丘的心经常安住在以“对一切世间不欢喜想”所修习的状态中时,他的心对世间的种种迷人事物就会退缩、排斥、退转,不再向外舒展,而是安住在舍,或者安住在厌离之中。巴利
Sabbaloke anabhiratisaññāparicitena, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno cetasā bahulaṃ viharato lokacitresu cittaṃ patilīyati patikuṭati pativattati na sampasāriyati, upekkhā vā pāṭikulyatā vā saṇṭhāti.
比丘们,当一位比丘的心经常以无常想加以修习而安住时,他的心对利养、恭敬、名声就会退缩、排斥、退转,不向外舒展,或者安住于舍,或者安住于厌离。这样显示了功德之后——巴利
Aniccasaññāparicitena , bhikkhave, bhikkhuno cetasā bahulaṃ viharato lābhasakkārasiloke cittaṃ patilīyati patikuṭati pativattati na sampasāriyati, upekkhā vā pāṭikulyatā vā saṇṭhātī’’ti (a. ni. 7.49) evaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā –
比丘们,你们要安住在身体上观察不净,对食物生起厌恶想,对一切世间生起不欢喜想,对一切行观察无常。他讲了这四种修行法门。那些比丘也在这四种修行法门上下功夫,增长观智,灭尽一切烦恼,证得阿拉汉果。这四种修行法门能止息贪,止息嗔和痴,能对治贪,对治嗔和痴。巴利
Etha tumhe, bhikkhave, asubhānupassī kāye viharatha, āhāre paṭikūlasaññino sabbaloke anabhiratisaññino sabbasaṅkhāresu aniccānupassinoti. Imāni cattāri kammaṭṭhānāni kathesi. Tepi bhikkhū imesu catūsu kammaṭṭhānesu kammaṃ karontā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā sabbāsave khepetvā arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu, imānipi cattāri kammaṭṭhānāni rāgasantāni dosamohasantāni rāgapaṭighātāni dosamohapaṭighātāni cāti.
512 拿起石块:意思是拿起一块能握在手掌里的石头。这个魔罗先前已经怂恿婆罗门和居士们辱骂比丘们,又想借婆罗门和居士们的力量,给比丘僧团带来利养和恭敬,但一直找不到下手的机会,现在想亲自动手,就附在一个少年的身上,抓起了这样一块石头。因此说“拿起石块”。巴利
512.Sakkharaṃ gahetvāti antomuṭṭhiyaṃ tiṭṭhanapamāṇaṃ pāsāṇaṃ gahetvā. Ayañhi brāhmaṇagahapatikehi bhikkhū akkosāpetvāpi, brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṃ vasena bhikkhusaṅghassa lābhasakkāraṃ uppādāpetvāpi, otāraṃ alabhanto idāni sahatthā upakkamitukāmo aññatarassa kumārassa sarīre adhimuccitvā evarūpaṃ pāsāṇaṃ aggahesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘sakkharaṃ gahetvā’’ti.
“击碎你们的头”意思是头被击碎了,厚皮裂开,肉分成两半。但碎石没有击破头盖骨,撞到骨头后就弹了回去。关于“如象之回视而回顾”:世尊听到击打声后,就像一头大象想要回头张望时,不转动脖子,而是用整个身体转过去看。世尊也是这样,用整个身体转过来回顾。因为普通人的骨头是一节一节接在一起的,独觉佛的骨头像钩子尖一样相连,而佛陀的骨头则像锁链一样连成一体,所以佛陀没办法单独转动脖子。因此,就像大象要回头看后方时必须整个身体转过去一样,世尊也像被机关转动的金像一般,用整个身体转过来回顾。回顾之后,世尊站着说:“这个愚痴的魔罗真是不知分寸。”这话的意思是:这个邪恶的魔罗在作恶时完全不知道限度,做得太过分了。巴利
Sīsaṃ vo bhindīti sīsaṃ bhindi, mahācammaṃ chijjitvā maṃsaṃ dvedhā ahosi. Sakkharā panassa sīsakaṭāhaṃ abhinditvā aṭṭhiṃ āhacceva nivattā. Nāgāpalokitaṃ apalokesīti pahārasaddaṃ sutvā yathā nāma hatthināgo ito vā etto vā apaloketukāmo gīvaṃ aparivattetvā sakalasarīreneva nivattitvā apaloketi. Evaṃ sakalasarīreneva nivattitvā apalokesi. Yathā hi mahājanassa aṭṭhīni koṭiyā koṭiṃ āhacca ṭhitāni, paccekabuddhānaṃ aṅkusalaggāni, na evaṃ buddhānaṃ. Buddhānaṃ pana saṅkhalikāni viya ekābaddhāni hutvā ṭhitāni, tasmā pacchato apalokanakāle na sakkā hoti gīvaṃ parivattetuṃ. Yathā pana hatthināgo pacchābhāgaṃ apaloketukāmo sakalasarīreneva parivattati, evaṃ parivattitabbaṃ hoti. Tasmā bhagavā yantena parivattitā suvaṇṇapaṭimā viya sakalasarīreneva nivattitvā apalokesi , apaloketvā ṭhito pana, ‘‘na vāyaṃ dūsī māro mattamaññāsī’’ti āha. Tassattho, ayaṃ dūsī māro pāpaṃ karonto neva pamāṇaṃ aññāsi, pamāṇātikkantamakāsīti.
“与回顾同时”是指就在咖咕桑特世尊回顾的那一刹那、同一瞬间。“从那处命终”是指从那个天界死去,投生到大叫唤地狱,这就是它的意思。要知道,正在死去的人并不是随便在哪里站着就死了,所以他是先来到他化自在天,才在那里命终的。从“与回顾同时”这个说法来看,不能理解成是因为世尊回顾了他才死,而只是显示命终的时刻而已。不过,因为他冒犯了那位大弟子,他的寿命就像被斧头砍断一样,当场就断掉了,应当这样理解。“有三个名称”是指具有三个名字。“六触处”是指能作为对应于六触处的各别感受的缘。巴利
Sahāpalokanāyāti kakusandhassa bhagavato apalokaneneva saha taṅkhaṇaññeva. Tamhā ca ṭhānā cavīti tamhā ca devaṭṭhānā cuto, mahānirayaṃ upapannoti attho. Cavamāno hi na yattha katthaci ṭhito cavati, tasmā vasavattidevalokaṃ āgantvā cuto, ‘‘sahāpalokanāyā’’ti ca vacanato na bhagavato apalokitattā cutoti veditabbo, cutikāladassanamattameva hetaṃ. Uḷāre pana mahāsāvake viraddhattā kudāriyā pahaṭaṃ viyassa āyu tattheva chijjitvā gatanti veditabbaṃ. Tayo nāmadheyyā hontīti tīṇi nāmāni honti. Chaphassāyatanikoti chasu phassāyatanesu pāṭiyekkāya vedanāya paccayo.
被铁桩击打,就是被铁桩所击打。各自感受,就是自己造出感受。铁桩与铁桩在心脏相遇,就是一根铁桩和另一根铁桩在心脏中央相撞。据说,生在那个地狱里的众生,身体有三俱卢舍高,那位长老的身体也是这样。那时,地狱卒自己拿起像棕榈树干那么大的铁桩,这些铁桩燃烧着、炽热着、火焰冲天,他们一次又一次地转回来,一边说“你就是用这种方法谋划并造下恶业的”,一边像在糕饼槽里捣糕一样捣击他的心脏中央。有五十个人从脚的方向捣,五十个人从头的方向捣,这样捣着前进。这样前进时,经过五百年到达另一端,再转回来时,又经过五百年回到心脏中央。就是针对这个情形,才这样说。巴利
Saṅkusamāhatoti ayasūlehi samāhato. Paccattavedaniyoti sayameva vedanājanako. Saṅkunā saṅku hadaye samāgaccheyyāti ayasūlena saddhiṃ ayasūlaṃ hadayamajjhe samāgaccheyya. Tasmiṃ kira niraye upapannānaṃ tigāvuto attabhāvo hoti, therassāpi tādiso ahosi. Athassa hi nirayapālā tālakkhandhapamāṇāni ayasūlāni ādittāni sampajjalitāni sajotibhūtāni sayameva gahetvā punappunaṃ nivattamānā, – ‘‘iminā te ṭhānena cintetvā pāpaṃ kata’’nti pūvadoṇiyaṃ pūvaṃ koṭṭento viya hadayamajjhaṃ koṭṭetvā, paṇṇāsa janā pādābhimukhā paṇṇāsa janā sīsābhimukhā koṭṭetvā gacchanti, evaṃ gacchantā pañcahi vassasatehi ubho ante patvā puna nivattamānā pañcahi vassasatehi hadayamajjhaṃ āgacchanti. Taṃ sandhāya evaṃ vuttaṃ.
“出离受”是指异熟果报中的出离受。据说,这种受比大地狱的苦受还要苦。就像喝了油之后七天的护理,比之前七天喝油调养还要难受;同样,比大地狱之苦更苦的是附属地狱里异熟所生的出离受——他们是这么说的。“譬如鱼头”:人的头是圆的,用矛刺下去的时候,矛找不到着力点,会滑开;鱼的头又长又宽扁,矛刺下去有落点,不会滑脱,行刑就容易击中,所以受报时就得到这样的头形。巴利
Vuṭṭhānimanti vipākavuṭṭhānavedanaṃ. Sā kira mahāniraye vedanāto dukkhatarā hoti, yathā hi sinehapānasattāhato parihārasattāhaṃ dukkhataraṃ, evaṃ mahānirayadukkhato ussade vipākavuṭṭhānavedanā dukkhatarāti vadanti. Seyyathāpi macchassāti purisasīsañhi vaṭṭaṃ hoti, sūlena paharantassa pahāro ṭhānaṃ na labhati parigalati, macchasīsaṃ āyataṃ puthulaṃ, pahāro ṭhānaṃ labhati , avirajjhitvā kammakāraṇā sukarā hoti, tasmā evarūpaṃ sīsaṃ hoti.
513 “冒犯了无与伦比的声闻弟子”,意思是冲撞、触犯了无与伦比的声闻弟子。“各自感受”,意思是自己生起各别的感受。“有这样的地狱”,在这个地方,地狱应当依据《天使经》来说明。“你将遭遇黑暗之苦”,意思是黑色的魔罗,你将遭受痛苦。“在湖的中央”,在大海的中央,以水为依托而化现出来的宫殿,能存续一劫之久,它们的颜色像琉璃一样,光芒如同山顶上燃烧的芦束火焰一般闪耀,光辉灿烂、具足光明。在那些宫殿里,天女们以青等不同种类而显现种种颜色,翩翩起舞。“凡了知此者”,意思是凡了知此宫殿事者。如此,此处应当依宫殿饿鬼事本身来了知此义。“以脚拇指震动”,这应当依据《震动宫殿经》来说明。“凡了知最胜殿者”,这应当依据《小渴爱尽解脱经》来说明。“他询问帝释天神”,这也应当依据该经来说明。“善法堂附近”,意思是善法堂的附近,然而这是梵天界的善法堂,不是三十三天的住处。因为离开了善法堂,就没有所谓的天界。巴利
513.Vidhuraṃ sāvakamāsajjāti vidhuraṃ sāvakaṃ ghaṭṭayitvā. Paccattavedanāti sayameva pāṭiyekkavedanājanakā. Īdiso nirayo āsīti imasmiṃ ṭhāne nirayo devadūtasuttena dīpetabbo. Kaṇha-dukkhaṃ nigacchasīti kāḷaka-māra, dukkhaṃ vindissasi. Majjhe sarassāti mahāsamuddassa majjhe udakaṃ vatthuṃ katvā nibbattavimānāni kappaṭṭhitikāni honti, tesaṃ veḷuriyassa viya vaṇṇo hoti, pabbatamatthake jalitanaḷaggikkhandho viya ca nesaṃ acciyo jotanti, pabhassarā pabhāsampannā honti, tesu vimānesu nīlabhedādivasena nānattavaṇṇā accharā naccanti. Yo etamabhijānātīti yo etaṃ vimānavatthuṃ jānātīti attho. Evamettha vimānapetavatthukeneva attho veditabbo. Pādaṅguṭṭhena kampayīti idaṃ pāsādakampanasuttena dīpetabbaṃ. Yo vejayantaṃ pāsādanti idaṃ cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttisuttena dīpetabbaṃ. Sakkaṃ so paripucchatīti idampi teneva dīpetabbaṃ. Sudhammāyābhito sabhanti sudhammasabhāya samīpe, ayaṃ pana brahmaloke sudhammasabhāva, na tāvatiṃsabhavane. Sudhammasabhāvirahito hi devaloko nāma natthi.
在梵天界中“光明”是指:在梵天界,世尊与大目犍连、大迦叶等弟子们一起入火界定,安坐之后所放出的光明。有一次,世尊在梵天界的善法堂天众集会处,梵天大众心里在想:“有没有哪位沙门或婆罗门有这样大的神通,能够来到这里?”世尊以心了知梵天大众的想法,于是前往那里,坐在梵天大众的上方,入火界定,并想着让大目犍连等人前来。大目犍连等人也到了那里,礼拜导师之后,入火界定,各自坐在一方。整个梵天界变成了一片光明。导师宣说了阐明四圣谛的法,开示结束时,数千位梵天都安立于道果之中。正是针对这件事,才说了这些偈颂;而其中的义理应当依据某一部梵天经来说明。巴利
Brahmaloke pabhassaranti brahmaloke mahāmoggallānamahākassapādīhi sāvakehi saddhiṃ tassa tejodhātuṃ samāpajjitvā nisinnassa bhagavato obhāsaṃ. Ekasmiñhi samaye bhagavā brahmaloke sudhammāya devasabhāya sannipatitvā, – ‘‘atthi nu kho koci samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṃmahiddhiko. Yo idha āgantuṃ sakkuṇeyyā’’ti cintentasseva brahmagaṇassa cittamaññāya tattha gantvā brahmagaṇassa matthake nisinno tejodhātuṃ samāpajjitvā mahāmoggallānādīnaṃ āgamanaṃ cintesi. Tepi gantvā satthāraṃ vanditvā tejodhātuṃ samāpajjitvā paccekaṃ disāsu nisīdiṃsu, sakalabrahmaloko ekobhāso ahosi. Satthā catusaccappakāsanaṃ dhammaṃ desesi, desanāpariyosāne anekāni brahmasahassāni maggaphalesu patiṭṭhahiṃsu. Taṃ sandhāyimā gāthā vuttā, so panāyamattho aññatarabrahmasuttena dīpetabbo.
以解脱触证:就是以禅那的解脱去触证。林:指赡部洲。东毗提诃人洲:指东毗提诃人洲以及(其)洲。以及住在地上的人们:所谓住在地上的人,就是西牛货洲的人和北俱卢洲的人。意思是说,他也全部触证了这些。这个含义应当通过调伏难陀和优波难陀的故事来说明,这件事在《清净道论·神通品》里已经详细讲过。他招致非福:就是获得了非福。对比丘们,你不要生起这种期待:就是“我要去困扰比丘们”——你不要生起这样的期待。其余各处都显而易见。巴利
Vimokkhenaaphassayīti jhānavimokkhena phusi. Vananti jambudīpaṃ. Pubbavidehānanti pubbavidehānañca dīpaṃ. Ye ca bhūmisayā narāti bhūmisayā narā nāma aparagoyānakā ca uttarakurukā ca. Tepi sabbe phusīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ pana attho nandopanandadamanena dīpetabbo. Vatthu visuddhimagge iddhikathāya vitthāritaṃ. Apuññaṃ pasavīti apuññaṃ paṭilabhi. Āsaṃ mā akāsi bhikkhūsūti bhikkhū vihesemīti etaṃ āsaṃ mā akāsi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.